Issues and Options

Copyright and Non-Disclosure Notice The contents and layout of this report are subject to copyright owned by AMEC (©AMEC Environment & Infrastructure UK Limited 2011). save to the extent that copyright has been legally assigned by us to another party or is used by AMEC under licence. To the extent that we own the copyright in this report, it may not be copied or used without our prior written agreement for any purpose other than the purpose indicated in this report. The methodology (if any) contained in this report is provided to you in confidence and must not be disclosed or copied to third parties without the prior written agreement of AMEC. Disclosure of that information may constitute an actionable breach of confidence or may otherwise prejudice our commercial interests. Any third party who obtains access to this report by any means will, in any event, be subject to the Third Party Disclaimer set out below.

Third-Party Disclaimer Any disclosure of this report to a third party is subject to this disclaimer. The report was prepared by AMEC at the instruction of, and for use by, our client named on the front of the report. It does not in any way constitute advice to any third party who is able to access it by any means. AMEC excludes to the fullest extent lawfully permitted all liability whatsoever for any loss or damage howsoever arising from reliance on the contents of this report. We do not however exclude our liability (if any) for personal injury or death resulting from our negligence, for fraud or any other matter in relation to which we cannot legally exclude liability.

Document Revisions

No. Details Date

1 Draft Final Report 16/11/11

2 Draft Final Report Version 2 22/11/11

3 Final Report 20/12/11

Contents

1. Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 The Issues and Options Report 2 1.2.1 Vision for Tameside and Strategic Objectives 2 1.2.2 Strategic Spatial Options 3 1.3 The Requirement for SA 3 1.4 SA Approach and the Purpose of this Report 5 1.5 Report Structure 6

2. Baseline and Context 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Identifying Other Relevant Policies, Plans, Programmes and Sustainability Objectives 9 2.2.1 Synergies and Conflicts between the Reviewed Documents 13 2.3 Baseline Information and Sustainability Issues 14 2.3.1 Introduction 14 2.3.2 Baseline Information 14 2.3.3 Overview of Tameside 15 2.3.4 Biodiversity, Flora and Fauna 15 2.3.5 Population 19 2.3.6 Human Health 27 2.3.7 Soil 29 2.3.8 Water 29 2.3.9 Air 31 2.3.10 Climate Change 32 2.3.11 Material Assets 34 2.3.12 Cultural Heritage 40 2.3.13 Landscape 41 2.4 Identifying Sustainability Issues and Problems 42

3. SA Approach 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 SA Framework 46 3.3 Application of SA to the Issues and Options Report 49

3.3.1 Assessment of Strategic Objectives 50 3.3.2 Assessment of Strategic Spatial Options 50 3.4 When the SA was Undertaken and by Whom 51 3.5 Technical Difficulties 52

4. SA of the Issues and Options Report 53 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Strategic Objectives 53 4.3 Strategic Spatial Options 56 4.3.1 Strategic Spatial Option 1 58 4.3.2 Strategic Spatial Option 2 61 4.3.3 Strategic Spatial Option 3 64 4.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures 66

5. Conclusions and Next Steps 69 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Key Findings of the Appraisal 69 5.3 Monitoring 70 5.4 The Next Steps 71

Table 2.1 Plans, Policies and Programmes Reviewed 10 Table 2.2 Condition of SSSIs within Tameside 16 Table 2.3 Identification of UK BAP Priority Habitats within Tameside 17 Table 2.4 Local BAP Habitat within Tameside 17 Table 2.5 Tameside Population by Age Group 19 Table 2.6 Employment by Occupation 20 Table 2.7 Key Stage 4 Attainment Year on Year Comparisons 22 Table 2.8 Level of Qualification Obtained 22 Table 2.9 Homelessness Acceptances across Greater Manchester Authorities 24 Table 2.10 Recorded Crime for Seven Key Offences 2009/10 to 2010/11 25 Table 2.11 Life Expectancy within Tameside 27 Table 2.12 Waste Arising and Management between 2004/05 and 2009/10 35 Table 2.13 Distance Travelled to Work 38 Table 2.14 Amount of New Residential Floorspace within 30 minutes Public Transport Time of Various Facilities and Services38 Table 3.1 SA Framework 46 Table 3.2 The SA Objectives Compared to the SEA Directive Issues 49 Table 3.3 Compatibility Matrix: Scoring System 50 Table 3.4 Option Assessment: Scoring System 51 Table 4.1 Compatibility Matrix 53 Table 4.2 Appraisal Summary 56

Figure 1.1 Stages of the SA Process (as identified in ODPM Guidance) 5 Figure 2.1 Relationship with Other Plans and Programmes 10 Figure 3.1 Development of the SA Objectives 45

vii

Figure 2.2 Designated Sites After Page 18 Figure 2.3 UK BAP Priority Habitats After Page 18 Figure 2.4 Local BAP Habitats After Page 18 Figure 2.5 SBI, Managed Greenspace and Woodland After Page 18 Figure 2.6 Indicies of Multiple Deprivation Education Ranking After Page 22 Figure 2.7 Indicies of Multiple Deprivation Crime Ranking After Page 26 Figure 2.8 Indicies of Multiple Deprivation Health Ranking After Page 28

Appendix A Quality Assurance Appendix B Synergies with Other Plans and Programmes Appendix C Key Baseline Information Appendix D Detailed Assessment Matrices Appendix E Possible Indicators and their Sources

viii

1. Introduction

1.1 Overview

AMEC Environment and Infrastructure UK Limited (AMEC) has been commissioned by Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council to undertake a Sustainability Appraisal (SA) of the Core Strategy and Development Management Policy Development Plan Document Issues and Options Report1 (hereafter referred to as the Issues and Options Report).

The SA assesses the environmental, social and economic performance of the Issues and Options Report against a set of sustainability objectives. Where appropriate, the SA has highlighted areas where measures to avoid, minimise or mitigate any potential negative effects could be required. Similarly, and where appropriate, opportunities for improvements in the contribution towards sustainability are also identified.

The sustainability objectives have been informed by those of national, regional and local policy, local sustainability issues, and community and environmental strategies. The objectives are consistent with the aims of the UK Sustainable Development Strategy, Planning Policy Statement 1: Creating Sustainable Communities (PPS1) and the definition of sustainable development taken from the Brundtland Report2, which interprets sustainable development as meaning “a better quality of life for everyone, now and for generations to come”, and introduced the popular definition “development which meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs”.

The approach to the SA of the Issues and Options Report is based on the methodology described in the updated SA Scoping Report3 which has taken into account, and been informed by, comments received during consultation which ran from 16th November 2009 to 21st December 2009.

This report presents the findings of the SA of Issues and Options Report.

1 Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council (2010) Local Development Framework Core Strategy and Development Management Policy Development Plan Document: Issues and Options Report, Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council, Ashton-under-Lyne. 2 World Commission on Environment and Development (1987) Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report), Oxford University Press, Oxford. 3 Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council (2010) Sustainability Appraisal of the LDF: Scoping Report, Entec UK Ltd, Shrewsbury.

1.2 The Issues and Options Report

Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council is currently preparing its Core Strategy and Development Management Policy Development Plan Document (hereafter referred to as the Core Strategy). The Core Strategy will contain the key spatial policies and proposals for the Local Development Framework (LDF) for Tameside. It will set out the overall vision, objectives and spatial strategy for the Borough to 2026 and will also include more detailed development management policies alongside a delivery plan and monitoring framework. Whilst the Core Strategy will identify broad locations for development, it is not envisaged that specific sites will be allocated. This will take place as part of a subsequent Site Allocations Development Plan Document (DPD).

The Issues and Options Report is the first formal stage in the preparation of the Core Strategy. Amongst other elements, the Report sets out, for consultation, a vision for Tameside, strategic objectives designed to achieve this vision and a series of spatial options to meet the development needs of the Borough. These elements are discussed in-turn below.

1.2.1 Vision for Tameside and Strategic Objectives

The vision for Tameside has been developed independently of the LDF process and is based on that contained within the Tameside Sustainable Community Strategy4. The vision is reproduced below:

“Tameside is a great place to live. We will make it even better. It will continue to the borough where the people who live here feel at home, are able to get involved in the life of the community, where they can contribute to a prosperous local economy, feel safe and healthy, and take active responsibility for their environment.”

This vision is underpinned by a set of seven strategic objectives which are set out in Box 1. These objectives take as their starting point the six aims of the Sustainable Community Strategy and highlight how the Core Strategy will help achieve them.

4 Tameside Strategic Partnership (2009) My Tameside: Community Strategy 2009-2019, Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council, Ashton-under-Lyne.

Box 1 Core Strategy and Development Management Policy DPD Strategic Objectives

SO1: To promote sustainable development, and to mitigate and adapt to climate change across the borough. SO2: Create sustainable communities that enhance the Borough for residents now and in the future. SO3: To promote sustainable economic growth and the transition of the borough’s economy through diversification and encouraging the role of manufacturing. SO4: To improve the educational attainment and increase the skills of the borough’s residents. SO5: To promote the creation of a high quality, attractive Borough for existing and future generations. SO6: To improve the health of the borough’s population. SO7: to promote community safety and crime prevention in the borough

1.2.2 Strategic Spatial Options

Three strategic spatial options have been identified to deliver new development within the Borough to 2026. These options have been informed by national, regional and local planning policies and strategies as well as a number of technical studies. The strategic spatial options are listed below:

• Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations;

• Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations;

• Strategic Spatial Option 3: Growth in the wider urban area, with dispersed residential development and the majority of employment focused in accessible locations, with targeted expansion at broad strategic locations to facilitate sustainable economic growth.

The strategic spatial options listed above are described in more detail in Section 4 of this report. It should be noted that at this stage the options are broad and will be further refined to take account of the views of stakeholders and the wider community, additional technical evidence and the findings of this SA.

1.3 The Requirement for SA

SA is required for all DPDs in fulfilment of S19(5) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Spatial Planning (PPS12) outlines the requirements for SA as it relates to DPDs in paragraphs 4.39 to 4.43:

• Paragraph 4.39 states: “The 'sustainability appraisal' should be an appraisal of the economic, social and environmental sustainability of the plan.”

• Paragraph 4.40 states: “Sustainability appraisal fully incorporates the requirements of the European Directive on Strategic Environmental Assessment. Provided the sustainability appraisal is carried out

following the guidelines in the A Practical Guide to the Strategic Environmental Assessment Directive and the Plan-Making Manual there will be no need to carry out a separate SEA.”

• Paragraph 4.43 states: “The Sustainability Appraisal should perform a key role in providing a sound evidence base for the plan and form an integrated part of the plan preparation process. Sustainability assessment should inform the evaluation of alternatives. Sustainability assessment should provide a powerful means of providing to decision makers, and the public, that the plan is the most appropriate given reasonable alternatives.”

The SEA Directive

The regulations contained within the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act and the guidance set out in PPS12 identify that SAs should meet the requirements of EU Directive 2001/42/EC, Strategic Environmental Assessment, otherwise known as the ‘SEA Directive’. The SEA Directive requires the iterative assessment of the effects of certain plans and programmes on the environment. In this context, the Directive’s main areas of emphasis are to contribute to the integration of environmental considerations into the preparation and adoption of plans to promote sustainable development. The SEA Directive and SEA Regulations that transpose the Directive into UK Law, state that the SEA must consider the following topic areas:

• Biodiversity;

• Population;

• Human health;

• Flora and fauna;

• Soil;

• Water;

• Air;

• Climate change;

• Material assets;

• Cultural heritage; and

• Landscape.

The requirements of the SEA Directive need to be met to satisfy European Law.

SA and the SEA Directive

Although the SA and SEA process are separate appraisals, it is possible to combine these processes into a single assessment (as per the guidance set out in PPS12). This single assessment is able to cover significant environmental, social and economic effects of implementing plans or programmes.

1.4 SA Approach and the Purpose of this Report

The approach adopted to the assessment of the Issues and Options Report has sought to meet the requirements of both SEA and SA (Appendix A sets out how the requirements of the SEA Directive have been met in the preparation of this report) and from this point forward, reference to SA in this report should be taken as including SEA.

There are fivee keykey stages in the SA process which araress ee shown inshown in Figure 1.11.1Figure ..

FFiigguurre 1.1e 1.1 StagStages ooes ff ththee SSAA ProProccesess (a(as s idids enentified inintified ODPM GuGuODPM ididance)ance)

Key Stages Key Outputs

Stage A: Setting the context and objectives, establishing the baseline Scoping Report and deciding on the scope

Stage B: Developing and refining Adopted/Agreed Scoping alternatives and assessing effects Report

Stage C: Preparing the SA Report

Stage D: Consulting on the SA and the SA Report draft plan

Statement on Changes and Stage E: Monitoring implementation of Measures Concerning the plan or programme Monitoring

In the context of the Core Strategy, Stage A of the SA process was completed in January 2010 and culminated in the publication of a Scoping Report. The Scoping Report established the framework for the assessment of the sustainability implications of the Core Strategy as well as other documents that are to comprise the Tameside LDF. This framework was informed by a review of other relevant polices, plans and programmes as well as baseline information. This provided an opportunity to define the key environmental, social and economic issues which need to be taken into account in preparing the Core Strategy and identify the SA objectives that will be used to assess its sustainability. The Scoping Report was subject to consultation which ran from 16th November 2009 to 21st December 2009 and the SA framework modified as a result of responses received.

This report represents an output of Stage B and is intended to support the development and refinement of the Core Strategy by testing the sustainability strengths and weaknesses of the Issues and Options Report. This will help promote sustainable development through the early integration of sustainability considerations into the preparation of the plan. This SA Report has been issued for consultation alongside the Issues and Options Report.

1.5 Report Structure

The remainder of this report is structured as follows:

• Section 2: Baseline and Context introduces the baseline data and context that has been used to inform the development of the SA objectives that comprise the assessment framework;

• Section 3: SA Approach outlines the methodology used to appraise the Issues and Options Report including the assessment framework;

• Section 4: SA of the Issues and Options Report presents the findings of the SA;

• Section 5: Summary, Monitoring and Next Steps provides a summary of the report and an explanation of the subsequent stages of SA in the context of the Core Strategy.

How to Comment on this SA Report

This report has been issued for consultation alongside the Issues and Options Report. In particular, we would like to hear your views as to whether the effects which are predicted (see Section 4 of this report) are likely and whether there are any significant effects which have not been considered.

Comments should be sent to:

The Strategic Planning Team, Investment and Development, Children, Learning and Economic Services, Rm 5.16, Council Offices, Wellington Road, Ashton-under-Lyne OL6 6DL

Email: [email protected]

The deadline for commenting on this report is 23rd March 2012.

If you would like to discuss or require any further help with this report please contact the Strategic Planning Team on the email address given above or by calling 0161 342 3346.

It is important to note that any comments made in relation to this report cannot be treated as confidential.

Further information about the LDF can be found on the Council’s web site at www.tameside.gov.uk/strategicplanning

2. Baseline and Context

2.1 Introduction

This section provides an overview of the baseline and context that has informed the development of the SA objectives used to assess the sustainability of the Issues and Options Report and which has also been used to support the appraisal itself. It includes a review of other relevant policies, plans and programmes (Section 2.2) and baseline data (Section 2.3) and culminates in the identification of key sustainability issues to be considered by the Core Strategy (Section 2.4).

2.2 Identifying Other Relevant Policies, Plans, Programmes and Sustainability Objectives

The purpose of reviewing policies, plans and programmes is to:

• ensure that the relationship the Core Strategy has with other documents is recognised; and

• ensure that any relevant environmental protection and sustainability objectives contained within these documents are integrated into the SA.

Reviewing policies, plans and programmes can also provide appropriate information on the baseline for the plan area and the key sustainability issues.

A number of plans and programmes were reviewed as part of the preparation of the updated Scoping Report. However, this process is an iterative one and to ensure that the review is as up-to-date as possible, relevant plans and programmes published since the Scoping Report have been reviewed as part of the preparation of this report.

Figure 2.1 illustrates how the Core Strategy relates in a hierarchical way to international, national, regional and other local plans and programmes. It is these documents that are more likely to contain environmental and sustainability objectives and targets and these were the focus of the review.

Figure 2.1 Relationship with Other Plans and Programmes

International / European Legislation and Directives

National Strategies, Programmes, Plans, and White Papers (including Planning Policy Statements)

Northwest of England Regional Strategies (e.g. Regional Spatial Strategy, the Regional Economic Strategy)

Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council Council’s Local Development Framework

Local/Area Based Initiatives

Note: It is the Government’s intention to abolish Regional Strategies The specific plans and programmes which are relevant to the Core Strategy are listed in the Table 2.1. A detailed review of these documents is included at Appendix B whilst a summary of the main findings and influences identified within these documents for the assessment framework is provided in Section 3 of this report.

Table 2.1 Plans, Policies and Programmes Reviewed

Key Plans and Programmes

International

Johannesburg Declaration on Sustainable Development (2002) Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention of Climate Change (1997) Bern Convention on the Conservation of European Wildlife and Natural Habitats (1979) UNESCO World Heritage Convention European Landscape Convention European Spatial Development Perspective World Commission on Environment and Development (1987) Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report) European Union Sustainable Development Strategy (May 2001) European Air Quality Directives (96/62/EC) (99/30/EC) and (2002/3/EC) European Water Framework Directive (2000/60/EC) European Nitrates Directive (91/676/EC) Bathing Water Quality Directive (Council Directive 76/160/EEC) Drinking Water Directive (98/83/EC) EU Directive on the Conservation of Wild Birds (79/409/EC) EU Directive on the Conservation of Natural Habitats and Wild Fauna and Flora (92/43/EEC) & subsequent amendments EU Framework Waste Directive (75/442/EEC)

Key Plans and Programmes

EU Directive on the Landfill of Waste (99/31/EC) EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Directive (94/62/EC) Renewed EU Sustainable Development Strategy (2006) European Biodiversity Strategy (1998) EU Energy Performance in Buildings Directive (2002/91/EC)

National

Securing the Future – the UK Sustainable Development Strategy (2005) The Rural Development Programme for England Department of Transport – 10 Year Transport Plan (2000) Sustainable Communities Plan: Building for the Future (2003) Working with the grain of nature – A Biodiversity Strategy for England (2002) Rural Strategy (2004) Energy White Paper - Our Energy Future, Creating a Low Carbon Economy (2003) Energy White Paper - Meeting the Energy Challenge (2007) Environment Agency - Water for People and the Environment – Water Resources Strategy for England and Wales (2009) Making Space for Water: Taking Forward a New Government Strategy for Flood Protection and Coastal Erosion Risk Management in England (2005) Housing Act 2004 Sustainable Energy (2003) Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland (2007) DCMS (2002) Game Plan: A Strategy for Delivering the Governments Sport and Physical Activities Objectives Code for Sustainable Homes – A Step Change in Sustainable Home Building Practices (2006) Review of Heritage Protection: The Way Forward (2004) DCMS – Heritage Protection for the 21st Century - White Paper (2007) The Planning Act 2008 The Climate Change Act 2008 The Historic Environment – A Force for Our Future (2001) The Groundwater (England and Wales) Regulations 2009 (Defra, October 2009) Environmental Permitting Regulations (England and Wales) 2010 (Defra & DECC, March 2010) Waste Strategy for England (Defra, March 2007) Green Infrastructure Guidance - Natural England (2009) Lifetime Homes, Lifetime Neighbourhoods - A National Strategy for Housing in an Ageing Society (2008) Localism Act 2011 Planning Policy Statement 1: Creating Sustainable Communities (2005) Supplement to PPS1: Planning and Climate Change (2007) Planning Policy Guidance 2: Green Belts Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing (2006 and updated 2011) Planning Policy Statement 4: Planning for Sustainable Economic Growth (2009) Planning Policy Statement 5: Planning for the Historic Environment (2010) Planning Policy Statement 6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) Planning Policy Statement 7: Sustainable Development in Rural Areas (2004) Planning Policy Statement 9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2006) Planning Policy Statement 10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (2005) Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004) Planning Policy Guidance 13: Transport (2001 and updated in 2011) Planning Policy Guidance 17: Open Space, Sport and Recreation (2002) Good Practice Guide on Planning for Tourism (2006)

Key Plans and Programmes

Planning Policy Statement 22: Renewable Energy (2004) Planning Policy Statement 23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004) Planning Policy Statement 24: Planning and Noise (1994) Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk (2010) Draft National Planning Policy Framework (July, 2011)

Regional

Future North West: Our Shared Priorities (4NW, August 2010) Regional Spatial Strategy for the Northwest (2008) Northwest Partial Plan Review (Consultation July - October 2009) Regional Spatial Strategy for the East Midlands (2005) Regional Spatial Strategy for Yorkshire and Humber (2008) Regional Economic Strategy (2006) Rural Renaissance: The Regional Rural Recovery Action Plan (2002) England’s Northwest Connected: ICT Strategy (2005) England’s Northwest: Science Strategy.2007-2010 Northwest Regional Housing Strategy (2009) Northwest Equality and Diversity Strategy (2005) Streets for All: Northwest (2005) Investment for Health: A plan for the Northwest of England (2003) The Updated Regional Waste Strategy for England’s North West (4NW, February 2010) Regional Cultural Strategy (2002) Heritage Counts 2008 Tourism Strategy for the Northwest Region 2003-2010 Northwest Sustainable Energy Strategy (2006) North West Climate Change Action Plan 2010-2012 (4NW)

Sub-regional

Greater Manchester’s Third Local Transport Plan (2011/12-2015/16) Greater Manchester Air Quality Plan Greater Manchester Biodiversity Action Plans Greater Manchester Employment Land Position Statement (2009) The Pennine Edge Forest

Tameside Wide

Our Life in Tameside 2009 – 2019: Tackling Health Inequalities and Improving Health My Tameside: Tameside Sustainable Community Strategy 2009-19 Tameside Together 2008-11- Local Area Agreement (Revised March 2010) Tameside Council Corporate Plan 2011-14 (March 2011) Tameside Third Sector Coalition: Cross Sector Policy Group Action Plan 2009-10 Tameside Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy 2008-2010 Tameside Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnership Plan 2008-2011 Tameside Alcohol Harm Reduction Strategy 2007-2010 A Trees and Woodlands Strategy for Tameside A Nature Conservation Strategy for Tameside 1996 Tameside Economic Masterplan – Reviewed Document July 2009 Community Safety Strategy 2005 – 2008 Tameside Housing Strategy 2010-2016

Key Plans and Programmes

Tameside Countryside Strategy 2009 - 2019 Tameside Children’s Trust: Children and Young People’s Plan 2010 – 2013 Tameside Homelessness Strategy 2008-20013 The Tameside Enterprise Strategy A Strategy for the Management of Waste in Tameside 2005-2010 Tameside Affordable Warmth Strategy 2009-12 Tameside Play Strategy Supporting People in Tameside – 5 Year Strategy 2005-2010 Low Carbon Tameside: Sustainable Use of Resources Strategy 2010-20 Supplementary Planning Documents and Development Briefs

2.2.1 Synergies and Conflicts between the Reviewed Documents

The review of the plans, policies and programmes has identified a number of related themes, which the Core Strategy should seek to address. These include:

• The overarching aim of promoting sustainable development;

• Promoting sustainable economic growth and prosperity;

• Responding positively to climate change;

• Conservation and enhancement of the natural environment;

• Reducing pollution - air, chemical and noise;

• Provision of housing to meet local needs;

• Promotion of sustainable communities and social cohesion;

• Conservation and enhancement of the historic built environment.

The review has also identified a number of potentially conflicting issues which the Core Strategy may need to resolve, these include:

• Maximising growth whilst protecting the environment;

• Improving accessibility whilst reducing dependency on the car;

• Maximising the provision of affordable and high quality housing without inhibiting the delivery of housing in general.

2.3 Baseline Information and Sustainability Issues

2.3.1 Introduction

An essential part of the SA process is the identification of the current baseline conditions and their likely evolution. It is only with a knowledge of existing conditions, and a consideration of their significance, that the issues which the Core Strategy should address can be identified and its subsequent success or otherwise be monitored.

The SEA Directive requires that the evolution of the baseline conditions of the plan area (that would take place without the plan or programme) are identified. This is useful in informing assessments of significance, particularly with regard to the effect that conditions may already be improving or worsening and the rate of such change. Where information on these trends is available it has been identified.

2.3.2 Baseline Information

The updated Scoping Report included a review of baseline conditions for Tameside. In order to ensure that this baseline is sufficiently robust to support the appraisal of the Issues and Options Report, it has been updated where appropriate to reflect new data/information made available since publication of the Scoping Report.

Information to inform the baseline data collection has been obtained from a range of sources including:

• Tameside Annual Monitoring Report (2009/10);

• Office of National Statistics (ONS);

• Nomis;

• Greater Manchester Biodiversity Action Plan;

• The emerging LDF eviddence base;

• 2001 Census;

• Department of Communities and Local Government (including The English Indices of Deprivation 2010);

• Department of Children, Schools and Families;

• Department of Health;

• Government Office Northwest;

• Northwest Development Agenda;

• 4NW;

• Natural England;

• Environment Agency;

• English Heritage;

• Multi-Agency Geographic Information for the Countryside.

In completing this baseline review, use was made of existing information in preference to the commissioning of new baseline datasets.

There are gaps in the data collected as a result of not all of the relevant information being available at a local level. In addition, methods of data collection and methodologies adopted may have changed meaning that opportunities for comparison are reduced.

2.3.3 Overview of Tameside

Tameside was created on 1st April 1974, by the Local Government Act 1972 as one of the ten metropolitan districts of Greater Manchester. It took over the local government functions of nine districts which were formerly in the administrative counties of Lancashire and Cheshire. The Borough covers an area of 103 km² and comprises the centres of Ashton-under-Lyne, Audenshaw, Denton, Dukinfield, Hyde, Hattersley, Mossley, Droylsden and Stalybridge.

The Borough has a great number of strengths which enhance the area’s uniqueness as a Greater Manchester Authority. There are, however, also a number of key issues which need to be addressed to improve sustainability within the Borough. These are identified under the key topic headings contained within the SEA Directive as set out in Section 1.3 of this report.

2.3.4 Biodiversity, Flora and Fauna

Tameside has a varied and diverse environment with a contrast between its largely urban western and central area and the high moorlands forming part of the Pennine foothills to the east. Within Tameside is part of the European Designated Peak District Moors Special Protection Area (SPA) and the South Pennine Special Area of Conservation (SAC). The SPA covers an area of 45,301 hectares (ha) and the SAC a total of 65,025 ha although only a small proportion of both sites are within the Borough. There are also three Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) located in Tameside which are identified as:

• Huddersfield Narrow Canal;

• Hollinwood Branch Canal;

• Dark Peak (only part of which is within the Borough).

Together, these three SSSI cover an area of 122.1 ha. Natural England identified the condition of each site on 1st August 2009 and these conditions are summarised in Table 2.2 (the figure for Dark Peak has been updated to reflect 2010 information).

The location of designated sites (SAC, SPA and SSSI as well as Local Nature Reserves) are illustrated in Figure 2.2.

Table 2.2 Condition of SSSIs within Tameside

Site Condition (% of area)

Huddersfield Narrow Canal 100% unfavourable but recovering

Hollinwood Branch Canal 100% unfavourable no change

5 Dark Peak 22.34% favourable Source: Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council Annual Monitoring Report 2007/08 and 2009/2010 As a comparison to the condition of SSSIs in Tameside, 48.46% of the total area of SSSIs within the Northwest are identified as being in favourable condition, 41.92% unfavourable but recovering, 7.65% unfavourable but no change, 1.95% declining and 0.02% destroyed.

In addition to the above international and national level designations, there are eight Local Nature Reserves (LNR) within Tameside (Knott Hill, Hollinwood Branch Canal, Great Wood, Hulmes and Hardy Wood, Haughton Dale, Castle Clough and Cowbery Dale, Hurst Clough and Rocher Vale) and 55 Sites of Biological Importance (SBIs) which are non-statutory sites of importance for nature conservation. These 55 SBIs cover an area of 1389.7 ha, with a net increase since 2004/05 of 398.1 ha. Although the LNRs and SBIs are considered to be of less importance for nature conservation than the nationally designated sites, they still provide a vitally important wildlife and public recreation resource. The locations of SBIs within Tameside are highlighted in Figure 2.5.

The Greater Manchester Biodiversity Action Plans were recently reviewed and updated with a new format and additional sections including best practice and SMART targets. Their aim is to encourage the long-term survival of biodiversity through the identification, protection and management of important habitats and to enhance degraded habitats and populations with appropriate management. The BAP notes that Tameside has areas of species rich (unimproved) neutral grassland and a greater extent of lowland broadleaved woodland with Gower Hey cited as a particularly good example. Traditionally, much of the open space within the eastern belt of Tameside has been subject to farming although areas of heathland and bog still remain. These areas of heathland and bog make an

5 Dark Peak SSSI is not wholly within Tameside, as such the condition statistics should be considered as cross boundary.

important contribution to the overall amounts of habitats in Greater Manchester. Other semi-natural habitats that remain within Tameside are mire and heathland, woodland, acid grassland and open water.

Data provided by the Greater Manchester Ecological Unit (GMEU) illustrates the area of different UK BAP Priority Habitat Types that are within Tameside and which cover 13.68% of the Borough. For ease of reference, the priority habitats are illustrated in Figure 2.3. The total area of each habitat type is outlined in Table 2.3.

Table 2.3 Identification of UK BAP Priority Habitats within Tameside

UK BAP Priority Habitat Site Area (with Tameside)

Blanket Bog 210.3 ha

Lowland Beech and Yew Woodland 13.2 ha

Lowland Dry Acid Grassland 24.5 ha

Lowland Heathland 60.6 ha

Lowland Meadows 2.3 ha

Lowland Mixed Deciduous Woodland 9.1 ha

Purple Moor Grass and Rush Pasture 81.6 ha

Upland Heathland 902 ha

Wet Woodland 107.5 ha

In addition to the above UK Priority BAP Habitats there are also a number of Local BAP Habitats which serve to identify biodiversity resources and priorities which reflect local priorities according to local circumstances. The GMEU has provided current baseline information of the locations and areas of different Local BAP Habitats types which have been plotted in Figure 2.4 and summarised in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 Local BAP Habitat within Tameside

Local BAP Habitat Type Area

Acid Grassland 518.9 ha

Canals 21.9 ha

Lowland Broadleaved Woodland 250.7 ha

Lowland Broadleaved Woodland/Lowland Heathland Mosaic 0.852 ha

Lowland Heathland 79.7 ha

Lowland Heathland/Acid Grassland Mosaic 103.6 ha

Managed Greenspace 760.8 ha

Local BAP Habitat Type Area

Marshy Grassland 28.6 ha

Mosslands 631.4 ha

Ponds and Lodges 153.7 ha

Purple Moor Grass and Rush Pasture 14.2 ha

Unimproved Neutral Grassland 19.4 ha

Upland Heath 41.9 ha

Upland Heathland/Acid Grassland Mosaic 321.1 ha

Wet Woodland 124.6 ha

Total 3,071.4 ha

Tameside Countryside Service has also received accreditation from the UK Woodland Assurance Standard for the sustainable management of its 18 woodlands. It is estimated that approximately 6% of Tameside is covered by woodland with approximately 132.9 ha occupied by Ancient Woodland. The extent of Ancient Woodland and woodlands identified in the Woodland Inventory is highlighted in Figure 2.5. This figure also illustrates the locations of SBIs, the extent of greenspace and water within Tameside.

390000 400000 Key

Tameside Boundary

N SSSI

SPA

SAC

Local Nature Reserve 400000 400000

0 2,500 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.2 Designated Sites

December 2011 390000 400000 31007-W04.mxd squij

Reproduced from the Ordnance Survey mapping with the permission of the Controller of Her Majesty's Stationary Office © Crown copyright. Unauthorised reproduction infringes Crown copyright and may lead to prosecution or civil proceedings. Tameside MBC Licence No. LA100022697, 2006 390000 400000 Key

Tameside Boundary

UK BAP Priority Habitats

N Blanket Bog

Lowland beech and yew woodland

Lowland dry acid grassland

Lowland heathland

Lowland meadows

Lowland mixed deciduous woodland

Purple moor grass and rush pasture

Upland heathland

400000 400000 Wet woodland

0 2,500 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.3 UK BAP Priority Habitats

November 2011 390000 400000 31007-W01.mxd squij

Tameside Boundary

Tameside Habitats

Acid grassland N Canals

Lowland broadleaved woodland

Lowland broadleaved woodland/ Lowland heathland mosaic

Lowland heathland

Lowland heathland/ Acid grassland mosaic

Lowland meadow

Managed greenspace

Marshy grassland

Mosslands

400000 400000 Ponds and lodges

Purple moor grass and rush pasture

Unimproved neutral grassland

Upland heathland

Upland heathland/ Acid grassland mosaic

Wet woodland

0 2,500 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.4 Local BAP Habitats

November 2011 390000 400000 31007-W02.mxd squij

Tameside Boundary

Ancient Woodland

N Woodland Inventory

SBI

Greenspace

Water 400000 400000

0 2,500 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.5 SBI, Managed Greenspace and Woodland

November 2011 390000 400000 31007-W03.mxd squij

Screening for Habitats Regulations Assessment Under the Conservation (Natural Habitats & c.) Regulations 1994 (as amended), plans and projects which may affect Natura 2000 sites (i.e. SPAs, SACs and, under British law, Ramsar Sites), are required to undergo a Habitats Regulations Assessment (HRA). This includes impacts from a plan or project either alone, or in combination with other plans or projects, and which are not directly connected with, or necessary to, the management of the Natura 2000 site.

In order to ensure that the Core Strategy will have no adverse effects on Natura 2000 sites within Tameside and the surrounding area, a HRA screening assessment exercise will be undertaken in accordance with the requirements of the Habitats Regulations. This will specifically consider whether there is a potential for policies contained within the Core Strategy to adversely affect the integrity of the nature conservation objectives of the Natura 2000 sites.

The HRA screening stage will involve the collation of baseline information relating to the Natura 2000 sites that may be affected. Detailed information of these sites, their qualifying interests, current status, threats and management issues will be gathered through desk study and consultation. The HRA screening stage will be undertaken independently of this report although its findings may be used to inform the SA of subsequent Core Strategy documents.

2.3.5 Population

Demographic Latest estimates indicate that the population of Tameside is approximately 216,900 (ONS 2010 mid year estimates). According to 2008-based subnational population projections (ONS, 2010) the Borough’s population is predicted to increase to 234,100 residents by 2028. Of the total resident population, 48.9% are male and 51.1% female.

The age structure of the population is relatively balanced and is highlighted in Table 2.5 below.

Table 2.5 Tameside Population by Age Group

Age Group Tameside (%) Northwest (%) England (%)

0-14 18.5 18 17.5

15-29 19.5 20.5 20.0

30-44 20 19.5 20.5

45-64 26 25.5 25.5

65+ 16 16.5 16.5 Source: ONS- Resident Population Estimates - All Persons by Broad Age Band - June 2010

The proportion of residents from different ethnic minorities varies greatly within the Borough. For example, according to the 2001 Census in the Ashton St Peters ward, the Black and Minority Ethnic (BME) population accounted for 24% of residents whilst in the Longdendale ward, this figure was only 1.5%. There is a large Bangladeshi community in Hyde, and sizeable Indian and Pakistani communities in Ashton.

Economy The working age resident population of Tameside was 139,900 in the period 2009/10 of which 76% (106,800) were in employment. This economic activity rate was similar to the UK average (76.5%) and higher than that for the Northwest region (74.4%) over the same period.

The local economy of Tameside remains in a state of change with the manufacturing sector still contracting as part of a national trend and the proportion of manufacturing jobs in the Borough has decreased every year since 1999. However, the Borough still retains a significant proportion of its employment in manufacturing (18.5%) which is greater than any other borough in Greater Manchester where the average is only 9.9%. This means that there remains a heavy reliance on industries that are likely to decline further in the coming years. Many of the older and larger manufacturing firms have ceased operations in Tameside in recent years and the economy is now characterised by small and medium-sized businesses.

Reflecting this, Tameside still has a significantly lower than average number of people employed in occupations in the socio-economic classification (SOC) 2000 major groups 1-3, with a higher than average number of people employed in SOC 2000 major group 8-9 (see Table 2.6). The proportion employed in major group 4-5 has significantly decreased between 2008/09 and 2009/10 whilst the proportion in major group 6-7 has fluctuated.

Table 2.6 Employment by Occupation

Tameside Tameside Tameside Tameside Tameside Northwest Great 2005/06 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/2010 2009/10 Britain 2009/10

Soc 2000 major group 1-3 33.5 31.9 35.1 33.4 35.3 41.1 44.1

1. Managers and Senior Officials 11.6 10.6 12.8 11.8 13.0 14.6 15.7

2. Professional Occupations 8.2 7.9 9.7 8.5 8.1 12.6 13.7

3. Associate Professional & 13.7 13.4 12.6 13.1 14.2 13.9 14.7 Technical

Soc 2000 major group 4-5 30.5 27.7 27.1 28.2 20.8 21.5 21.6

4. Administrative & Secretarial 16.8 15.3 12.6 14.7 11.4 11.1 11.2

5. Skilled Trades Occupations 13.6 12.4 14.5 13.5 9.4 10.4 10.4

Soc 2000 major group 6-7 17.7 18.3 16.1 17.4 19.7 17.8 16.1

6. Personal Service Occupations 6.9 7.8 8.4 9.0 9.9 9.2 8.7

Tameside Tameside Tameside Tameside Tameside Northwest Great 2005/06 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/2010 2009/10 Britain 2009/10

7. Sales & Customer Service 10.8 10.5 7.7 8.3 9.8 8.6 7.4 Occupations

Soc 2000 major group 8-9 18.3 22.1 21.4 20.9 23.6 19.2 17.7

8. Process plant & machine 9.6 9.7 9.7 10.2 10.6 7.5 6.6 operatives

9. Elementary Occupations 8.7 12.3 11.8 10.7 13.0 11.7 11.1 Source: Tameside MBC Annual Monitoring Report 2009/10 Average gross weekly pay for full-time workers residing in the Borough in 2010 was £424.70. This is lower than the average for the Northwest region (£471.20) and Great Britain (£501.80) and represents a decrease of 2% on the 2009 average of £433.50.

The rate of unemployment in Tameside based on the monthly claimant count has increased from 2.3% (3,155 claimants) in January 2006 to 5.0% (7,004) in October 2011. The current unemployment rate is above the average for the Northwest (4.4%) and the average for the UK (3.8%).

The 2010 Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) identifies that Tameside is ranked 43rd out of 354 authorities in terms of employment deprivation (where 1= most deprived and 354 = least deprived). This represents a fall of one place from 2007 IMD figures. However, there are great differences in levels of deprivation throughout the Borough. Although there are a number of Super Output Areas (SOAs) that appear in the least deprived categories, there are also many that are within the 10% most deprived in the country.

In terms of business health and entrepreneurship, during the period 2004/05 to 2009/10 the total business count in Tameside increased by 305, from 5,860 to 6,165. However, during this period the figure peaked in 2007/8 at 6,280 and has subsequently fallen.

Skills and Education A key concern within Tameside is economic and social polarisation and its impact on educational achievement. The educational attainment of pupils within Tameside broadly follows the wider improvement in GCSE results recorded in England, although the overall percentage of pupils achieving 5+ A*-C (and equivalent) including English and Maths is lower than the national average (see Table 2.7).

Table 2.7 Key Stage 4 Attainment Year on Year Comparisons

2007 2008 2009 2010

Tameside 38.5% 41.8% 45.5% 49.7%

England 46.3% 47.6% 49.8% 53.4%

Source: Department for Education

The Tameside Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy 2008-10 has identified that between 2005 and 2007 educational attainment at GCSE Grade A-C has increased significantly in Ashton (from 37% to 50%), Denton South (29% to 42%) and Smallshaw (31% to 43%), closing the gap between deprived areas and the Tameside average (55%). However, the IMD 2010 education ranking (see Figure 2.6) serves to highlight that significant disparities still existing across the Borough in terms of education deprivation.

The decline of traditional industries such as manufacturing and the lack of economic opportunities can discourage people from attaining higher educational qualifications and therefore hinder development of skills within the Borough. Table 2.8 illustrates that within Tameside the percentage of the population with NVQ levels 1-4 are consistently below regional and national averages, whilst conversely the number with no qualifications exceeds both the regional and national figures.

Table 2.8 Level of Qualification Obtained

Tameside (numbers) Tameside (%) Northwest (%) GB (%)

NVQ 4 and above 24,600 17.6 28.7 31.3

NVQ 3 and above 57,000 40.8 49.6 51.0

NVQ 2 and above 84,400 60.4 66.8 67.3

NVQ 1 and above 108,600 77.6 80.6 80.2

Other qualifications 10,700 7.7 7.3 8.5

No qualifications 20,600 14.7 12.1 11.3 Source: NOMIS Qualifications Jan 2010-December 2010

390000 395000 400000 Key

Tameside ward Education (National Ranking)

N 1 - 3248

3249 - 6496

6497 - 9533

9534 - 9745 Mossley 9746 - 12993

12994 - 16241 Ashton Hurst 16242 - 19489

19490 - 22737

22738 - 25986 Ashton Waterloo Stalybridge North 25987 - 32483 400000 400000

St Michaels Stalybridge South

Droylsden West Droylsden East St Peters

Dukinfield Stalybridge Dukinfield Audenshaw

Hyde Newton

Longendale Denton North East

Denton West 395000 Hyde Godley 395000

0 2,000 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

Denton South H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Hyde Werneth Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.6 Indices of Multiple Deprivation Education Ranking

December 2011 390000 395000 400000 31007-W05.mxd squij

Housing

The Tameside Housing Strategy 2010-2016 was adopted by the Council in January 2010. The Strategy’s main priorities are are as follows:

• Achieving the right quantity and quality of new housing;

• Continuing to raise the quality of the existing housing stock, services and neighbourhoods;

• Connecting people to the improved housing offer.

The main findings arising from the Housing Strategy, which was informed by a Strategic Housing Market Assessment6 (which is currently under revision), are set out below:

• The number of households in Tameside is projected to increase by 24,000 (13%) by 2031;

• The priorities identified within the Sustainable Community Strategy are deemed as important in asserting Tameside’s role within the city-region economy and particularly in reducing the number of working age population without a qualification;

• Overall, there is pressure on all types of housing, with the exception of terraced houses. The imbalance between supply and demand for open market accommodation is most pronounced for properties with one and four or more bedrooms, and in Longdendale;

• The delivery of additional affordable and accessible homes across the Borough is an important strategic priority. There is currently a shortfall of 424 affordable dwellings each year. Between 2006 and 2008 there were 103 units of affordable housing completed (in the period 2009/10 56 affordable units were completed).

Regarding homelessness, the Tameside Homelessness Strategy 2008-13 identified that, on a national basis, the numbers of people accepted as being homeless have risen from a low of 102,430 households in 1997/98 to a peak of 135,430 households in 2003/04. This rise of approximately 32% was reflected in the Northwest region where over the same period a rise of 38% was recorded, from 13,030 households to 18,030 households. The situation within Tameside reflected this national picture with homelessness acceptances in the Borough falling by 20% in 2004/05 with a further 72% reduction in 2005/06. The figures for Greater Mancehester are detailed within Table 2.9

6 Arc4 (2008) Tameside 2008 Strategic Housing Market Assessment, Arc4, Manchester.

Table 2.9 Homelessness Acceptances across Greater Manchester Authorities

Authority 2003-2004 2004-2005 2005-2006 2006-2007

Tameside 722 575 162 140

Bolton 785 734 556 436

Manchester 2751 1371 1341 1362

Rochdale 671 744 585 566

Salford 1266 1199 1376 1053

Stockport 381 561 378 229

Trafford 445 355 260 240 Source: Tameside Homelessness Strategy 2008-2013 In this context, new residential development will have positive and negative implications for the Borough. The delivery of additional housing will help to provide sufficient new homes for a growing population and in addition will help to address issues of affordability through the delivery of both market and affordable housing. The improvement/refurbishment of historic building stock will also help to reduce the number of properties which are in poor condition and which are also resource inefficient. However, the increase in housing is likely to place further pressure on the development of greenfield sites, existing infrastructure and facilities unless adequate mitigation measures are secured.

Over the previous 10 years a net total of 4,358 dwellings were completed equating to an average of 436 dwellings per annum (Annual Monitoring Report 2009/10). The Northwest Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) identified a requirement for Tameside to deliver 13,500 new homes (net of clearance replacement) in the period 2003-2021, which equates to 750 new units per annum. Whilst the Coalition Government has clearly signalled its intention to abolish the RSS and it will be for the Council to determine the level of new housing to be delivered in Tameside, this target provides an indication of the level of growth that could be accommodated in the Borough over the period of the Core Strategy although this quantum of development would result in signification pressure on greenfield sites.

In terms of Gypsies and Travellers, the Housing Act 2004 imposed a duty on local authorities to carry out an assessment of their accommodation needs. The Greater Manchester Assessment identified that Tameside has a shortfall of 17 pitches to 2015. The North West Regional Spatial Strategy Partial Review (Submitted Draft, 2009), which identified the scale and distribution of gypsy and traveller pitch provision across the region, outlined that Tameside should be able to accommodate an additional 10 permanent and 10 transit pitches to 2016 together with an additional 10 travelling showpeople plots.

Crime Both the Tameside Sustainable Community Strategy7 and the Tameside Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnership (CDRP) 8 have an overarching aim to develop a safe and secure environment for local communities. The Summer 2010 Citizens Panel9 reported that 97% of residents feel safe in their local neighbourhood whilst 65% feel safe at night.

The British Crime Survey 2010/11 identifies that a total of 10,750 key offences were recorded in the 2010/11 period in Tameside which constitutes a decrease of 8% on 2009/10 rates (see Table 2.10). Across the whole of Greater Manchester the number of recorded offences decreased by 13% over the same period with all local authority areas experiencing a decrease in crime levels during this period. The greatest decrease in crimes and lowest total number of offences was experienced in Trafford with 7,150 offences recorded in 2010/11 representing a decrease of 22% compared to the previous year.

The IMD 2010 includes a crime domain. This domain measures the rate of recorded crime for four major types of crime types of burglary, theft, criminal damage and violence. The levels of deprivation within the crime domain across Tameside are illustrated in Figure 2.7 which serves to highlight that crime rates are relatively high across the Borough.

Table 2.10 Recorded Crime for Seven Key Offences 2009/10 to 2010/11

Offence Greater Tameside Oldham Salford Trafford Manchester

Violence against the 09/10 41,988 3,716 3,195 3,935 2,359 person

10/11 40,034 3,862 3,316 4,133 2,233

7 Community strategies are overarching documents, which sit at the apex of all strategic and service plans in a particular area and which promote a long term vision for improving the economic, environmental and social wellbeing of an area. As well as providing and promoting a vision for, and an overview of what is happening in, an area community strategies identify cross-cutting priorities which require action at the strategic level, issues such as tackling social inclusion, access to services, health inequalities etc.

8 The Crime and Disorder Act (1998) introduced for the first time the practice of partnership working to reduce crime and disorder. It placed a statutory duty on 'Responsible Authorities' (such as the Police, Local Authorities, Primary Care Trust, Fire Service, Probation Service, etc) to work in partnership with a range of other local public, private, community and voluntary groups and with the community itself.

9 The Tameside Citizens' Panel was set up in 1998 to give residents of the Borough the chance to have a say in how local services are run. The Panel is made up of around 2,000 Tameside residents who receive three postal questionnaires each year asking about their views on services and priorities in Tameside.

Offence Greater Tameside Oldham Salford Trafford Manchester

% Change -5 4 4 5 -5

Sexual Offences 09/10 2,881 213 211 211 131

10/11 2,878 238 220 244 109

% Change 0 12 4 16 -17

Robbery Offences 09/10 5,966 419 399 501 472

10/11 4,876 377 315 375 345

% Change -18 -10 -21 -25 -27

Burglary Dwellings 09/10 20,095 1,754 1,566 1,738 1,300

10/11 18,432 1,840 1,654 1,436 959

% Change -8 5 6 -17 -26

Theft of a motor vehicle 09/10 8,196 615 698 825 480

10/11 6,487 551 626 641 324

% Change -21 -10 -10 -22 -33

Theft from a motor vehicle 09/10 23,381 1,537 1,855 2,908 1,444

10/11 17,844 1,259 1,411 1,942 982

% Change -24 -18 -24 -33 -32

Interfering with a motor 09/10 2,330 195 236 268 117 vehicle

10/11 1,558 146 159 162 56

% Change -33 -25 -33 -40 -52

Recorded Crime - Offences 09/10 146,572 11,654 11,223 14,290 9,138 Recorded.

10/11 127,093 10,750 10,463 11,877 7,150

% Change -13 -8 -7 -17 -22 Source: Home Office: Crime in England and Wales 2010/11 In order to improve health, well-being and quality of life within Tameside a number of factors will need to be addressed in an integrated manner - since the issues are interconnected and cannot be seen in isolation. Recognising the complex interconnectivity has a role to play in addressing these issues in an integrated and comprehensive way.

390000 395000 400000 Key

Tameside ward

Crime (National Ranking) N 1 - 3248 3249 - 6496

6497 - 9533

9534 - 9745 Mossley 9746 - 12993

12994 - 16241 Ashton Hurst 16242 - 19489

19490 - 22737

22738 - 25986

Ashton Waterloo 25987 - 32483 Stalybridge North 400000 400000

St Michaels Stalybridge South

Droylsden West Droylsden East St Peters

Dukinfield Stalybridge Dukinfield Audenshaw

Hyde Newton

Longendale Denton North East

Denton West 395000 Hyde Godley 395000

0 2,000 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

Denton South H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Hyde Werneth Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.7 Indices of Multiple Deprivation Crime Ranking

December 2011 390000 395000 400000 31007-W06.mxd squij

2.3.6 Human Health

The 2010 Health Profile for Tameside produced by the Association of Public Health Observatories identifies that the health of people living in the Borough is generally worse than the English average as evident in lower than average life expectancy amongst men and women (see Table 2.11). Further, although there has been a decrease in death rates from all causes and in early death rates from cancer, heart disease and stroke, these rates remain above the England average.

Table 2.11 Life Expectancy within Tameside

Tameside English Average English Worst English Best

Male 75.7 77.9 73.6 84.3

Female 79.6 82.0 78.8 88.9 Source: NHS Tameside Health Profile 2010 The Health Profile also highlights that the health of children and young people is generally worse than the English average including in relation to the teenage pregnancy rate, obesity and the percentage of mothers initiating breast feeding.

In terms of the perceptions of residents within Tameside, the Sustainable Community Strategy 2009-19 reports that 57% of residents consider themselves to be in good health and a further 30% in fairly good health. This compares with 2001 Census data which highlights that 24,725 residents identified their health as not good (c11.5%) ranking Tameside 45th out of 376 authorities in the Country (1 = worst).

It is important to recognise that there are health inequalities not only between Tameside and the Northwest but also within Tameside itself. For example, the life expectancy of men in the least deprived areas is almost 7 years longer than those in the most deprived areas of the Borough. Similarly, for women this difference is almost 6 years. Figure 2.8 highlights the levels of deprivation across the Borough within the health domain.

The priorities for health identified within the Sustainability Community Strategy for Tameside are reproduced in Box 2.

Box 2 Tameside’s Health Priorities

• Promote healthy lifestyles campaigns with our partners • Develop lifestyle plans for all sections of the community supported by strategies that support positive behaviour change such as alcohol harm reduction, tobacco harm reduction, physical activity and obesity strategies • Tackle health inequalities in disadvantaged areas and vulnerable groups through our neighbourhood agreements • Address the wider determinants of health including the impact of the current economic situation on health and mental health • Tackle the issue of excess winter deaths by addressing the causes of fuel poverty through our work to improve affordable warmth • Engage with local communities to enable them to improve their own health and access local health services more easily • Deliver a healthy environment and improved sports and physical activity facilities across Tameside • Promote a healthy start in life for Tameside children and young people, promoting breastfeeding and reducing smoking in pregnancy • Develop our health data intelligence to support our JSNA process • Reduce alcohol harm related hospital admissions • Tackle illegal and underage availability of cigarettes and maintain smoke free areas to control the use of tobacco

390000 395000 400000 Key

Tameside ward

Health (National Ranking) N 1 - 3248 3249 - 6496

6497 - 9072

9073 - 9745 Mossley 9746 - 12993

12994 - 15762 Ashton Hurst 15763 - 17991

17992 - 20221

20222 - 22737 Ashton Waterloo 22738 - 32483 Stalybridge North 400000 400000

St Michaels Stalybridge South

Droylsden West Droylsden East St Peters

Dukinfield Stalybridge Dukinfield Audenshaw

Hyde Newton

Longendale Denton North East

Denton West 395000 Hyde Godley 395000

0 2,000 Metres Scale: 1:50000 @ A3

Denton South H\DATA2\Data\Projects\31007 Tameside Core Strategy SA\ Drawings\GIS\MXDs

Core Strategy Issues and Options Report: Hyde Werneth Sustainability Appraisal

Figure 2.8 Indices of Multiple Deprivation Health Ranking

December 2011 390000 395000 400000 31007-W07.mxd squij

2.3.7 Soil

Government policy, as expressed in Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing, (PPS3), encourages the effective use of land by re-using land that has been previously developed. The national target is currently 60% of new dwellings to be constructed on land defined as previously developed within PPS3. Within Tameside, in 2009/10 73% of new and converted dwellings were delivered on previously developed land.

Government policy promotes the general conservation of minerals while at the same time ensuring an adequate supply is available to meet needs. Mineral resources are not distributed evenly across the country and some areas are able to provide greater amounts of certain minerals than they actually use. The Northwest is an important national source of salt, silica sand, gypsum, peat and clay and has significant reserves of building stone, clay, shale and coal, as well as aggregates. In addition, the region has important reserves of minerals in offshore, coastal and estuary locations, notably hydrocarbons but also marine sand.

The Northwest Regional Aggregates Working Party Annual Monitoring Report 2010 indicates that total permitted primary aggregate reserves increased slightly by 0.35% from 367.88mt as at the end of 2008 to 369.16mt but since 1995 reserves have fallen from 500.4mt. A small increase was seen in reserves of crushed rock where figures rose by 1.7% from 321.91mt as at the end of 2008 to 327.39mt. Reserves of sand and gravel decreased by 9.1% from 45.97mt to 41.79mt. There is no data available at the local level relating to aggregate reserves.

2.3.8 Water

Water Quality and Resources Water is vitally important; we are dependent on surface and groundwater sources for our drinking water. Amongst many other uses we also need water for industry, for recreation, energy generation and to enhance the landscape. Water is also vital as a habitat for freshwater plants and animals and provides resources for terrestrial species. It should be recognised that both existing lifestyles and development and future growth in the Borough will have a continuing impact on the water environment.

There are three principal watercourses and their associated tributaries which run through Tameside, namely the River Etherow, the River Tame and the River Medlock. The greater part of the Borough is covered by the Tame and Etherow catchments, whilst those of the River Mersey and the River Irwell only form a small portion of the south-western and north western area of Tameside respectively. The Peak Forrest Canal, Hudderfield Canal and various reservoirs such as Audenshaw, Godley, Higher/Lower Swineshaw, Brushes, Buckton Vale and Walkerwood also form important water resources.

Tameside is covered principally by the Tame, Goyt and Etherow Catchment Abstraction Management Strategy (CAMS) (March 2004) and also the Northern Manchester CAMS. The importance and diversity of ecology and fisheries in the Tame, Goyt and Etherow CAMS area is reflected by the variety of different areas of conservation importance. Populations of fish are healthy in the Rivers Tame, Goyt and Etherow with brown trout being recorded within most of the Etherow and Goyt catchments. Salmon are also routinely found spawning in the lower Goyt, Stockport, but are prevented from travelling further upstream by artificial barriers. The Environment Agency has

identified that through the removal of redundant in-channel structures and/or the inclusion of fish passes it may be possible to reconnect river valleys and the return of salmon within the rivers of Tameside. The rural nature of the Tame, Goyt and Etherow catchments and their proximity to major population centres has created many valuable opportunities for recreation and amenity. The Borough’s canals are also important ecological assets with the Huddersfield Narrow Canal and Hollinwood Branch Canal designated as SSSIs.

The Annual Monitoring Report (2007/08) identified that the biological quality of 72.6% of rivers within Tameside was of good or fair quality10. This represented a decline from a level of 73% recorded in 2004/05 and 2005/06. With regard to chemical quality, 88.2% of rivers within Tameside were identified as being of good or fair quality in 2006/07. This is a decline on the 2004-2006 figure of 91%.

The total water resource use across the region was estimated by Defra/Environment Agency to be 3003 million litres per day in 2005 (State of the Region Report 2005). The majority of this (53%) was water demand from public sewer supply with the remainder being used for power station (19%) and other water resource use (28%). Much of the 28% related to supply to the three main industrial sectors within the region - chemicals, food and drink and wood/paper manufacture.

In total, United Utilities have over 200 water sources of which over two thirds of the water is provided from reservoirs in the Lake District, the Pennines and North Wales. Pressures on these water resources are set to increase through additional demands from population growth and new housing. Greater water efficiency, especially within the existing and proposed housing stock, is essential for the sustainable management of water resources (for example, grey water recycling systems, dual flush WCs, aerating taps and maximum capacity white goods). The Government’s Code for Sustainable Homes (DCLG 2006) suggests that to improve the sustainability of buildings to a ‘Level 3’ standard11, measures should be adopted to use no more than 105 litres of water per person per day. United Utilities Plc reported a daily use of 135 litres per person in 2008-09.

Flood Risk Planning Policy Statement 25 (PPS25) Development and Flood Risk seeks to ensure that flood risk is taken into account at all stages in the planning process (in order to avoid inappropriate development in areas at risk of flooding) and direct development away from areas at highest risk. The Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA) for Greater Manchester (August 2008) states that the principal source of flood risk to the Greater Manchester sub region is from fluvial (river) flooding. Manchester, Trafford, Salford, Stockport and Wigan are identified as having the largest areas of fluvial flood risk in the Greater Manchester Sub-Region, whilst Tameside has the second lowest. The extent of land in the Borough identified as being in Flood Zone 2 (areas at low to medium risk of

10 Figures provided by Defra for 2006/07. 11 A home meeting any level of the Code will have to meet minimum standards. For Level 3 this means that the home will have to be 25% more energy efficient than one built to the 2006 Building Regulations Standards, this could be achieved by improving the thermal efficiency of the walls, windows and roof and installing a high efficiency condensing boiler for example. In addition the home should use no more than 105 litres of water per person per day, include provision for surface water management, include energy efficient lighting, providing recycling facilities and enhancing sound insulation.

flooding) is 152.8 ha, Flood Zone 3a (areas with a high probability of flooding) accounts for 173.9 ha and Flood Zone 3b (functional floodplain) accounts for 0.4 ha.

The Tameside SFRA (2011) highlights that the risk of fluvial flooding in the Borough is generally low although land close to the River Tame is designated as Flood Zone 3. There is a wide distribution of areas at risk of surface water flooding including Droylsden, Ashton-under-Lyne, Denton, Hyde and Audenshaw. The loss of any greenfield land particularly in these areas could lead to an increased risk of flooding (as a result of an increase in impermeable surfaces).

Water Framework Directive The Water Framework Directive (WFD) is European legislation that aims to consolidate existing legislation. It came into force in December 2000, and was transposed into UK law in 2003. It introduces some new environmental standards that will help to improve the ecological health of inland waters to achieve ‘good ecological status.

The Directive establishes a strategic river basin management approach to the land and water environment. It includes a common approach to setting environmental objectives for all groundwater, surface waters, estuaries and coastal waters within the European Community, and requires Member States to draw up plans for meeting those objectives in each River Basin District (geographical areas, approximately regional in scale and based on river catchment areas).

The main aims of the WFD are to prevent deterioration and enhance the status of the water environment, including groundwater. This will be achieved within a framework of River Basin Planning by:

• reducing pollution;

• promoting sustainable water use; and

• contributing to mitigating the effects of floods and droughts.

Sustainable drainage systems that encourage infiltration and slow down the movement of rainfall runoff in the catchment can reduce the amount of urban pollutants entering watercourses, encourage infiltration into groundwater sources and mitigate the impact of intense rainfall events on surface water flooding. Reducing the amount of potable water that is wasted by implementing water efficiency measures will help to reduce the pressure to abstract, reducing the pressure on aquatic ecosystems, increasing the volume of water available for diluting both point source and diffuse loads whilst also reducing flow in the sewer network.

Advanced planning and appropriate management helps to ensure that the water cycle contributes to a safe, clean and healthy environment, rather than being a source of long-term problems.

2.3.9 Air

The Environment Act 1995 requires every local authority in England to assess current and future air pollution levels against health based objectives specified in the Air Quality (England) Regulations 2000. In Greater

Manchester, this review was conducted in three stages and involved the collation of emissions data from industry, transport and domestic sources to form an Emissions Inventory for Greater Manchester (EMIGMA). Information from EMIGMA was then combined with weather data and inputted into modelling software to predict air quality in the future. Where the review concluded that air quality targets were likely to be exceeded the relevant local authoritiy must, by law, declare an Air Quality Management Area (AQMA).

In Tameside the review and assessment identified nitrogen dioxide and particulates as the two pollutants unlikely to meet the air quality objectives. The main source of both these pollutants is motor vehicle exhausts. Tameside declared an AQMA in June 2001, following a consultation period during which residents of the Borough were asked for their opinions on both the process and the areas to be covered. The AQMA was amended in 2004 with the affected areas being the A57, A635 and A662 as well as the M60 and M67. New development may have an adverse impact on air quality in the Borough and especially within the AQMA primarilly as a result of increased car use. However, mitigation measures are being developed as part of a package of plans to faciltate more sustainable travel along these highway corridors. The measures proposed include the establishment of a quality bus corridor from Rochdale - Oldham - Ashton under Lyne - Hyde, an extension to the Metrolink and highway improvements. In addition, Tameside will need to strengthen measures to reduce Carbon Dioxide (CO2) emissions and the negative impacts of transport upon air qualtiy. This may include modal shifts and demand management of car useage and additional investment in public transport.

2.3.10 Climate Change

Rising global temperatures will bring changes in weather patterns, rising sea levels and increased frequency and intensity of extreme weather. The effects of climate change will be experienced internationally, nationally and locally with certain regions being particularly vulnerable.

The Climate Change Act 2008 represents the world's first legally binding framework to tackle climate change. There are two principal aims that underpin the Act and these are:

• To improve carbon management and help the transition towards a low carbon economy in the UK;

• To demonstrate strong UK leadership internationally, signalling a commitment to reduce carbon emissions.

The key provisions contained within the Act include the introduction of legally binding targets to reduce levels of greenhouse gas emission through action in the UK and abroad by at least 80% by 2050, and reduce CO2 emissions by least 26% by 2020, against a 1990 baseline.

‘Rising to the Challenge' is the Climate Change Action Plan for the Northwest (2010-12). The objectives contained within the Action Plan seek to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, adapt to those effects of climate change that are now unavoidable and capitalise on opportunities for economic growth. It highlights the following main issues:

• The region’s carbon trajectory - whilst regional carbon emissions have declined since 1990, the underlying trend is for a growth in emissions related to population growth and the increased use of industrial, domestic and transportation fuels;

• The need to secure affordable energy supplies - transition to a low carbon economy and future growth depends upon continued access to secure and affordable energy supplies;

• Unavoidable climate change - past emissions mean that some climate change effects are inevitable and already visible in the Northwest.

At the local level, Tameside has signed the Nottingham Declaration on Climate Change. A Low Carbon Tameside Strategy and Action Plan has also been produced by the Tameside Strategic Partnership to achieve a sustainable use of natural resources in Tameside. The launch of the Strategy follows the Partnership’s agreement to sign up to the National 10:10 campaign to reduce emissions by 10% during 2010/11.

Energy consumption in Tameside has decreased from 4,888GWh in 2005 to 4,365 GWh in 2008. Tameside’s per capita CO2 emissions have also decreased since 2005 from 6.5 tonnes CO2 to 5.3 tonnes in 2009 and are lower than those of other boroughs (Rochdale, Salford, Stockport and Manchester), the Northwest average and overall UK emissions. The proportion of the Borough’s energy usage derived from renewables and waste is approximately 5.3 GWh which represents 0.1% of total energy consumption. This compares to the Northwest total of 635 GWh (0.3% of total energy consumption).

Tameside is expected to accommodate significant levels of development over the period of the Core Strategy. Careful planning and design will therefore be required to ensure that climate change effects are fully considered. This may be achieved, for example, through:

• minimising the environmental damage of future development through sustainable construction techniques;

• distributing new development to limit greenhouse gas emissions;

• planning new development to minimise future vulnerability in a changing climate;

• incorporating mitigation and adaptation measures into new built development;

• reducing greenhouse gas emissions from existing development;

• encouraging ‘carbon-neutral’ households; and

• re-using the existing building stock in order to minimise resource use associated with new development.

Other greenhouse gases which should be reduced include methane and nitrous oxide. Methane is emitted during the production and transport of coal, natural gas and oil, and also results from the decomposition of organic waste in municipal solid waste landfills and the raising of livestock. Nitrous oxide is released during many agricultural and industrial activities during the combustion of solid waste and fossil fuels.

The Tameside Affordable Warmth Strategy (2009-2012) identifies the framework, established through the UK Fuel Poverty Strategy (2001), to end the problem of fuel poverty. Fuel poverty is caused by the interaction of a number of factors, but four specifically stand out. These are:

• The cost of energy;

• Household income;

• The energy efficiency status of the property;

• Household composition.

Figures vary on the numbers of people identified as being in fuel poverty in Tameside, partially due to the constant fluctuation in energy prices. Estimates vary between 22% in September 2008 and 18% in February 2009. The Affordable Warmth Strategy identifies that the area which has the greatest influence on reducing fuel poverty is the increase in energy efficiency of the housing stock.

2.3.11 Material Assets

Waste There is a need to move towards sustainable waste management. This is in part driven by legislation such as the EU Waste Framework Directive (2008/98/EC) and Landfill Directive (1999/31/EC) and also an increasing appreciation that waste is a resource from which value can be obtained whether through reuse, recycling or other forms of recovery. The preferred order for dealing with waste is: prevention; preparing for reuse; recycling; other recovery; disposal.

Nationally, 28.5 million tonnes of municipal solid waste is produced and this is increasing at 2.7% per annum (2007/08)12. Within the Northwest, this figure equated to 1.7 million tonnes per year. The State of the Region Report (2008) anticipates that growth rates in municipal waste will stabilise in line with the long term target to reduce waste growth in the region to 0% by 2014. At present, there is sufficient landfill capacity in the region to satisfy landfill requirements until at least 2020 however, there is demand for more recycling and recovery facilities in the region which presents a significant opportunity to divert waste away from landfill.

The people and businesses of Tameside produce a significant volume of waste and unless this is adequately managed and treated, it could have the potential to cause significant problems. However, it also has potential value as a resource if it can be re-used, recycled or recovered. Long term provision needs to be made to manage waste in an efficient and environmentally sound manner.

The 2009/10 Tameside Annual Monitoring Report has identified that the amount of municipal waste arising within the Borough has fluctuated since 2004/05 although from 2007/08 the volume has declined significantly to 73,643 tonnes in 2009/10 (see Table 2.12). There has also been a consistent growth in the level of recycling and composting both in percentage and actual terms whilst the volume of waste sent to landfill has declined.

12 http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/wastats/archive/mwb200809q1.xls

Table 2.12 Waste Arising and Management between 2004/05 and 2009/10

2004/05 2005/06 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/10

Total Waste (tonnes) 103,232 102,226 103,870 104,915 96,212 73,643

Recycled (tonnes) 10,395 14,751 (14.43%) 15,388 (14.81%) 16,674 (20.16%) 16,674 17,716 (10.07%)

Compost (tonnes) 4,870 (4.68%) 5,733 (6.93%) 6,170 7,106

Incinerated (tonnes) 170 (0.16%) 170 (0.17%) 179 (0.17%) 188.63 (0.18%) 89 Data Gap

Landfill (tonnes) 98,667 87,305 (85.40%) 83,433 (80.32%) 82,318.5 (78.46%) 73,489 66,032 (89.77%)

(Source Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council 2009/10 Annual Monitoring Report).

The best value indicators for Tameside illustrate that the Borough compares broadly favourably against other metropolitan authorities in terms of waste collections and coverage of kerbside recycling schemes but less so in terms of levels of composting and recycling. The Strategy for the Management of Waste in Tameside (2005-2010) includes the following statistics for 2007/08:

• Percentage of total tonnage of household waste recycled (Best Value indicator 82a);

Tameside- 20.16%. National Average - 21.9%. Metropolitan Authority Average - 16.2%

• Percentage of total tonnage of household waste composted (BVI 82b);

Tameside- 6.93%. National Average - 12.2%. Metropolitan Authority Average - 10.8%

• Number of kilograms of household waste collected (BVI 84);

Tameside- 385.9kg%. National Average - 433.0kg. Metropolitan Authority Average - 450.6kg

• Percentage of people satisfied with a) waste collection and b) recycling (BVI 90);

86% - survey undertaken in 2003/04

• Percentage of population covered by a kerbside recycling scheme (BVI 91);

Tameside- 100%. National Average - 96.9%. Metropolitan Authority - 95.9%

Transport The Greater Manchester Third Local Transport Plan (LTP) covers the period 2011/12 to 2015/16. The LTP’s core objectives are as follows:

• To ensure that the transport network supports the Greater Manchester economy to improve the life chances of residents and the success of business;

• To ensure that carbon emissions from transport are reduced in line with UK Government targets in order to minimise the impact of climate change;

• To ensure that the transport system facilitates active, healthy lifestyles and a reduction in the number of casualties and that other adverse health impacts are minimised;

• To ensure that the design and maintenance of the transport network and provision of services supports sustainable neighbourhoods and public spaces and provides equality of transport opportunities; and

• To maximise value for money in the provision and maintenance of transport infrastructure and services.

The LTP identifies a number of key transport issues relating to public transport, car travel and walking and cycling as well as overarching transport challenges. These are summarised in Box 3 below.

Box 3 Greater Manchester Key Transport Challenges

Public Transport The LTP identifies rail overcrowding as a significant issue. The capacity of the local rail system is limited, and expansion depends on delivery, by Network Rail, of the ‘Northern Hub’ project which is designed to provide the capacity for additional train services to pass through the central Manchester stations. The Northern Hub is also important in improving connectivity to other northern cities such as Leeds, Liverpool, Preston and Sheffield, and is supported on a wide basis across multiple authorities. This is a stated priority for Network Rail. With regard to bus usage, the LTP highlights that, despite patronage growth on some corridors, levels of overall bus usage have remained static over the last 10 years. The Plan identifies a need to ensure that the network does not contract, as a result of the current financial pressures, to the detriment of the most vulnerable users. The Plan also specifically states that the bus network needs to attract more commuters by raising the quality of those parts of the network where service quality is poor.

Car Travel The total number of vehicle kilometres on the local motorway system has increased by 25% since 2000 (the year in which the M60 motorway ring road was completed). The LTP states that this increase presents challenges on many key sections, with average speeds of just 34 mph across the motorway system in the morning peak period. The LTP also highlights that: a. 80% of cars on key commuting routes in the morning peak have just the driver on board; b. there are some areas of the conurbation where congestion causes serious issues for local communities; c. much of the previously available capacity on public transport, particularly on rail and Metrolink systems, into Manchester city centre has now been taken up; d. car trips still account for nearly 60% of all commuting trips into the other key Greater Manchester centres outside Manchester city centre; e. emissions from road traffic accounted for over 60% of all NO2 and PM10 (particulate) emissions in Greater Manchester in 2006 (and the fact that these are emitted at ground level means they have a significant impact on human health); and f. road traffic is a major source (27%) of carbon emissions in Greater Manchester.

Walking and Cycling The LTP notes that the number of people cycling in Greater Manchester has increased by 17% since 2005 and that higher levels of people walk into key centres during the morning peak. However, the Plan identifies safety, provision of secure cycle parking at public transport nodes, well designed development which encourages access by bike or on foot and the provision of facilities in walking and cycling distance as key issues to be addressed.

Overarching Transport Issues Several overarching transport issues are highlighted within the LTP including: g. environmental and public health concerns in terms of carbon and air quality implications of travel by car, traffic accidents and noise which are felt disproportionately by people in lower-income groups;

h. accessibility for all including those with disabilities and on low incomes as well as people in rural areas; i. a need to better integrate travel considerations into housing and commercial developments; j. changing patterns of working and living which may require flexible ticketing systems and better services outside the traditional “9-to 5” pattern; and k. a need for integrated transport service provision.

The Tameside Sustainable Community Strategy highlights that the Borough has excellent transport links. Notwithstanding this, the Strategy identifies a need to deliver high quality public transport and transport infrastructure to support economic growth, reduce transport emissions, encourage the use of public transport and walking and cycling and to continue to reduce road traffic accidents including those involving young children.

In this context, a number of major transport schemes have been identified within the LTP for delivery over the period of the Core Strategy. These proposals include the delivery of the Metrolink Extension from Piccadilly to Ashton-under-Lyne, which is due to be completed by winter 2013/14, the Ashton Northern Bypass Stage 2, which is the second stage of a scheme to provide a bypass for the town centre of Ashton-under-Lyne, and the Greater Manchester Retaining Wall Major Maintenance Scheme. In addition, the LTP also includes a commitment to develop an integrated transport strategy for Longdendale, an area that suffers from severe congestion problems caused by traffic travelling between the M67, Glossop and Sheffield.

Other proposals identified within the LTP Local Area Implementation Plan for Tameside include:

• plans to enhance bus station facilities within the town centres;

• inclusion of five rail stations within the Borough (Ashton-under-Lyne, Broadbottom, Flowery Field, Newton for Hyde and Hattersley) in the Transport for Greater Manchester’s Rail Station Improvement Strategy (RSIS) (which was established to improve existing passenger security and information systems at the smaller rail stations across the Greater Manchester);

• prioritisation of Broadbottom and Newton for Hyde rail stations for “step free” accessibility improvements;

• an aspiration to provide further enhancements to the rail station at Hattersley linked to the wider regeneration of the area (although there is no certainty with regards funding for this aspiration);

• the extension of Metrolink beyond the present bus station area into Ashton Town Centre and on to Stalybridge to underpin the regeneration of Ashton Town Centre and provide fast, regular public transport links between Stalybridge, Ashton-under-Lyne and the Regional Centre;

• signalising the ASDA and BT Roundabouts on the A635 Park Parade, Ashton, to relieve congestion in and around Ashton Town Centre and complement Ashton Northern Bypass Stage 2; and

• the reintroduction of Regular Passenger Services at Stockport, Reddish South, Denton and Droylsden stations as part of Tameside and Stockport MBC’s campaign for the reintroduction of regular passenger services at the above stations from the start of the new northern area franchise in 2013.

Access to Work and Services The job ratio within the Borough was 0.56% at 2009 which was lower than the regional average (0.75%) and indicates a level of out-commuting of the resident population. The 2001 Census identified the distance people travel to work within the Borough (see Table 2.13).

Table 2.13 Distance Travelled to Work

Distance % of People

Works from home 7.73

Less than 2 km 20.92

2 km or more but less than 5 km 24.41

5 km or more but less than 10 km 22.17

10 km or more but less than 20 km 15.77

20 km or more but less than 30 km 1.91

30 km or more but less than 40 km 0.78

40 km or more but less than 60 km 1.10

60 km or more 1.58

No fixed place of work 3.46

Working outside of UK 0.13

Working at offshore installation 0.04 Source: 2001 Census The 2001 Census also illustrates that the primary means of travelling to work is by car or van (35.56%). The Second Greater Manchester Local Transport Plan identified that approximately 25% of all journeys undertaken in Tameside are under 1 mile and 25% of car trips are less than 2 miles. However, pedestrian activity is shown to be increasing within the Borough with data illustrating a 13% increase in the centre of Ashton-under-Lyne between 2003-2008 and a 31% increase in Hyde between 2006 and 2008.

In order to facilitate fewer vehicle journeys the Council has a role to play in promoting development in locations within close proximity to services and facilities. The Annual Monitoring Report 2009/10 illustrates the level of success in achieving this objective by highlighting the amount of new residential floorspace within 30 minutes public transport time of various facilities and services (see Table 2.14).

Table 2.14 Amount of New Residential Floorspace within 30 minutes Public Transport Time of Various Facilities and Services

Service/Facility 2004/05 2005/06 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/10

GP 100% 99.9% 98.7% 99.9% 100% 91.4%

Hospital 100% 64.5% 68% 58.1% 60.4% 46.0%

Service/Facility 2004/05 2005/06 2006/07 2007/08 2008/09 2009/10

Primary School 100% 100% 98.7% 99.8% 100% 100%

Secondary School 100% 99.9% 98.7% 99.8% 100 99.4%

Area of Employment 100% 99.8% 98.7% 99.8% 100% 99.4%

Major Retail Centre 100% 99.8% 98.7% 9.8% 99.8 99.4% Source: Tameside Annual Monitoring Report 2009/10 Aside from the promotion of development close to transport hubs and with links to the public transport network there is also a need to consider the quality and safety of public transport facilities. For example, Hattersley rail station has a direct link to Manchester Piccadilly, however because of its condition and perception of it being unsafe it suffers from a lack of patronage.

Open Spaces The Sustainable Community Strategy has identified that a large proportion (82%) of residents are satisfied with the Borough’s parks and open spaces with 73% agreeing that local parks are clean and well maintained. A further 70% agreed that the parks are warm and welcoming. In 2008, fifteen of the Borough’s parks and open spaces had achieved green pennants and flags which recognise the quality of the parks and open spaces13. The Annual Monitoring Report (2009/10) identifies that in 2009/10 there was 1,485ha of open space in the Borough of which 179.51ha (12.09%) is managed to Green Flag award standard (an increase of 4.03% since 2004/5).

A Planning Policy Guidance Note 17 (PPG17) compliant open space assessment of the Borough was undertaken by Knight Kavanagh and Page in 2010. The assessment highlights that the most popular typology of open space visited in Tameside is parks and public gardens, reflecting their prominence and the levels of investment made in these sites in recent years. Play areas for small/young children and rivers/canals are also popular types of open space. The findings of the assessment indicate a need to increase play area provision, particularly in Hyde (south), Dunkinfield (east) and Mossley (south), as well as allotments across the Borough. The study also suggests that the Council should explore additional provision of indoor sports, health and fitness and swimming pool facilities in Mossley.

Access to Natural Greenspace Natural England's Accessible Natural Greenspace Standard (ANGSt) provides a set of benchmarks for ensuring access to places near to where people live.

These standards recommend that people living in towns and cities should have:

13 The Green Flag Award Scheme is the benchmark national standard for parks and green spaces in England, Wales and Scotland. Since 2009, the Green Flag Award Scheme has been managed by a new consortium, comprising Keep Britain Tidy, the British Trust for Conservation Volunteers (BTCV) and GreenSpace.

• An accessible natural greenspace of at least 2 ha in size, no more than 300 metres (5 minutes walk) from home;

• At least one accessible 20 ha site within two kilometres of home;

• One accessible 100 ha site within five kilometres of home;

• One accessible 500 ha site within ten kilometres of home;

• Statutory LNRs at a minimum level of one hectare per thousand population.

In some areas, this will be hard to achieve in the short term, but it should be a long-term aim for all local authorities, within their Greenspace Strategies.

2.3.12 Cultural Heritage

Tameside has a long history of human activity with some 22 Mesolitic sites identified within the Borough, the oldest dating to around 8,000 BC. Primarily an agricultural area, the Industrial Revolution had a significant impact with the former rural farming communities transformed into mill towns, with Ashton-under-Lyne, Dukinfield, Hyde, Mossley and Stalybridge described as “amongst the most famous mill towns in the Northwest”14. The growth and evolution of the Borough was driven through the development of the textile, and later the coal, industry.

The built heritage of the Borough is represented and protected with 314 listings covering 425 individual buildings. Of these listings, there are 2 Grade I Listed Buildings, 20 Grade II* and 292 Grade II Listed Buildings. There are also nine Conservation Areas within the Borough covering a total area of 158.6 ha. These are:

• Ashton Town Centre;

• Carrbrook;

• Copley;

• Fairfield;

• Millbrook;

• Mottram-in-Longdendale;

• Portland Basin;

• Stalybridge Town Centre;

• St. Anne’s, Haughton.

14 McNeil and Nevell (2005).

Within Tameside, English Heritage’s Heritage Counts (2008) identifies that there is one Registered Park and Garden (Stamford Park - Grade II) in Stalybridge and four Scheduled Monuments.

Tameside currently has six buildings and two conservation areas on the ‘At Risk’ Register:

• Ashton Town Centre;

• Stalybridge Town Centre;

• Ashton Baths (incorrectly known as Hugh Mason House) Henry Square, Ashton-under-Lyne;

• Hyde Hall, Town Lane, Denton;

• Old Hall Chapel, Old Hall Street, Dukinfield;

• Apethorn Farmhouse, Apethorn Lane, Hyde;

• Church of St Lawrence, Town Lane, Denton;

• Staley Hall, Millbrook, Stalybridge.

2.3.13 Landscape

Approximately 65% of Tameside is made up of open land, including playing fields, parks etc. within the overall built up area. Agricultural land accounts for around 1,500 ha (14% of the total area) and moorland for 1,200 ha (11%). The open land is located primarily within the eastern part of the Borough and along the northern and southern boundaries, including sections of the Tame, Etherow and Medlock river valleys. The majority of open space is afforded protection within the Adopted Unitary Development Plan (UDP) with Green Belt covering 5,120 ha (49% of the Borough), Urban Green Space 780 ha (7.5%) and other protected open land 270 ha (2.5%). Since 2004/05 there has been a net loss of 2.21 ha of protected open space with no loss since 2005/06.

Tameside is identified as being within three Landscape Character Areas (LCA)15:

• Manchester Conurbation;

• Manchester Pennine Fringe;

• Dark Peak.

The Borough is primarily within the Manchester Pennine Fringe LCA, which is characterised as a transitional zone between wild open moorlands and densely populated urban areas with an abrupt boundary where the town stops,

15 England has been divided into areas with similar landscape character, which are called National Character Areas. These can be viewed on Natural Englands website at - http://www.naturalengland.org.uk/ourwork/landscape/englands/character/default.aspx

and the countryside starts. This LCA has a broadly similar elevational range of 100-300 metres largely comprising ridges and steep sided valleys with fast flowing rivers. Agricultural activities are characterised by stock rearing and rough grazing on improved grassland between urban areas. The landscape character is identified as suffering from overspill housing estates forming unsympathetic elements in the landscape.

Much of the rural agricultural land is classified by Defra as Grade 4 or 5 (Grades 1 and 2 are the best and most versatlile agricultural land with Grades 4 and 5 being the poorest) with a greater proportion given over to dairy farming and the remainder used for general horticulture and cropping.

Geology The geology of the Greater Manchester area is dominated by rocks from three main periods of geological time. There is a general trend of outcrop with the oldest rocks being present in the north-east of the area and the youngest in the south-east. The upland moors of the Dark Peak and southern Pennines to the east of Manchester are formed in the Upper Carboniferous sandstones and shales of the Millstone Grit. This is overlain by the shales, mudstones and thin coals of the Upper Carboniferous Coal Measures which underlie the undulating tract of land to the north of Manchester on which the towns of Oldham, Rochdale, Bolton and Wigan are located.

Rocher Vale lies in the Medlock Valley between the Oldham boundary and Park Bridge Heritage Centre. It is a designated SBI and the Council hope to designate it as a LNR and Regionally Important Geological site for its interesting mosaic of habitats from riverbanks, to woodland and heath with many rocky outcrops showing an array of geological features.

2.4 Identifying Sustainability Issues and Problems

The identification of sustainability issues (including environmental problems as required by the SEA Directive) is an opportunity to define the key environmental, social and economic issues which need to be taken into account in preparing the Core Strategy and in undertaking the appraisal of the Issues and Options Report. The updated Scoping Report highlighted a number of key sustainability issues and problems based on:

• the requirements of other policies, plans, programmes and sustainability objectives which are considered to be relevant or likely to be affected by the Tameside LDF;

• common sustainability themes emerging from corporate priorities and the Sustainable Community Strategy;

• problems, constraints and opportunities identified through consideration of the environmental, social and economic baseline; and

• key sustainability issues identified in government guidance.

These key sustainability issues have been reviewed as part of this report to ensure that they adequately reflect the output of the updated review of plans and programmes (Section 2.2) and baseline data (Section 2.3) and are presented in Box 4.

Box 4 Key Sustainability Issues Facing Tameside

A. Biodiversity, Flora and Fauna - There is a need to conserve and enhance biodiversity and protect sites important for their geological resource across Tameside. B. Population - Tameside has a strong dependence on the manufacturing industry which has been in decline since 1999. During the period 2004/5 to 2009/10 the total business count in Tameside has increased by 305, from 5,860 to 6,165. However, in 2009/10 there was a net loss of businesses. There is a need to broaden the local economy and to increase the knowledge based industries in order to reduce levels of out-commuting and a reliance on manufacturing. The level of economic and social polarisation within the area has an impact on educational achievement within the Borough. However educational achievement within Ashton, Denton South and Smallshaw is improving and closing the gap between the deprived areas and the Tameside average.

There is a need to focus housing development within urban areas and on previously developed land. There is also a need to deliver well designed and affordable housing (in all tenures) to meet identified levels of need. It is also important that consideration is afforded to measures to reduce vacant housing and to improve energy efficiency in the existing housing stock. There is also a requirement for Tameside to identify suitable pitches for gypsies and travellers. C. Human Health - The quality of life for the community within Tameside can be positively promoted by improving the quality of the physical environment, social well-being and economic and environmental improvements and by recognising the interconnectivity of the above issues. D. Soil - There is a need to protect greenfield sites and to focus new built development on previously developed land. E. Water - The need to manage and protect water resources in response to climate change, population growth and lifestyle choices – which are all placing increasing demands on Tameside’s water supplies. F. Air - The primary source of air pollution within Tameside is from road traffic with an AQMA identified on the M60, M67/A57, A6018 and in town centres. This may be a concern for health and for the conservation and preservation of buildings and there is a need to address this. G. Climate Change - The urgent need to address the causes of climate change and to reduce the current and future threat to Tameside’s population, wildlife, natural resources, archaeological and cultural heritage and material assets.

The need to promote sustainable forms of energy, reduce overall energy consumption and to become more energy efficient. H. Material Assets - There is a need to encourage investment in transport infrastructure, to increase transport choice and reduce congestion.

The need for an integrated sustainable approach to managing waste from reduction through to re-use, recycling and reprocessing. The need to continue to increase the amount of domestic, commercial and industrial materials recycled or reused. The need to reduce the volume of construction, demolition and excavation wastes produced. I. Cultural Heritage - The Borough is an attractive location with built heritage features of real interest however, a number of Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas are identified as being at risk. J. Landscape - The landscape character within the Borough should be afforded protection with opportunities for enhancement sought.

3. SA Approach

3.1 Introduction

This section outlines the methodology used to appraise the Issues and Options Report and describes the assessment framework.work. This framframThis eework comcomwork pprisesrises sustainability objectives and criteria based guide questions to innforformm thethe appraisal.appraisal.

The SA objectives that comprise the assessment framework are based on those identified within the updated Scoping Report and have been derived from a number of sources (highlighted in Figure 3.1). These objectives define the long term aspirations for the Borough with regard to social, economic and environmental considerations and it is against these objectives that the performance of the Issues and Options Report has been assessed.

FFiigguurre 3.1e 3.1 DeDevveeloloppmmenentt ooff ththe SSe AA ObObjectijectivveess

The SEA Directive Review of relevant UK Government Plans, Sustainable Programmes and Development Strategies Strategy (2005)

Consultation with Identification of stakeholders for a Sustainability key sustainability five week period objectives issues

SA of RSS and SA Scoping Report Sustainable Local Development Community Documents (ODPM Strategy 2005)

It should be noted that the SA objectives have been reconsidered in light of the updated review of plans and programmes and baseline data contained within this report although no changes have been made. It is envisaged that the assessment framework will continue to be reviewed throughout the SA of the Core Strategy to take into account consultation comments on any SA reports and updated baseline information.

3.2 SA Framework

Table 3.1 presents the SA objectives that comprise the assessment framework together with the key questions/guidance relating to each. The SEA Directive topic to which each of the SA objectives relates to is included in the third column.

Table 3.1 SA Framework

Objective Criteria Topic (SEA Indicator)

A Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

1. To improve access to good a) Will it provide additional affordable housing? Population quality, affordable and resource b) Will it provide an appropriate mix of housing to meet residents’ Material Assets efficient housing. needs? c) Will it reduce the number of unfit and empty homes? 2. To enable people to enjoy long a) Will it improve the health of people living in the Borough? Population life, free from disease and b) Will it promote healthy lifestyles? Human Health limiting illnesses. c) Will it improve access to health facilities? d) Will it reduce death rates and negative health impacts in key vulnerable groups? 3. To develop strong and positive a) Will it improve people’s perception of their local area being a Population relationships between people place where people from different ethnic backgrounds get on from different backgrounds and well together? communities. b) Will it create a sense of belonging and wellbeing for all members of the community? 4. To deliver urban renaissance. a) Will it improve economic, social and environmental conditions Material Assets in the most deprived areas? Cultural Heritage b) Will it improve the quality of the built environment through high Population standards of sustainable design and construction of new and existing buildings? c) Will it improve townscapes and urban centres? 5. To regenerate rural areas. a) Will it support rural diversification? Population b) Will it address rural needs? Soil c) Will it support sustainable food and farming? Population / Soil 6. To improve access to and use of a) Will it improve the provision of shops or services within the Population basic goods, services and main centres? Material Assets amenities. b) Will it improve access for those with disabilities? c) Will it ensure the protection, creation and access to green spaces including access and recreation in the Countryside in and around towns in the Borough? d) Will it improve access to skills and training for improving employment potential? e) Will it improve access to cultural facilities? 7. To reduce crime, disorder and a) Will it reduce crime levels and individuals fear of crime? Population the fear of crime. b) Will it promote design that discourages crime? Material Assets c) Will it help to reduce levels of anti-social behaviour? Human Health 8. To enable groups and a) Will it enable the community sector to contribute to and have Population communities to contribute to influence in decision-making? decision-making. b) Will it identify and engage with hard to reach stakeholders? 9. To provide education which is a) Will it increase community access to, and involvement with, Population accessible to all and valued by schools and colleges? Material Assets all and produces achievements b) Will it increase the levels of participation and attainment in above the norm. education?

Objective Criteria Topic (SEA Indicator)

B Effective Protection of the Environment

10. To protect places and enhance, a) Will it protect and/or enhance site, features and areas of Material Assets landscapes and buildings of historical, archaeological and cultural value / potential? Cultural Heritage historic, cultural and b) Will it help to conserve historic buildings through sensitive Landscape archaeological value. adaptation and re-use? c) Will it use architectural and urban design to enhance the local character and “sense of place” of development? d) Will it improve access to and understanding of buildings and landscapes of historic/cultural value? e) Will it conserve and enhance the character and quality of the landscapes in the Borough 11. To protect and improve local a) Will it protect and/or improve the environment of town centres Biodiversity environmental quality. and other urban areas? Flora b) Will more trees and woodland be planted? Fauna c) Will it reduce light and noise pollution? Human Health d) Will it comply with air quality process and regulation? Air e) Will it reduce emissions of greenhouse gases? Soil Water Landscape Cultural Heritage 12. To protect and enhance a) Will it conserve and enhance habitats and species and provide Biodiversity biodiversity. for the long-term management of natural habitats and wildlife? Flora b) Will it improve the quality and extent of designated and non- Fauna designated sites? Landscape c) Will it provide areas of green infrastructure? Soil d) Will it provide opportunities to enhance the environment and create new conservation assets (or restore existing wildlife Air habitats)? Water e) Will it bring nature closer to people, especially in the most urbanised areas? 13. To protect and improve the a) Will it improve the quality of waterbodies? Water quality of controlled waters. b) Will it support sustainable urban drainage? Biodiversity c) Will it reduce water consumption? Flora Fauna 14. To protect and improve a) Will it help to promote the wise use of land by minimising Biodiversity landscape character and quality. development on Greenfield sites? Flora b) Will it help to reduce the amount of degraded and underused Fauna land? Soil c) Will it reduce land contamination? Air d) Will it promote the use of previously developed land? Material Assets Landscape Cultural Heritage

C Prudent Use of Natural Resources

15. To ensure the prudent use of a) Will it raise awareness of resource depletion? Climatic Factors natural resources and the b) Will it promote the use of recycled and secondary materials? Water sustainable management of existing resources. c) Will it promote the re-use of existing buildings and long life in Soil new buildings? Air Material Assets Human Health Cultural Heritage

Objective Criteria Topic (SEA Indicator)

16. To address the need to limit and a) Will it protect Tameside from climate change impacts? Climatic Factors adapt to climate change. b) Will it minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and Water watercourses to people and property? Air c) Will the proposal increase green infrastructure across the Soil Borough? Human Health d) Will it increase the proportion of energy both purchased and generated from renewable and sustainable sources? Population a) Will it maximise the production and/or use of renewable Biodiversity energy? Flora e) Will it increase energy efficiency Fauna 17. To reduce the need to travel. a) Will it encourage a modal shift to more sustainable forms of Population travel? Human Health b) Will it reduce traffic volumes and congestion? Air c) Will it improve accessibility to work by public transport, walking Climatic Factors and cycling? d) Will it reduce road traffic accidents? 18. To ensure the sustainable a) Will it help minimise the production of waste? Population management of waste, minimise b) Will it improve domestic waste recycling? Material Assets its production, and increase re use, recycling and recovery c) Will it reduce the amount of residual waste to landfill? Soil rates. d) Will it reduce waste arising from construction and demolition? Water Landscape

D Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

19. To establish a prosperous a) Will it help to deliver a zero carbon economy? Climatic Factors Borough that offers attractive b) Will it enhance and develop the economic potential of town Material Assets opportunities to individuals, centres? businesses and communities. Population c) Will it provide, or contribute to, the availability of a balanced portfolio of employment sites? d) Will it help to diversify the economy? e) Will it prevent the loss of local businesses? f) Will it help to reduce levels of deprivation? g) Will it support the development of green industries? h) Will it encourage investment in Research and Development and in emerging technologies? i) Will it increase the economic benefit (e.g. heritage led regeneration, tourism, environmental economy, cultural economy derived from the historic environment. 20. To exploit the growth potential of a) Will it increase the number of growth businesses? Population business sectors. b) Will it support Developing Sectors identified in the RES and other sub-regional/local strategies? 21. To secure economic inclusion. a) Will it meet the employment needs of local people? Population b) Will it reduce unemployment levels? Human Health c) Will it improve the physical accessibility of jobs through the Air location of sites and transport links close to areas of high unemployment? d) Will it promote heritage-led regeneration? 22. To develop and maintain a a) Will it provide better paid and higher quality jobs? Population healthy labour market. b) Will it increase employment opportunities within or accessible Material Assets to the most deprived areas? c) Will it help to diversify the economy of the Borough?

Objective Criteria Topic (SEA Indicator)

23. To develop strategic transport, a) Will it reduce traffic congestion and improve safety for road Air communication and economic users? Climatic Factors infrastructure. b) Will it increase the level of investment in and use of rail and water freight transport? c) Will it improve transport links, ICT, homeworking, and green travel plans?

Table 3.2 shows the extent to which the SA objectives encompass the range of issues identified in the SEA Directive.

Table 3.2 The SA Objectives Compared to the SEA Directive Issues

SEA Directive Issue SA Objective

Biodiversity 11, 12, 13, 14 and 16

Population* 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 and 22

Human Health 2, 7, 11, 15, 16, 17, 21 and 23

Fauna 11, 12, 13, 14 and 16

Flora 11, 12, 13, 14 and 16

Soil 5, 11, 12, 14, 16, 17 and 18

Water 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 and 18

Air 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 21

Climatic Factors 15, 16, 17, 19 and 23

Material Assets* 1, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19 and 22

Cultural Heritage including architectural and archaeological 4, 10, 11, 14 and 15

Landscape 10, 11, 12, 14 and 18

* These terms are not clearly defined in the SEA Directive.

The table above indicates that all of the topics highlighted within the SEA Directive are covered by the SA objectives.

3.3 Application of SA to the Issues and Options Report

Following a high level review of the Issues and Options Report, it was considered necessary to apply SA to two principle elements of the document namely, the Strategic Objectives and Strategic Spatial Options. The assessment of these elements is discussed in more detail below. It should be noted that, whilst the Issues and Options Report raises the question of how much growth should be accommodated in the Borough over the plan period, it does not present detailed options. Similarly, the Issues and Options Report does not contain detailed core policies or development management policies but instead outlines the broad topics likely to be covered within the

Core Strategy. Consequently, it has not been possible to undertake SA of these elements as part of this report. However, it is envisaged that SA of growth options as well as core and development management policies will be undertaken following consultation on the Issues and Options Report as part of the on-going development of the Core Strategy.

3.3.1 Assessment of Strategic Objectives

The Issues and Options Report contains a set of proposed strategic objectives which are distinct from the SA objectives. These strategic objectives focus on the key issues that need to be addressed in order to achieve the overarching vision of the Core Strategy. It is therefore important to assess the extent to which these objectives are compatible with the SA objectives.

A matrix has been developed to assess and show the compatibility of the two sets of objectives. The qualitative scoring system used in this assessment is shown in Table 3.3 below.

Table 3.3 Compatibility Matrix: Scoring System

Symbol Compatibility

+ The SA Objective and Strategic Objective are compatible.

0 There is a neutral/no relationship between the SA Objective and Strategic Objective.

- The SA Objective and Strategic Objective are incompatible.

? The compatibility of the SA Objective and the Strategic Objective is uncertain.

The results of this assessment are presented in Section 4 of this report.

3.3.2 Assessment of Strategic Spatial Options

The Issues and Options Report contains a range of strategic spatial options which have been assessed against each of the SA objectives in accordance with the requirement of the SEA Directive to consider reasonable alternatives. The results of the assessment have been recorded in a set of matrices (see Appendix D) which allows comparison of the scores of each of the options against each other.

The matrices include the SA objectives and appraisal criteria and record the following:

• A commentary on significant impacts including consideration of the cumulative, synergistic and indirect effects as well as the geography, temporary/permanence and likelihood of any effects;

• A score indicating the nature of the effect and how this will manifest itself in the short term (defined as the first five years of the DPD), medium term (5-15 years) and long term (15 years and beyond);

• Recommendations as to how the options may be improved including any mitigation or enhancements which could be considered in the next steps of policy formulation.

The qualitative scoring system used to assess the effects of the strategic spatial options is shown in Table 3.4 below.

Table 3.4 Option Assessment: Scoring System

Alignment Description Symbol

Major Positive Impact The option contributes significantly to the achievement of the objective. ++

Minor Positive Impact The option contributes to the achievement of the objective but not significantly. +

Neutral The option does not have any effect on the achievement of the objective. 0

Minor The option detracts from the achievement of the objective but not significantly. - Negative Impact

Major The option detracts significantly from the achievement of the objective. -- Negative Impact There is no clear relationship between the option and the achievement of the objective or the No Relationship relationship is negligible. ~ The option has an uncertain relationship to the objective or the relationship is dependant on the way in Uncertain which the aspect is managed. In addition, insufficient information may be available to enable an ? assessment to be made.

A summary of the results of the appraisal is presented in Section 4 of this report. The appraisal matrices are presented in Appendix D to this report.

3.4 When the SA was Undertaken and by Whom

The Scoping Report for the Tameside LDF was produced by Entec UK Ltd and first published for consultation in July 2006. Stakeholders, including the Environment Agency, Natural England and English Heritage, were involved in developing the SA objectives and providing comments on the original document. The subsequent revisions to the Scoping Report were also consulted on and stakeholder comments were incorporated into the final report published in January 2010.

This SA has been carried out at stages throughout the development of the Issues and Options Report principally by AMEC but also with input from Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council officers.

3.5 Technical Difficulties

The SEA Directive requires the identification of any difficulties (such as technical deficiencies or lack of knowledge) encountered. The high-level nature of the strategic spatial options and a lack of specificity about proposed locations, sites and extent of development has meant that a number of uncertainties have been encountered during the appraisal. These are as follows:

• The options presented by the Council are indicative of different patterns of development at this stage. As such it is difficult to determine specific sites where different types of development would be located within each area. Consequently, it has been assumed that development could proceed anywhere within the indicative areas. The appraisal has sought to identify the potential constraints that may exist within the indicative areas, although it is recognised that such effects are uncertain until more detailed site specific information is available;

• The exact composition of the options is uncertain (certain basic assumptions have been made regarding design principles, housing typologies and densities etc.);

• The level of growth to be accommodated by each option is currently unknown although for the purposes of this assessment it is assumed to be broadly in the region of that set out in the RSS;

• The performance of the economy over the next few years will define the feasibility of much of this plan (it has been assumed that we are currently in a temporary situation which will recover).

It is anticipated that these issues identified above will be resolved as the Core Strategy is developed further.

In addition to the uncertainties listed above, a number of more specific assumptions have been made in undertaking the assessment and these are detailed within the appraisal commentary contained in the assessment matrices at Appendix D.

4. SA of the Issues and Options Report

4.1 Introduction

This section presents the findings of the SA of the Issues and Options Report. It considers the compatibility of the strategic objectives and SA objectives and then provides a summary of the likely sustainability effects of the strategic spatial options. A range potential mitigation measures are also identified which could be considered during the development of the Core Strategy to help enhance positive effects and reduce negative effects associated with the implementation of the strategic spatial options.

4.2 Strategic Objectives

As set out in Section 3 of this report, a matrix has been developed to show the compatibility of the strategic objectives contained within the Issues and Options Report and the SA objectives. The strategic objectives assessed are as follows:

• SO1: To promote sustainable development, and to mitigate and adapt to climate change across the Borough;

• SO2: Create sustainable communities that enhance the Borough for residents now and in the future;

• SO3: To promote sustainable economic growth and the transition of the Borough’s economy through diversification and encouraging the role of manufacturing;

• SO4: To improve the educational attainment and increase the skills of the Borough’s residents;

• SO5: To promote the creation of a high quality, attractive Borough for existing and future generations;

• SO6: To improve the health of the Borough’s population;

• SO7: To promote community safety and crime prevention in the Borough.

Table 4.1 contains the matrix which compares the SA objectives and the seven strategic objectives listed above.

Table 4.1 Compatibility Matrix

Strategic Objective SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 SO6 SO7

SA Objective

1. Housing 0 + 0 0 - + 0

2. Health + + 0 0 + + 0

Strategic Objective SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 SO6 SO7

SA Objective

3. Community cohesion ? + 0 0 + + +

4. Urban renaissance + + + + + + +

5. Rural regeneration 0 + + 0 0 0 0

6. Access to services + + + + + + 0

7. Crime ? + ? 0 0 0 +

8. Community decision-making ? + ? ? 0 0 0

9. Education + + 0 + 0 0 0

10. Historic environment + - - 0 + 0 0

11. Local environmental quality + ? ? 0 + + 0

12. Biodiversity + - - 0 + + 0

13. Water quality and resources + - - 0 + + 0

14. Landscape character and quality + ? ? 0 + 0 0

15. Natural resources + ? - 0 + 0 0

16. Climate change + + + 0 + + 0

17. Travel and transport + ? ? + + + 0

18. Waste + - - 0 0 0 0

19. Prosperous Borough 0 0 + + - 0 0

20. Business sectors 0 0 + + - 0 0

21. Economic inclusion 0 0 + + - 0 0

22. Healthy labour market 0 0 + + - 0 0

Strategic Objective SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 SO6 SO7

SA Objective

23. Strategic infrastructure + ? ? + - + 0

Key

Symbol Compatibility

+ The SA Objective and Strategic Objective are compatible.

0 There is a neutral/no relationship between the SA Objective and Strategic Objective.

- The SA Objective and Strategic Objective are incompatible.

? The compatibility of the SA Objective and the Strategic Objective is uncertain.

Broadly, the strategic objectives are supportive of the SA objectives or their relationship is deemed to be neutral. Those SA objectives particularly well supported by the strategic objectives include urban renaissance (SA Objective 4), access to services (SA Objective 6), climate change (SA Objective 16) and travel and transport (SA Objective 17).

The assessment presented above does serve to highlight that in some instances tensions may exist between the two sets of objectives. Where incompatibilities are identified, this primarily relates to, on the one hand, the need for growth to meet the socio-economic needs of the Borough and on the other, the need to protect and enhance the Borough’s natural and historic environment. For example, Strategic Objective 3 relates to the promotion of economic growth which is likely to be supported by making provision for new employment related development in the Borough. This strategic objective has the potential, however, to adversely affect SA objectives relating to biodiversity, water quality and resources, natural resources and waste due to either impacts associated with the construction of premises and infrastructure (e.g. loss of habitat) or effects associated with the operation of premises once they are occupied (e.g. any emissions to air or noise which could have a negative effect on biodiversity). Conversely, Strategic Objective 5 seeks to create a high quality and attractive Borough which is likely to be achieved by retaining and enhancing the Borough’s historic and natural environment. There is the potential, however, for this objective to restrict new economic and residential development which could adversely affect those SA objectives relating to housing (SA Objective 1), the economy (SA Objectives 19 and 20) and employment (SA Objectives 21 and 22) as well as the delivery of strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23).

Any adverse effects may be mitigated, and tensions between the objectives resolved, if development takes place in accordance with all of the strategic objectives and as such an incompatibility is not necessarily an insurmountable issue but one that may need to be considered in the development of policies that comprise the Core Strategy.

4.3 Strategic Spatial Options

This section presents a summary of the appraisal of the strategic spatial options that comprise the Issues and Options Report against the SA objectives. The strategic spatial options considered as part of this SA are listed below:

• Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations;

• Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations;

Full appraisal matrices are presented in Appendix D which provide, for each option, a commentary on the likely effects and a score against each SA objective, in accordance with the approach detailed in Section 3 of this report. A summary of the appraisal scores is provided in Table 4.2.

Table 4.2 Appraisal Summary

Option Strategic Spatial Option 1 Strategic Spatial Option 2 Strategic Spatial Option 3

SA Objective Short Medium Long Short Medium Long Short Medium Long Term Term Term Term Term Term Term Term Term

A Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone 1. Housing + + + + + + + ++ ++

2. Health -/+ -/+ + -/+ -/+ + -/+ -/+ -/+

3. Community cohesion + + + ? ? ? + + + 4. Urban renaissance ++ ++ ++ + + + + + +

5. Rural regeneration - - - 0 0 0 -/+ -/+ -/+

6. Access to services -/ -/ + ++ ++ + -/+ -/+ + ++ ++ 7. Crime ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 8. Community decision-making ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

9. Education + + + + + + + + +

Option Strategic Spatial Option 1 Strategic Spatial Option 2 Strategic Spatial Option 3

SA Objective Short Medium Long Short Medium Long Short Medium Long Term Term Term Term Term Term Term Term Term

B Effective Protection of the Environment 10. Historic environment -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ 11. Local environmental quality -/+ -/+ + -/+ -/+ + -/+ -/+ -/+

12. Biodiversity + -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ - - - 13. Water quality and resources ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 14. Landscape character and quality ++ ++ ++ + + + -/+ -/+ -/+

C Prudent Use of Natural Resources 15. Natural resources + + + + + + -/+ -/+ -/+ 16. Climate change + + + 0 0 0 0 0 0 17. Travel and transport + + ++ + + + + + + 18. Waste ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

D Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment 19. Prosperous Borough + + + + + + + ++ ++

20. Business sectors ? ? ? ? ? ? + + + 21. Economic inclusion + + + + + + + ++ ++

22. Healthy labour market + + + + + + + ++ ++ 23. Strategic infrastructure + + + + + + + + +

Key

Alignment Description Symbol

Major Positive Impact The option contributes significantly to the achievement of the objective. ++

Minor Positive Impact The option contributes to the achievement of the objective but not significantly. +

Alignment Description Symbol

Neutral The option does not have any effect on the achievement of the objective. 0

Minor The option detracts from the achievement of the objective but not significantly. - Negative Impact

In undertaking the assessment, a number of cross-cutting uncertainties were identified with respect to effects arising from the strategic spatial options (highlighted by “?” in Table 4.2 above). The uncertainties primarily relate to the following SA objectives: crime (SA Objective 7), community decision-making (SA Objective 8) and waste (SA Objective 18). These uncertainties are therefore not covered in the following sections however, further detail is provided within the assessment matrices contained at Appendix D.

4.3.1 Strategic Spatial Option 1

Overview

This strategic spatial option seeks to prioritise development on brownfield land in the Borough’s strategic regeneration areas (which are identified as Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley) in order to revitalise the urban core. Outside of these areas, further residential development would be delivered within existing urban areas and economic development in accessible locations within the Borough. The option also makes provision for the development of strategic sites for decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure including within the Green Belt.

The sustainability effects of this option are discussed below under the broad themes of the SA Framework.

Summary of Effects

A. Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone By focusing new development in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley and delivering growth within core urban areas more generally, this option is expected to increase the provision of housing, jobs and new community facilities within, or in close proximity to, some of the most deprived areas of the Borough (and which constitute some of the most deprived areas nationally) and ensure that prospective residents are able to access services and facilities (including by walking and cycling). This has been assessed as a having significant positive effect on the delivery of urban renaissance (SA Objective 4) and access to services (SA Objective 6) and a positive effect on objectives relating to housing, health, community cohesion and education (SA Objectives 1, 2, 3 and 9). Further, the option is expected to encourage the redevelopment of brownfield sites including vacant and derelict land by concentrating residential development within core urban areas and adopting a town centre first approach to new retail and office uses. This is expected to help improve both the environmental quality of the Borough’s town centres and enhance their viability and will be of particular benefit to Ashton-under-Lyne which is identified within the Tameside Retail Study (2010) as requiring additional comparison goods floorspace in order to maintain its role and function as a sub-regional centre.

Notwithstanding the positive effects outlined above, prioritising development in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley could result in both a lack of investment in community facilities and services and an under provision of housing and employment development in other areas of the Borough, many of which include pockets of severe deprivation. With specific regard to housing, focusing residential development in strategic regeneration areas and on brownfield sites is likely to restrict the supply of housing land such that the Borough’s projected 15 year housing supply may not be met.

This option has been assessed as having a negative effect on rural regeneration (SA Objective 5) due to a lack of specific attention on rural areas. Short to medium term negative effects have also been identified in relation to health principally due to the impact of construction activities associated with new development on the health and wellbeing of residents in close proximity to sites and along transport routes (although any effects would be temporary and are not expected to be significant) and the potential for increased demand from new residents to undermine the quality of existing health care facilities.

B. Effective Protection of the Environment This option is expected to encourage the reuse of urban, previously developed land thereby minimising development on greenfield sites and reducing the potential for adverse landscape impacts. This has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on landscape character and quality (SA Objective 14). Encouraging the development of brownfield land within the urban core is also likely to help avoid adverse impacts on biodiversity (SA Objective 12) as it is considered that, on balance, the biodiversity value of previously developed land will be less than that of greenfield sites. There may also be opportunities to enhance existing, or incorporate new, green infrastructure as part of new developments which could improve the quality and extent of habitat and increase the accessibility of both existing and prospective residents to these assets. However, in the medium to long term there is potential for negative effects on some of the Borough’s biodiversity assets such as the Huddersfield Narrow Canal (which is designated a SSSI) due to recreational pressures arising from new development. Further, the

option does include broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure some of which are within the Green Belt. The development of these sites could adversely affect landscape quality and biodiversity although until the exact location, scale and type of development to be accommodated has been determined, effects remain uncertain.

Whilst new development may have a negative effect on local environmental quality (SA Objective 11) in the strategic regeneration areas and other core urban areas (principally due to the temporary effects of construction activities such as emissions to air and noise), in the longer term this option has the potential to enhance environmental quality through a reduction in car use and associated emissions to air and noise. Encouraging the use of brownfield sites may also help preserve open spaces whilst new development has the potential to improve the quality urban areas through good quality design and open space provision (although this would be subject to more detailed policies within the Core Strategy). That being said, there is a danger that concentrating new development within the urban core may increase development pressure on urban green space and result in town cramming.

Ashton-under-Lyne and other areas that comprise the Borough’s urban core contain a number of cultural heritage assets. Concentrating new development in the urban core may therefore adversely affect these assets but also increase their accessibility and/or create opportunities for heritage-led redevelopment. Overall, therefore, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive/negative effect on the historic environment (SA Objective 10).

C. Prudent Use of Natural Resources It is unclear how this option will raise awareness of resource depletion or promote the use of recycled and secondary materials. However, by encouraging development on brownfield land it is expected that the option will help to promote the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure which is likely to have a positive effect in relation to natural resources (SA Objective 15).

Concentrating development within the strategic regeneration areas/wider urban core and delivering some employment uses in other accessible locations (e.g. along the Metrolink extension) will help ensure good accessibility to public transport, employment opportunities and services and facilities and may reduce car use, generating a positive effect in relation to travel and transport (SA Objective 17) and strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23). Further, development within these areas may help to maintain existing, and (potentially) stimulate investment in new, public transport provision. In this context, a number of major transport schemes have been identified within the LTP for delivery in Ashton-under-Lyne including, for example, the Metrolink extension (and a potential further extension to Stalybridge) and there is an aspiration to provide further enhancements to the rail station at Hattersley linked to the wider regeneration of the area. In the longer term, and as part of the wider revitalisation of the Borough’s centres (which this option seeks to achieve), there may be a reduction in out- commuting to access employment and services (including retail) which could have a more significant positive effect on reducing the need to travel. However, there is a risk that a policy of concentration may result in increased congestion within the urban core.

Taking into account the extent of existing flood risk in the Borough, the expectation that this option will generally avoid development of greenfield sites and that future development proposals will be accompanied by a Flood Risk

Assessment (FRA)/incorporate suitable flood alleviation measures (where appropriate), it is not expected that flood risk will be significantly increased under this option. Further, this option includes broad locations for flood risk management infrastructure which may help protect Tameside from climate change impacts. Together with the potential for decentralised energy provision (which may reduce greenhouse gas emissions), Strategic Spatial Option 1 has been assessed as having a positive effect on climate change (SA Objective 16).

D. Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment Targeted residential and economic development in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley and growth within core urban areas more generally is expected to help stimulate jobs and improve the vitality and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres, including some of its most deprived areas. Focusing new employment uses in accessible locations will also help to reduce levels of deprivation as jobs created will be accessible (although it is acknowledged that development in some locations such as those along the Metrolink extension or at motorway corridors may not benefit those communities not in close proximity to these transport modes or residents without access to car). However, there is a risk that in focusing development on strategic regeneration areas, much needed investment may be drawn away from some of the Borough’s other centres which could exacerbate relative levels of economic deprivation in these areas. Further, in not making sufficient provision of housing land to meet the Borough’s projected 15 year housing land supply, this option may lead to increased pressure on, and the loss of, existing employment sites to residential development thereby undermining the Borough’s economic growth. Restricting new economic development to transport corridors and on brownfield sites may also limit growth by not providing a suitable range of employment sites.

On balance, Strategic Spatial Option 1 has been assessed as having a positive effect on establishing a prosperous Borough (SA Objective 19), securing economic inclusion (SA Objective 21) and developing and maintaining a healthy labour market (SA Objective 22). As this option does not specify the type of employment land to be provided (which is likely to be covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy) its impact on the growth of business sectors (SA Objective 20) has been assessed as being uncertain. The impact of this option on strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23) is discussed under the prudent use of natural resources theme above.

4.3.2 Strategic Spatial Option 2

Overview

Strategic Spatial Option 2 adopts a more dispersed approach to development, concentrating growth in the wider urban area and employment in accessible locations. Similar to Strategic Spatial Option 1, this option makes provision for the development of strategic sites for decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure including within the Green Belt.

The sustainability effects of this option are discussed below under the broad themes of the SA Framework.

Summary of Effects

A. Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone This option does not specifically target strategic regeneration areas and, consequently, there may be less certainty that affordable housing, jobs, services and other facilities will be provided where need is greatest. As a result, the magnitude of positive effects on those SA objectives covering social issues is likely to be less than that associated with Strategic Spatial Option 1. However, this option would still provide residential and employment development in relatively accessible locations including town centres (by adopting a town centre first approach to retail and office uses) and dispersing new residential development may reduce pressures on some services and facilities arising from an increased population (compared to Strategic Spatial Option 1). With specific regard to housing, dispersing new development across the wider urban area is likely to provide greater scope for delivery of a broad mix of market and affordable housing to meet needs across the Borough (due to the potential for a range of sites to come forward during the plan period in a variety of locations). Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on housing (SA Objective 1), health (SA Objective 2), urban renaissance (SA Objective 4), access to services (SA Objective 6) and education (SA Objective 9) whilst the potential to facilitate community cohesion (SA Objective 3) is considered to be more uncertain.

Similar to Strategic Spatial Option 1, the potential for short to medium term negative effects on health arising from construction activities has been identified (although dispersing development may help to keep levels of disturbance below thresholds where they could affect human health). In addition, this option may also result in the loss of greenfield land including recreational open space generating negative effects in relation to both health and access to services.

Unlike Strategic Spatial Option 1, this option has been assessed as having a neutral rather than negative effect on rural regeneration (SA Objective 5). This reflects the potential for a more dispersed pattern of development to help meet the needs of residents located in the rural parts of the Borough.

B. Effective Protection of the Environment Development within the wider urban area is expected to encourage the reuse of urban, previously developed land thereby minimising the potential for negative effects to be felt on biodiversity (SA Objective 12), landscape quality and character (SA Objective 14) and local environmental quality (SA Objective 11), similar to Strategic Spatial Option 1. However, under this option there is likely to be some, albeit limited, development on greenfield land (in addition to that associated with the development of decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure) which may reduce the magnitude of positive effects on these objectives. Further, development towards the urban fringe could increase recreational pressures on the Peak District Moors SPA and South Pennine SAC (although this is subject to the findings of the HRA) as well as several UK BAP Priority Habitats and has the potential to affect landscape character.

A more dispersed development approach is likely to reduce the potential pressure on cultural heritage assets within the Borough’s urban core although this may equally reduce their accessibility and limit opportunities for heritage

led redevelopment. Overall, Strategic Spatial Option 2 has been assessed as having a mixed positive/negative effect on the historic environment (SA Objective 10).

C. Prudent Use of Natural Resources Although there would be a limited release of greenfield land under this option, overall it is expected that concentrating growth across the Borough’s urban area will encourage development on brownfield land, helping to promote the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure which is likely to have a positive effect in relation to resource use (SA Objective 15). Growth within the Borough’s urban area and the provision of new employment development in accessible locations is also likely to reduce the need to travel and encourage alternatives to car use whilst a more dispersed approach to development may also help reduce congestion, particularly within the urban core. However, it is recognised that a more dispersed approach to residential development may also result in increased car use in some areas whilst the potential for investment in new public transport services and wider revitalisation of the Borough’s main centres (which could reduce out-commuting) may be reduced relative to Spatial Option 1. On balance, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect in relation to travel and transport (SA Objective 17) and strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23).

Whilst this option includes broad locations for flood risk management infrastructure and is generally expected to avoid a significant increase in flood risk, the release of greenfield land could have a minor negative impact on flood risk (due to increased surface water run-off). Consequently, this option has been assessed as having a neutral rather than positive effect (as identified under Strategic Spatial Option 1) on climate change (SA Objective 16).

D. Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment Development across the wider urban area and adoption of a town centre first approach to retail and office uses in particular will help to improve the vitality and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres in the medium to long term although the opportunity to fully realise the potential of Ashton-under-Lyne may not be as significant compared to Strategic Spatial Option 1 (and Strategic Spatial Option 3). Whilst this option does not specifically seek to concentrate new development within Tameside’s most economically deprived areas, it does focus new economic development and some residential development within urban centres and locations accessible by deprived communities. Further, in making provision for the release of greenfield sites this may, to a limited extent, enable a greater range of employment sites to come forward during the plan period, helping to stimulate the Borough’s economy. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on establishing a prosperous Borough (SA Objective 19), securing economic inclusion (SA Objective 21) and developing and maintaining a healthy labour market (SA Objective 22). As with Strategic Spatial Option 1, the effect of this option on the growth of business sectors (SA Objective 20) is unknown. The impact of this option on strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23) is discussed under the prudent use of natural resources theme above.

4.3.3 Strategic Spatial Option 3

Overview

This option builds on Strategic Spatial Option 2. It seeks to locate residential development across the wider urban area and employment in accessible locations and also makes provision for targeted expansion at broad strategic locations.

Similar to strategic spatial options 1 and 2, this option makes provision for the development of strategic sites for decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure including within the Green Belt.

The sustainability effects of this option are discussed below under the broad themes of the SA Framework.

Summary of Effects

A. Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone Strategic Spatial Option 3 is expected to provide significant scope to deliver a mix of housing (in terms of type, tenure and size) by bringing forward a range of sites across the urban area. Allied to this, the option will allow for the small scale release of greenfield (including Green Belt) land, helping to ensure that there is a sufficient range of sites to meet the Borough’s projected housing need. Overall, this option has therefore been assessed as having a significant positive effect on housing (SA Objective 1).

Similar to Strategic Spatial Option 2, this option does not specifically target strategic regeneration areas although new economic development and some residential development would be located within urban centres and in particular Ashton town centre which includes, and is in close proximity to, areas suffering from high levels of deprivation. This is likely to increase the provision of housing and accessibility to jobs and new facilities in these areas although it should be noted that there is potential for some new development to be drawn away from the urban core and towards areas at the urban fringe which could reduce accessibility and investment in deprived communities. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on health (SA Objective 2), community cohesion (SA Objective 3), urban renaissance (SA Objective 4), rural regeneration (SA Objective 5) and education (SA Objective 9). A significant positive effect has been identified in relation to access to services (SA Objective 6) reflecting the focus placed on enhancing the economic prosperity of Ashton town centre which is likely to result in an increased retail offer and provision of services and facilities.

Like strategic spatial options 1 and 2, the potential for short to medium term negative effects on health arising from construction activities has been identified. Longer term negative effects on this objective and access to services have also been identified due to the potential loss of greenfield sites (including land outside existing settlement

boundaries) which may discourage walking/cycling (due to poor accessibility) and result in the loss of recreational opportunities. Development of these sites may also result in the loss of agricultural land which could have a negative effect in relation to rural regeneration. Should this option be taken forward it will be essential to ensure that the areas of land released are either small or small/medium sites in locations which already possess a high level of accessibility to services and facilities. Alternatively it should look to release large sites of a size sufficient to be able to support a full range of new facilities which should therefore promote the internalisation of trips. Locating these large sites alongside areas exhibiting a deficit in existing service provision could help to improve accessibility for existing residents.

B. Effective Protection of the Environment Development within the wider urban area is expected to encourage the reuse of urban, previously developed land thereby minimising the potential for negative effects to be felt on biodiversity (SA Objective 12), landscape (SA Objective 14) and local environmental quality (SA Objective 11), similar to strategic spatial options 1 and 2. However, this option makes provision for the targeted release of strategic Green Belt and green space for residential and employment development (as well as for strategic flood risk management and decentralised energy infrastructure) and consequently the magnitude of negative effects on these objectives is expected to be greater than for the other options. This primarily reflects both the scale of greenfield land which could be released (and the potential for associated loss of habitat and landscape impact) as well as the potential for development beyond the urban fringe which is likely to be more sensitive both in terms of landscape quality and biodiversity.

Similar to the other options, new development in the Borough’s urban centres may have a negative effect on the historic environment particularly in the short term during associated construction activities although development, particularly within Ashton town centre, may present opportunities for heritage-led redevelopment. Overall, therefore, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive/negative effect on the historic environment (SA Objective 10).

C. Prudent Use of Natural Resources It is expected that this option will focus the majority of new development across the Borough’s urban areas which is likely to encourage the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure, reducing resource requirements (as under strategic spatial options 1 and 2). Notwithstanding this, the option will result in a more extensive release of greenfield sites and could lead to the direct loss of resources (e.g. agricultural land) and/or discourage the reuse of existing buildings in some instances. On balance, therefore, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive and negative effect with respect to natural resources (SA Objective 15).

Like Strategic Spatial Option 2, this option will deliver new residential and employment development in relatively accessible locations. However, development, particularly towards (and beyond) the urban fringe, may increase dependency on the car and increase the need to travel more generally especially if sites are not well served by

public transport. On balance, therefore, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on travel and transport (SA Objective 17) and strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23).

D. Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment This option has been assessed as having a significant, medium to long term positive effect on establishing a prosperous Borough (SA Objective 19), securing economic inclusion (SA Objective 21) and developing and maintaining a healthy labour market (SA Objective 22). This reflects both the potential for this option to improve the vitality and economic prospects of the Borough’s main centres including Ashton town centre and for it to make accessible employment opportunities to economically deprived communities. In addition, this option is expected to maximise the provision of high quality employment land within the Borough, both through the redevelopment of brownfield sites and release of strategic greenfield/Green Belt land, thereby supporting a higher level of economic growth (and job creation) compared to the other options. In maximising the availability of employment land within the Borough, this option is also considered to provide greater certainty (relative to the other strategic spatial options) that sites will be delivered to support growth businesses/sectors and economic diversification. Consequently, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on SA Objective 20.

The impact of this option on strategic infrastructure (SA Objective 23) is discussed under the prudent use of natural resources theme above.

4.4 Mitigation and Enhancement Measures

The assessment has identified a range of measures to help address potential negative effects and enhance positive effects arising from the implementation of the strategic spatial options. These are highlighted within the detailed assessment matrices contained at Appendix D and will be considered by the Council in refining the options and developing policies that will comprise the Core Strategy.

A number of these mitigation and enhancement measures cut-across all of the strategic spatial options and have been summarised in Box 5 below against the respective SA objective.

Box 5 Cross-cutting Mitigation and Enhancement Measures

1. Housing • Subject to viability considerations, consider adopting varying site size thresholds for affordable housing to meet local needs; • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek, where possible, to reduce the number of unfit and empty homes. 2. Health • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis health care provision, in liaison with local health care providers and by mapping provision against proposed development sites; • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development. 3. Community cohesion No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 4. Urban renaissance No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 5. Rural regeneration

• Consider how Core Strategy policies can promote rural regeneration. Options may include a specific rural areas policy which makes provision for affordable and market rural housing and employment. 6. Access to services • Maximise contributions from new developments towards open space provision; • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development; • Consider how policies within the Core Strategy can improve access for those with disabilities. 7. Crime • Ensure that design policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to design out crime. 8. Community decision-making No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 9. Education • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis educational need, in liaison with providers; • Maximise contributions from new development towards educational facilities. 10. Historic environment • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to conserve and, where possible, enhance cultural heritage assets including by promoting heritage-led development; • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should promote high standards of architectural and urban design. 11. Local environmental quality • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of energy efficient design including, where appropriate, renewable energy provision; • Maximise contributions from new development towards open space provision. 12. Biodiversity • Core Strategy policies should seek to avoid negative effects on Tameside’s biodiversity assets and identify opportunities for enhancing their quality where appropriate; • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets, closely linked with existing and new development; • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land. 13. Water quality • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of water efficiency; • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy require, where appropriate, new development to incorporate measures to maintain/improve water quality. Such measures may include, for example, sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS). 14. Landscape character and quality • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land. 15. Natural resources • Core Strategy policies relating to sustainable design should encourage the use of recycled and secondary materials in new development. 16. Climate change • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets to provide opportunities for flood storage; • Core Strategy policies should seek to promote as close to greenfield runoff rates as possible on brownfield development; • The Council should explore the potential for community renewable energy schemes and include a presumption in favour of renewable energy development. 17. Travel • Core Strategy policies should positively promote walking and cycling as part of new developments; • Ensure that sites identified for employment use within motorway corridors are accessible by transport modes other than private car. 18. Waste • The provision of recycling facilities within new developments should be a component of Core Strategy design and/or waste management policies; • The reuse of construction and demolition wastes on site should be promoted. 19. Prosperous Borough No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 20. Growth potential of business sectors

No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 21. Economic inclusion No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 22. Healthy labour market No cross-cutting mitigation measures identified. 23. Strategic infrastructure • Consider the potential of water freight transport in identifying locations for new development; • Encourage the preparation of green travel plans as part of new development proposals; • Consider how policies contained within the Core Strategy can encourage home working (e.g. through the provision of high speed broadband).

5. Conclusions and Next Steps

5.1 Introduction

This section highlights the key findings from the appraisal of the strategic spatial options. In addition, suggestions are included as to how the effects of the policies included in the Core Strategy could be monitored to ensure that they are performing as intended against the SA objectives. Finally, details are included on the next steps in the development of the Core Strategy and the SA thereof.

5.2 Key Findings of the Appraisal

Broadly, all of the strategic spatial options perform well against the majority of the SA objectives and in this respect, no significant negative effects have been attributed to any of the options. However, the performance of each option against specific objectives does vary.

Strategic Spatial Option 1, which seeks to concentrate growth within the urban core including the strategic regeneration areas of Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley, is expected to generate a number of positive, and some significant positive, effects on those objectives that relate to social topics (SA objectives 1 to 9). This primarily reflects the fact that focusing new development in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley alongside growth in the wider urban core is expected to help focus development in some of the most deprived areas of the Borough. Effects on environmental objectives (i.e. SA objectives 10 to 14) have been assessed as being largely mixed (positive and negative). However, the option is expected to have a significant positive effect on landscape character and quality (SA Objective 14) given the reuse of urban, previously developed land and minimal greenfield development supported by this option which may also generate a positive effect in relation to natural resource use and climate change (SA objectives 15 and 16). Development within the urban core will help maintain and enhance accessibility for existing and prospective residents, reduce car use and may stimulate investment in public transport infrastructure which has been assessed as having a significant positive effect in relation to travel and transport (SA Objective 17). In terms of economic effects, this option is expected to stimulate investment and job growth in the Borough’s main centres and create jobs accessible to some of the most deprived areas of Tameside.

The type and range of effects identified under Strategic Spatial Option 2, which adopts a more dispersed approach to development, are expected to be largely similar as those identified under Strategic Spatial Option 1. However, whilst this option may distribute investment in housing, jobs, facilities and services more evenly across the Borough, there is less certainty that development will benefit those areas of greatest need. Consequently, the performance of this option against the SA objectives relating to urban renaissance and access to services has been assessed as being reduced relative to Strategic Spatial Option 1. With respect to effects on environmental objectives, this option is not expected to perform as well as Strategic Spatial Option 1 in view of the potential for the limited release of greenfield land which may also partially offset positive effects in relation to resource use and climate change. A more dispersed approach to residential development may increase car use in some areas of the Borough and, consequently, the long term positive effects of this option on travel and transport are not expected to be as significant as those associated with Strategic Spatial Option 1. The adoption of a town centre first approach

to retail and office uses should improve the vitality and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres and may help to address economic deprivation although this option is not expected to fully realise the potential of Ashton under-Lyne. In making provision for the release of greenfield sites, this option will enable a greater range of employment sites to come forward during the plan period, helping to stimulate the Borough’s economy although in view of the scale of release envisaged under this option, this effect is not expected to be significant.

Strategic Spatial Option 3, which builds on Strategic Spatial Option 2 and makes provision for targeted expansion at broad strategic locations, has been assessed as offering the greatest potential to deliver housing and economic development in the Borough. This predominantly reflects the focus placed on Ashton town centre for growth and also the provision for release of strategic greenfield/Green Belt sites which will maximise the supply of housing and employment land in the Borough. However, the development of greenfield land is expected to hinder the performance of this option on those SA objectives relating to the Borough’s environment relative to the other options and particularly with respect to biodiversity and landscape character and quality as well as resource use.

5.3 Monitoring

It is a requirement of the SEA Directive to establish how the significant sustainability effects of implementing the Core Strategy will be monitored. However, as ODPM Guidance (ODPM, 2005) notes “it is not necessary to monitor everything, or monitor an effect indefinitely. Instead monitoring needs to be focused on significant sustainability effects”.

Monitoring the Core Strategy for sustainability effects can help to answer questions such as:

• Were the SA’s predictions of sustainability effects accurate?

• Is the Core Strategy contributing to the achievement of desired SA objectives?

• Are mitigation measures performing as well as expected?

• Are there any adverse effects? Are these within acceptable limits, or is remedial action desirable?

Monitoring should be focussed on:

• Significant sustainability effects that may give rise to irreversible damage, with a view to identifying trends before such damage is caused;

• Significant effects where there was uncertainty in the SA and where monitoring would enable preventative or mitigation measures to be undertaken; and

• Where there is the potential for effects to occur on sensitive environmental receptors.

The table in Appendix E identifies a number of possible indicators that could be used for monitoring the sustainability impacts of the Core Strategy. The list contains a number of indicators which are already in common use (e.g. through the AMR prepared by the Council). This list will change as an understanding of the key sustainability impacts becomes clearer during the latter stages of the SA. In addition, the selection of a final set of

indicators and development of a monitoring framework will require additional research into issues such as the future availability of data and what information is or could be collected.

5.4 The Next Steps

This SA of the Issues and Options Report will be consulted on for 6 weeks from 13th February until 23rd March 2012. The consultation responses will be used to help refine the strategic spatial options further and, together with the findings of this report, will also inform the preparation of the Publication Core Strategy which will also be subject to SA

Appendix A Quality Assurance

Quality Assurance Checklist

Objectives and Context The role of the Core Strategy and Issues and Options Report is • The plan’s purpose and objectives are made clear. detailed in Section 1.2. Sustainability issues are identified in Section 2 including Box 4. • Sustainability issues, including international and EC objectives, are EC objectives are identified within the review of plans and considered in developing objectives and targets. programmes contained at Appendix B. • SEA objectives are clearly set out and linked to indicators and targets Objectives are identified in Table 3.1. Indictors are identified at where appropriate. Appendix D.

• Links with other related plans, programmes and policies are identified Plans and programmes are identified and included in Appendix and explained. B.

Scoping

The environmental bodies were consulted on the Scoping • The environmental consultation bodies are consulted in appropriate ways Report in 2006. The Scoping Report was subsequently revised and at appropriate times on the content and scope of the Environmental in 2009 and subject to further consultation. This report will also Report. be subject to consultation alongside the Issues and Options Report. Key sustainability issues have been identified in Section 2 • The assessment focuses on significant issues. including Box 4 which have assisted in focussing on the significant issues in the assessment. These are made clear throughout the Report where • Technical, procedural and other difficulties encountered are discussed; appropriate. Section 3.5 highlights specific difficulties assumptions and uncertainties are made explicit. encountered in completing the assessment.

• Reasons are given for eliminating issues from further consideration. These are made clear throughout the Report.

Baseline Information

• Relevant aspects of the current state of the environment and their likely Section 2.3 and Appendix C describe the current baseline evolution without the plan are described. conditions and, where available, trends have been identified.

• Characteristics of areas likely to be significantly affected are described, Section 2.3 describes current baseline conditions for Tameside including areas wider than the physical boundary of the plan area where and also identifies areas of the Borough that could be affected it is likely to be affected by the plan where practicable. by the implementation of the Core Strategy.

Section 2.3.2 and Appendix C identify issues in the collation of • Difficulties such as deficiencies in information or methods are explained. data including data gaps.

Prediction and evaluation of likely significant effects

Section 4 presents the assessment of the sustainability • Likely significant social, environmental and economic effects are performance of the strategic objectives and strategic spatial identified, including those listed in the SEA Directive (biodiversity, options. Detailed assessment matrices covering the strategic population, human health, fauna, flora, soil, water, air, climate factors, spatial options are also provided at Appendix D which been material assets, cultural heritage and landscape), as relevant. developed to meet the requirements of the SEA Directive.

Positive and negative effects are considered within the • Both positive and negative effects are considered, and where practicable, assessment matrices at Appendix D and within Section 4. the duration of effects (short, medium or long-term) is addressed. Potential impacts are identified in the short, medium and long- term.

Likely secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects are • Likely secondary, cumulative and synergistic effects are identified where identified in the assessment commentary contained within the practicable. assessment matrices at Appendix D and in Section 4, where appropriate.

Quality Assurance Checklist

Inter-relationships between effects are identified in the • Inter-relationships between effects are considered where practicable. assessment commentary and Section 4, where appropriate (including in the compatibility matrix within Table 4.1).

These are identified in the commentary contained within the • Where relevant, the prediction and evaluation of effects makes use of assessment matrices at Appendix D and Section 4, where accepted standards, regulations, and thresholds. appropriate.

• Methods used to evaluate the effects are described. These are described in Section 3.

Mitigation measures

These are identified within the assessment matrices contained • Measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and offset any significant at Appendix D. Cross-cutting measures are also summarised adverse effects of implementing the plan are indicated. in Box 5 (Section 4).

These are identified in the commentary contained within the • Issues to be taken into account in development consents are identified. assessment matrices at Appendix D and Section 4.

The SA Report

• Is clear and concise in its layout and presentation. The SA Report is clear and concise.

• Uses simple, clear language and avoids or explains technical terms. Maps and tables have been used to present the strategic Uses maps and other illustrations where appropriate. spatial options and baseline information within Section 2.

• Explains the methodology used. Explains who was consulted and what Section 3 presents the methodology used for assessment methods of consultation were used. whilst consultation arrangements are discussed in Section 1.

• Identifies sources of information, including expert judgement and matters Information is referenced throughout the report. of opinion.

• Contains a non-technical summary Included.

Consultation

This report is being consulted upon at the same time as the • The SEA is consulted on as an integral part of the plan-making process. Issues and Options Report.

• The consultation bodies, other consultees and the public are consulted in ways which give them an early and effective opportunity within This report is being consulted upon at the same time as the appropriate time frames to express their opinions on the draft plan and Issues and Options Report. SA Report.

Decision -making and information on the decision

• The SA Report and the opinions of those consulted are taken into Responses received to the SA Report will inform the account in finalising and adopting the plan. preparation of the Publication Core Strategy.

• An explanation is given of how they have been taken into account. This information will be provided in subsequent SA Reports.

This information will be provided as the Core Strategy is • Reasons are given for choices in the adopted plan, in the light of other developed. However, this report does consider alternatives reasonable options considered. presented as strategic spatial option

Appendix B Synergies with Other Plans and Programmes

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

International Commitments and Directives

The World Summit on Sustainable Development (WSSD), Johannesburg, September 2002 - Commitments arising from Johannesburg Summit (2002)

• Sustainable consumption and production patterns. No targets or indicators, however actions include: The Core Strategy can encourage greater efficiency of resources, encourage renewable energy and protect and enhance biodiversity. • Accelerate the shift towards sustainable consumption and • Greater resource efficiency; production - 10-year framework of programmes of action; The SA Framework and the Core Strategy should cover the action areas. • Support business innovation and take-up of best practice in Reverse trend in loss of natural resources. technology and management; • Renewable Energy and Energy efficiency. • Waste reduction and producer responsibility; and Urgently and substantially increase [global] share of • • Sustainable consumer consumption and procurement. renewable energy. Create a level playing field for renewable energy and energy • Significantly reduce rate of biodiversity loss by 2010. efficiency: • New technology development; • Push on energy efficiency; • Low-carbon programmes; • Reduced impacts on biodiversity.

Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (1997)

The Kyoto Protocol sets out to achieve stabilisation of greenhouse UK to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by 12.5% on 1990 The Core Strategy should reflect the importance of climate change. gas concentrations in the atmosphere at safe levels. Its other key levels by 2008-12. UK to reduce carbon dioxide levels by 20% Support for mitigation measures such as renewable energy should be objectives include the enhancement of energy efficiency, below 1990 levels by 2010. included; promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture. All SA Objectives should address the issue of Climate Change either explicitly or implicitly.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Bern Convention on the Conservation of European Wildlife and Natural Habitats (1979)

The aims of the convention are to conserve wild flora and fauna The key objectives are to: The objective of conserving the Borough’s natural habitats and wildlife and their natural habitats especially those species and habitats should be clearly reflected within the Core Strategy and in informing any • Conserve wild flora and fauna; whose conservation requires the co-operation of different states. strategic site allocation choices. • Give particular attention to endangered and vulnerable The SA Framework should ensure that biodiversity in terms of habitats and species; species are covered. • Promotion of national policies for the conservation of wild flora, wild fauna and natural habitats; • Promotion of education and disseminate information on the need to conserve species of wild flora and fauna and their habitats.

UNESCO World Heritage Convention 1972

The World Heritage Convention was adopted by the United Parties to the Convention agree to identify, protect, conserve, There are no World Heritage Sites within Tameside. Nevertheless the Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation and present World Heritage properties. States recognise that the Core Strategy should contain policies to promote the protection of buildings (UNESCO) General Conference at its 17th session in Paris on 16 identification and safeguarding of heritage located in their and features of archaeological interest. November 1972. The Convention came into force in 1975. territory is primarily their responsibility. They agree to do all they can with their own resources to protect their World Heritage The World Heritage Convention aims to promote cooperation properties. among nations to protect heritage around the world that is of such outstanding universal value that its conservation is important for current and future generations. They agree, amongst other things, as far as possible to: It is intended that, unlike the seven wonders of the ancient world, properties on the World Heritage List will be conserved for all time. 'adopt a general policy that aims to give the cultural and natural heritage a function in the life of the community and to integrate

the protection of that heritage into comprehensive planning programs'

undertake 'appropriate legal, scientific, technical, administrative and financial measures necessary for the identification, protection, conservation, presentation and rehabilitation of this heritage'

refrain from 'any deliberate measures which might damage, directly or indirectly, the cultural and natural heritage' of other

European Landscape Convention 2000 (became binding March 2007)

Convention outlined the need to recognise landscape in law, to Specific measures include: SA objectives must consider the outcomes of the convention should feed develop landscape policies dedicated to the protection, • raising awareness of the value of landscapes among all into the Core Strategy. management and creation of landscapes, and to establish sectors of society, and of society's role in shaping them; procedures for the participation of the general public and other stakeholders in the creation and implementation of landscape • promoting landscape training and education among policies. It also encourages the integration of landscape into all landscape specialists, other related professions, and in relevant areas of policy, including cultural, economic and social school and university courses; policies. • the identification and assessment of landscapes, and analysis of landscape change, with the active participation of stakeholders; • setting objectives for landscape quality, with the involvement of the public; and • the implementation of landscape policies, through the establishment of plans and practical programmes.

European Spatial Development Perspective – May 2009

The aim of the spatial development policies is to work towards a The European Spatial Development Perspective includes a SA objectives must consider the policies contained within the perspective balanced and sustainable development of the territory of the number of high level policy options for themes such as: and these should feed into the Core Strategy. European Union. The fundamental goals are to: • Urban and rural partnership; • secure social and economic cohesion; • conservation and management of natural resources and the • Efficient and sustainable use of infrastructure; cultural heritage; • Management of natural and cultural heritage; • more balanced competitiveness of the European Territory. • Water resource management; and • Creative management of cultural landscapes.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

World Commission on Environment and Development (1987) Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report)

The Brundtland Report is concerned with the world's economy and The report issued a multitude of recommendations with the aim The Brundtland Report provided the original definition of sustainable its environment. The objective is to provide an expanding and of attaining sustainable development and addressing the development. The accumulated affect of the SA objectives seek to achieve sustainable economy while protecting a sustainable environment. problems posed by a global economy that is intertwined with the sustainable development. The Report was an call by the United Nations: environment. • to propose long-term environmental strategies for achieving sustainable development by the year 2000 and beyond; • to recommend ways concern for the environment may be translated into greater co-operation among countries of the global South and between countries at different stages of economical and social development and lead to the achievement of common and mutually supportive objectives that take account of the interrelationships between people, resources, environment, and development; • to consider ways and means by which the international community can deal more effectively with environment concerns; and • to help define shared perceptions of long-term environmental issues and the appropriate efforts needed to deal successfully with the problems of protecting and enhancing the environment, a long term agenda for action during the coming decades, and aspirational goals for the world community.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

European Union Sustainable Development Strategy (May 2001)

The Strategy outlines that sustainable development offers the • No targets or indicators identified. • The need for economic and social cohesion should be reflected within European Union a positive long-term vision of a society that is the Core Strategy Objectives; more prosperous and more just, and which promises a cleaner, • The SA should include objectives of the need to protect, conserve and safer, healthier environment. enhance the natural and built environment.

EU Air Quality Directive (2008/50/EC) and previous directives (96/62/EC; 99/30/EC; 2000/69/EC & 2002/3/EC)

New Directive provided that most of existing legislation be merged • No targets or indicators; Core Strategy policies should consider the maintenance of good air quality into a single directive (except for the fourth daughter directive) with • Includes thresholds for pollutants. and the measures that can be taken to improve it through, for example, an no change to existing air quality objectives. encouragement to reduce vehicle movements. Relevant objectives include: SA Framework should include an objective to improve air quality. • Maintain ambient air quality where it is good and improve it in other cases; and

• Maintain ambient-air quality where it is good and improve it in other cases with respect to sulphur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxides of nitrogen, particulate matter and lead.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

EU Water Framework Directive (2000/60/EC)

Establishes a framework for the protection of inland surface • The achievement of “good status” for chemical and The Core Strategy policies should consider how the water environment can waters, transitional waters, coastal waters and groundwater which: biological river quality. Production of River Basin be protected and enhanced. This will come about through reducing Management Plans. pollution and abstraction. • Prevents further deterioration and protects and enhances the status of aquatic ecosystems and, with regard to their water SA objective needs to consider effects upon water quality and resource. needs, terrestrial ecosystems and wetlands directly depending on the aquatic ecosystems; • Promotes sustainable water use based on a long-term protection of available water resources; • Aims at enhanced protection and improvement of the aquatic environment, inter alia, through specific measures for the progressive reduction of discharges, emissions and losses of priority substances and the cessation or phasing-out of discharges, emissions and losses of the priority hazardous substances; • Ensures the progressive reduction of pollution of groundwater and prevents its further pollution, and • Contributes to mitigating the effects of floods and droughts.

EU Nitrates Directive (91/676/EEC)

This Directive has the objective of: • Provides for the identification of vulnerable areas. The Core Strategy should consider impacts of development upon any • reducing water pollution caused or induced by nitrates from identified nitrate sensitive areas where such development falls to be agricultural sources; and considered within its scope. • preventing further such pollution. Policies should consider objective to promote environmentally sensitive agricultural practices. Bathing Water Quality Directive (Council Directive 76/160/EEC)

Sets standards for bathing waters quality. • Standards are legally binding. The Core Strategy should recognise that development can impact upon water quality and include policies to protect the resources. SA Framework needs to cover water quality.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Drinking Water Directive (98/83/EC)

Provides for the quality of drinking water. • Standards are legally binding. The Core Strategy should recognise that development can impact upon water quality and include policies to protect the resources. SA Framework needs to cover water quality. EU Directive on the Conservation of Wild Birds (79/409/EEC)

Identifies 181 endangered species and sub-species for which the Target Actions include: The Core Strategy should include policies to protect and enhance wild bird Member States are required to designate Special Protection Areas. populations, including the protection of SPAs. • Creation of protected areas; SA objective should be included to protect and enhance biodiversity Makes it a legal requirement that EU countries make provision for • Upkeep and management; and the protection of birds. This includes the selection and designation including wild birds. • Re-establishment of destroyed biotopes. of Special Protection Areas.

EU Directive on the Conservation of Natural Habitats and of Wild Fauna and Flora (92/43/EEC) & Subsequent Amendments

Directive seeks to conserve natural habitats. Conservation of There are no formal targets or indicators. The Core Strategy should seek to protect landscape features of habitat natural habitats Requires member states to identify special areas importance. of conservation and to maintain, where necessary landscape The SA Framework needs to include an objective(s) for the protection of features of importance to wildlife and flora. landscape features for ecological benefit. The amendments in 2007: • simplify the species protection regime to better reflect the Habitats Directive; • provide a clear legal basis for surveillance and monitoring of European protected species (EPS); • toughen the regime on trading EPS that are not native to the UK; • ensure that the requirement to carry out appropriate assessments on water abstraction consents and land use plans is explicit.

EU Framework Waste Directive (Directive 75/442/EEC, as amended)

Seeks to prevent and to reduce the production of waste and its Promotes the development of clean technology to process waste, Core Strategy policies should seek to minimise waste, and the impacts. Where necessary waste should be disposed of without promoting recycling and re-use. environmental effects caused by it. Policies should promote recycling and creating environmental problems re-use. SA Objective required to identified the need to minimise waste, increased

EU Directive on the landfill of waste (99/31/EC)

Sets out requirements to ensuring that where landfilling takes place By 2006 biodegradable municipal waste going to landfills must be The Core Strategy should consider landfilling with respect to environmental the environmental impacts are understood and mitigated against. reduced to 75% of the total amount (by weight) of biodegradable factors. municipal waste produced in 1995 or the latest year before 1995 SA Objective required to identified the need to minimise waste, increased for which standardised Eurostat data is available. recycling and re-use.

EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Directive (94/62/EC)

This Directive aims to harmonize national measures concerning No later than five years from the date by which this Directive Again, while this directive dictates national legislation, the Core Strategy the management of packaging and packaging waste in order, on must be implemented in national law (1996), between 50 % as a itself can play an important role in controlling or providing a basis for better the one hand, to prevent any impact thereof on the environment of minimum and 65 % as a maximum by weight of the packaging waste management. all Member States as well as of third countries or to reduce such waste will be recovered. These targets are incorporated in national legislation - so the Core Strategy impact, thus providing a high level of environmental protection, Within this general target, and with the same time limit, between must adhere to them as appropriate. and, on the other hand, to ensure the functioning of the internal 25 % as a minimum and 45 % as a maximum by weight of the market and to avoid obstacles to trade and distortion and totality of packaging materials contained in packaging waste will restriction of competition within the Community. be recycled with a minimum of 15 % by weight for each To this end this Directive lays down measures aimed, as a first packaging material. priority, at preventing the production of packaging waste and, as additional fundamental principles, at reusing packaging, at recycling and other forms of recovering packaging waste and, hence, at reducing the final disposal of such waste.

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Renewed EU Sustainable Development Strategy (2006)

In June 2001, the first European sustainable development strategy The overall objectives in the Strategy are to: The Core Strategy should aim to create a pattern of development was agreed by EU Heads of State. The Strategy sets out how the consistent with the objectives of the Strategy and in turn promote • Safeguard the earth's capacity to support life in all its EU can meet the needs of present generations without sustainable development. diversity, respect the limits of the planet's natural resources compromising the ability of future generations to meet their needs. and ensure a high level of protection and improvement of The Strategy proposes headline objectives and lists seven key the quality of the environment. Prevent and reduce challenges: environmental pollution and promote sustainable • Climate change and clean energy; consumption and production to break the link between • Sustainable transport; economic growth and environmental degradation; • Sustainable consumption and production; • Promote a democratic, socially inclusive, cohesive, healthy, safe and just society with respect for fundamental rights and • Conservation and management of natural resources; cultural diversity that creates equal opportunities and • Public health; combats discrimination in all its forms; • Social inclusion, demography and migration; and • Promote a prosperous, innovative, knowledge-rich, • Global poverty. competitive and eco-efficient economy which provides high living standards and full and high-quality employment throughout the European Union and • Encourage the establishment and defend the stability of democratic institutions across the world, based on peace, security and freedom. Actively promote sustainable development worldwide and ensure that the European Union’s internal and external policies are consistent with global sustainable development and its international commitments.

EU Biodiversity Strategy (1998)

The Strategy aims to anticipate, prevent and attack the causes of The Strategy contains many objectives, e.g. The Core Strategy should seek to protect and enhance biodiversity. This significant reduction or loss of biodiversity at the source. This will • To fully implement the Habitats Directive, as well as the should be highlighted within the SA Framework. help both to reverse present trends in biodiversity decline and to Birds Directive; place species and ecosystems, including agro-ecosystems, at a • To protect wetlands within the Community and restore the satisfactory conservation status, both within and beyond the ecological character of degraded wetlands; territory of the EU. • To encourage the ecological function of rural areas; There are 4 major themes: • To promote sustainable development based on an • Conservation and sustainable use of biological diversity; integrated spatial planning approach. • Sharing of benefits arising out of the utilisation of genetic The EU is currently developing biodiversity indicators for resources; assessing progress towards reaching 2010 biodiversity targets.

B10

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) • Research, identification, monitoring and exchange of information; • Education, training and awareness. EU Directive 2002/91/EC (2002) Directive 2002/91/EC on the Energy Performance of Buildings

The European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive It aims to reduce the energy consumption of buildings by The Directive will help manage energy demand and thus reduce was published in the Official Journal on the 4th January 2003. The improving efficiency across the EU through the application of consumption. As a result it should help reduce greenhouse gas emissions, overall objective of the Directive is to 'promote the improvement of minimum requirements and energy use certification. and ensure future energy security. It will need to be assessed under the energy performance of buildings within the Community taking into SA Framework. account outdoor climatic and local conditions, as well as indoor climate requirements and cost-effectiveness.' The Directive highlights how the residential and tertiary sectors, the majority of which are based in buildings, accounts for 40% of EU energy consumption.

Relevant National Policy Documents

Draft National Planning Policy Framework (July, 2011)

This document, once approved, will replace the existing series of The draft Framework does not provide specific quantifiable The Core Strategy will need to be in conformity with the National Planning 30 Planning Policy Statments, Planning Policy Guidance and targets per se although expectations are set out in the objectives Policy Framework once approved. The SA Framework should seek to Minerals Policy Guidance and 15 letters to chief planning officers. opposite (e.g. increase housing supply). reflect the objectives of the National Planning Policy Framework as it is The draft Framework sets out a number of core land-use planning progressed. principles that should underpin plan-making. These are as follows:

• planning should be genuinely plan-led, with succinct Local Plans setting out a positive long-term vision for an area. These plans should be kept up to date and should provide a practical framework within which decisions on planning applications can be made with a high degree of certainty and efficiency; • planning should proactively drive and support the development that this country needs. Every effort should be made to identify and meet the housing, business, and other development needs of an area, and respond positively to wider opportunities for growth. Decision-takers at every level should assume that the default answer to development proposals is “yes”, except where this would compromise the key sustainable development principles set out in this

B11

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) Framework; • planning policies and decisions should take into account local circumstances and market signals such as land prices, commercial rents and housing affordability. Plans should set out a clear strategy for allocating sufficient land which is suitable for development in their area, taking account of the needs of the residential and business community; • in considering the future use of land, planning policies and decisions should take account of its environmental quality or potential quality regardless of its previous or existing use; • planning policies and decisions should seek to protect and enhance environmental and heritage assets in a manner appropriate to their significance, and reduce pollution. Where practical and consistent with other objectives, allocations of land for development should prefer land of lesser environmental value; • planning policies and decisions should make effective use of land, promote mixed use developments that create more vibrant places, and encourage multiple benefits from the use of land in urban and rural areas, recognising that some open land can perform many functions (such as for wildlife, recreation, flood risk mitigation, carbon storage, or food production). Building on the principles outlined above, the draft Framework sets out a number of topic-based objectives. These objectives are reproduced below: Business and economic development • plan proactively to meet the development needs of business and support an economy fit for the 21st century; • promote the vitality and viability of town centres, and meet the needs of consumers for high quality and accessible retail services; and • raise the quality of life and the environment in rural areas by promoting thriving, inclusive and locally distinctive rural economies. Transport • facilitate economic growth by taking a positive approach to planning for development; and • support reductions in greenhouse gas emissions and

B12

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) congestion, and promote accessibility through planning for the location and mix of development. Communications infrastructure • facilitate the growth of new and existing telecommunication systems in order to ensure that people have a choice of providers and services, and equitable access to the latest technology. Minerals • secure an adequate and steady supply of indigenous minerals needed to support sustainable growth, whilst encouraging the recycling of suitable materials to minimise the requirement for new primary extraction; and • facilitate sustainable use of energy minerals. Housing • increasing the supply of housing • delivering a wide choice of high quality homes that people want and need • widening opportunities for home ownership; and • creating sustainable, inclusive and mixed communities, including through the regeneration and renewal of areas of poor housing. Design • promote good design that ensures attractive, usable and durable places. Sustainable communities • create a built environment that facilitates social interaction and inclusive communities • deliver the right community facilities, schools, hospitals and services to meet local needs; and • ensure access to open spaces and recreational facilities that promote the health and well-being of the community. Green Belt • Green Belt serves five purposes: o to check the unrestricted sprawl of large built-up areas o to prevent neighbouring towns merging into one another o to assist in safeguarding the countryside from

B13

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) encroachment o to preserve the setting and special character of historic towns; and o to assist in urban regeneration, by encouraging the recycling of derelict and other urban land. Climate change, flooding and coastal change • secure, consistent with the Government’s published objectives, radical reductions in greenhouse gas emissions, through the appropriate location and layout of new development, and active support for energy efficiency improvements to existing buildings and the delivery of renewable and low-carbon energy infrastructure; • minimise vulnerability and provide resilience to impacts arising from climate change; • avoid inappropriate development in areas at risk of flooding by directing development away from areas at highest risk or where development is necessary, making it safe without increasing flood risk elsewhere; and • reduce risk from coastal change by avoiding inappropriate development in vulnerable areas or adding to the impacts of physical changes to the coast. Natural environment • protecting valued landscapes • minimising impacts on biodiversity and providing net gains in biodiversity, where possible; and • preventing both new and existing development from contributing to or being put at unacceptable risk from, or being adversely affected by unacceptable levels of land, air, water or noise pollution or land instability. Historic environment • conserve heritage assets in a manner appropriate to their significance; and • contribute to our knowledge and understanding of our past by capturing evidence from the historic environment and making this publicly available, particularly where a heritage asset is to be lost.

B14

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Securing the Future - the UK Sustainable Development Strategy (2005)

The Strategy has 5 guiding principles: The Strategy contains a new set of indicators to monitor progress Consider how the LDF can contribute to Sustainable Development Strategy • Living within environmental limits; towards sustainable development in the UK. Those most relevant Objectives. Consider using some of the indicators to monitor the effects of • Ensuring a strong, healthy and just society; at the district level include: the LDF and as basis for collecting information for the baseline review. • Achieving a sustainable economy; • Greenhouse gas emissions; Rewording of SA objectives to ensure all relevant sustainability objectives • Promoting good governance; • Road freight (CO2 emissions and tonne km, tonnes and are covered. • Using sound science responsibly; GDP); • and 4 strategic priorities: • Household waste (a) arisings (b) recycled or composted; • sustainable consumption and production; • Local environmental quality. • natural resource protection and environmental enhancement; • sustainable communities.

The Rural Development Programme for England

The Rural Development Programme is jointly funded by the EU, The award of grant funding (Environmental Stewardship The Core Strategy should seek to protect and enhance biodiversity and through the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development, Schemes) is based upon a points system aimed at landowners features of cultural heritage. This should be highlighted within the SA and the Government. This funding will help farmers to manage the implementing specific land management practices to improve the Framework. land more sustainably and deliver important outcomes on biodiversity value of agricultural land. Objectives may include biodiversity, landscape and access, water quality and climate hedgerow management, wild seed mixes, management of rush change. pastures, improving the resilience of BAP habitats to climate change, implementing measures to reserve the decline of farmland birds or securing the positive management of prioritised historic buildings.

B15

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Government/Department for Transport - 10 Year Transport Plan 2000 (2000)

The Plan seeks to tackle congestion and pollution by improving all Summary of targets/improvements set out in Plan - include: Core Strategy policies should recognise that an integrated transport types of transport - rail and road, public and private - in ways that network is necessary to promote sustainable economic and social Locally across England; and increase choice. The ten-year plan sees the following as key: • development. • 10% increase in bus passenger journeys; • Integrated transport: looking at transport as a whole, matching SA Objective which support sustainable transport alternatives and the • Extensive bus priority schemes, and improvements also solutions to specific problems by assessing all the options. modal shift away from the private car should be included. benefiting coaches; • Public and private partnership: government and the private • More cities and towns with park and ride schemes; sector working more closely together to boost investment. • Extension of Rural Bus Subsidy Grant to cover more journeys serving market towns; • Support for flexible transport in rural communities. • Modern and integrated transport information, booking and ticketing services; • Safer cycling and walking routes, more 20mph areas and Home Zones for safer roads, particularly around schools. Rail: • 50% increase in use, measured by passenger kilometres; • 80% increase in rail freight; • Improved commuter services in London and other cities; • Upgrading of freight routes to major ports; and • Better integration with cars, buses, taxis, bicycles and better links to airports. Roads: • 40% reduction in the number of people killed or seriously injured in road accidents; • Accelerated take-up of cleaner vehicles to reduce air pollution and CO2 emissions. Road Safety • To achieve a 50% reduction in children killed or seriously injured by 2010, compared to 1994 - 1998 average.

B16

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Sustainable Communities Plan: Building for the Future (2003)

• To ensure that all tenants have a decent home by 2010. No Targets or indicators. The Core Strategy and SA Framework should take into account the • To improve conditions for vulnerable people in private objectives of the Plan. accommodation. • To ensure all tenants, social and private, get an excellent service from their landlord. • To ensure all communities have a clean, safe and attractive environment in which people can take pride. • Bring back life to those cities where there is low demand for housing, and where homes have been abandoned. • Ensure that in tackling housing shortages the countryside is protected and enhanced rather than creating urban sprawl. • Address housing needs of rural communities who are often the guardians of the countryside.

“Working with the grain of nature - A Biodiversity Strategy for England” (Defra, 2002)

The vision is for ‘a country – its landscapes and water bodies, Agreement targets have been set to bring 95% of SSSIs into The Core Strategy should support the vision, emphasising biodiversity. coasts and seas, towns and cities – where wild species and favourable condition by 2010 and to reverse the decline in Include sustainability objectives and criteria that address the headline habitats are part of healthy functioning ecosystems; where we farmland birds. indicators and consider targets that require 95% of SSSIs to be of a nurture, treasure and enhance our biodiversity, and where Headline Indicators include: favourable condition. biodiversity is a natural consideration of policies and decisions, and in society as a whole.’ • The population of wild birds; • The condition of Sites of Special Scientific Interest; • Progress with Biodiversity Action Plans; • Area of land under agri-environment agreement; • Biological quality of rivers; • Fish stocks around the UK fished within safe limits; • Progress with Local Biodiversity Action Plans; and • Public attitudes to biodiversity.

B17

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Rural Strategy (Defra, 2004)

The Government’s three priorities for rural policy are: No targets or indicators. Core Strategy policies should seek to support the overarching themes 1. Economic and Social Regeneration – supporting enterprise contained within the Rural Strategy. In particular promoting economic across rural England, but targeting greater resources at areas of development in rural areas and tacking social exclusion, including the greatest need: promotion of good access to services and facilities. • Building on the economic success of the majority of rural Policies to maintain and to enhance the quality of the countryside should areas; also be considered. • Tackling the structural economic weaknesses and The SA framework should consider policies that encompass the accompanying poor social conditions. overarching actions of the strategy, in particular the promoting access to 2. Social Justice for All – tackling rural social exclusion wherever it services and facilities, protecting the countryside and promoting occurs and providing fair access to services and opportunities for appropriate economic development. all rural people: • Social priorities are to ensure fair access to public services and affordable; • In both more and less prosperous areas, to tackle social exclusion wherever it occurs. 3. Enhancing the Value of our Countryside – protecting the natural environment for this and future generations.

Energy White Paper - Our Energy Future, Creating a Low Carbon Economy (2003)

The White Paper identifies four goals: Reduction in carbon dioxide emissions of some 60% from current Core Strategy should included policies to encourage the reduction in levels by about 2050 with real progress by 2020. carbon dioxide emissions whilst promoting sustainable economic growth. • to put ourselves on a path to cut the UK’s carbon dioxide emissions - the main contributor to global warming - by some SA Objectives need to identify the requirement for a reduction in 60% by about 2050, with real progress by 2020; greenhouse gas emissions. • to maintain the reliability of energy supplies; • to promote competitive markets in the UK and beyond, helping to raise the rate of sustainable economic growth and to improve our productivity; and • to ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated.

B18

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Energy White Paper - Meeting the Energy Challenge (2007)

Paper sets out the Government’s international and domestic Paper sets the following key targets: The Core Strategy should ensure that policies are in place to encourage Energy Strategy to respond to changing circumstances with the reduction in carbon dioxide emissions whilst promoting sustainable ⇒ To put ourselves on a path to cutting CO2 emissions by economic growth. respect to tackling climate change and ensuring secure, clean and some 60% by 2050 with real progress by 2020; affordable energy as we become increasingly dependent on SA Objectives need to identify the requirement for a reduction in imported fuel. ⇒ To maintain the reliability of energy supplies; greenhouse gas emissions. The paper addresses the long term energy challenges faced and ⇒ To promote competitive markets in the UK and beyond; and delivers four energy policy goals. ⇒ To ensure that every home is adequately and affordably heated.

Environment Agency (2009) ‘Water for people and the environment’ - Water Resources Strategy for England and Wales

Strategy sets out how water resources in England and Wales Target set for England, that the average amount of water used The Core Strategy should take on board objectives set within the Strategy. should be managed and provides a plan of how to use them in a per person in the home is reduced to 130 litres each day by These particularly apply to providing efficiency in terms of water use and sustainable way, now and in the future. The Strategy aims to: 2030. protecting water resources. • enable habitats and species to adapt better to climate change; • allow the way we protect the water environment to adjust flexibly to a changing climate; • reduce pressure on the environment caused by water taken for human use; • encourage options resilient to climate change to be chosen in the face of uncertainty; • better protect vital water supply infrastructure; • reduce greenhouse gas emissions from people using water, considering the whole life-cycle of use; and • improve understanding of the risks and uncertainties of climate change.

Making Space for Water: Taking Forward a New Government Strategy for Flood Protection and Coastal Erosion Risk Management in England (DEFRA, 2005)

The objectives of this strategy are to reduce the threat of flooding There are no formal targets or indicators. The Objectives are relevant to the Borough and should be taken on board to people and their property. Also to deliver the greatest by the Core Strategy. The Plan’s priorities will be incorporated into SA environmental, social and economic benefit, consistent with the Framework. Government’s sustainable development principles.

B19

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

HM Government (2004) Housing Act

The Act requires the energy efficiency of a building to be Energy efficiency must be at least 20% greater in properties by The Act requires greater energy efficiency in residential buildings. As a established and available as part of the Home Information Pack, 2010 than compared with 2000. result the Core Strategy should promote and encourage the achievement of part of the implementation of EU Directive 2002/91/EC. high levels of energy efficiency meet and exceed minimum requirements. This is assessed under SA Objective relating to climate change and energy use.

HM Government (2003) Sustainable Energy

The Act aims to promote sustainable energy development and use Specific targets are set by the Secretary of State as energy The Act requires the encouragement and reporting on the UK’s attempts to and report on progress regarding cutting the UK’s carbon efficiency aims. increase energy efficiency and renewable energy use. The Core Strategy emissions and reducing the number of people living in fuel poverty. should therefore promote the utilisation of renewable energy sources and increase energy efficiency in buildings. This is assessed under the SA Objective relating to climate change and energy use.

B20

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Defra (2007) Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland

The Strategy: The Air Quality Strategy sets out objectives for a range of The Core Strategy should take account of the Air Quality Strategy where pollutants that have not been reproduced here due to space there are likely to be issues relating to air quality. Air quality needs to be • sets out a way forward for work and planning on air quality constraints. included within the SA Framework. issues; • sets out the air quality standards and objectives to be achieved; • introduces a new policy framework for tackling fine particles; and • identifies potential new national policy measures which modelling indicates could give further health benefits and move closer towards meeting the Strategy’s objectives.

B21

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

DCMS (2002) Game plan: A strategy for delivering government's sport and physical activity objectives

The Plan comprises two overarching objectives: A number of targets and indicators identified: This plan will be relevant in the development of sport and cycle route type • A major increase in participation in sport; and facilities and should be considered in the early stage of development . The long term vision being “to increase significantly levels of • A sustained increase in success at international competition. sport and physical activity, particularly among disadvantaged In addition to this the document makes recommendations in 4 groups; and to achieve sustained levels of success in areas: international competition”. • Grassroots participation; • High performance sport; And the key targets being: • Mega sporting events; and • To encourage a mass participation culture (with as much • Delivery. emphasis on physical activity as competitive sport). A benchmark for this could be Finland, which has very high quality and quantity of participation, particularly among older people. Our target is for 70% (currently ~30%) of the population to be reasonably active (for example 30 minutes of moderate exercise five times a week) by 2020. • To enhance international success. A benchmark for this could be Australia, which has achieved disproportionate levels of international success. Our target is for British and English teams and individuals to sustain rankings within the top 5 countries, particularly in more popular sports. • To adopt a different approach to hosting mega sporting events. They should be seen as an occasional celebration of success rather than as a means to achieving other government objectives.

B22

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

DCLG (2006) Code for Sustainable Homes - A step-change in sustainable home building practice

Sets standards and method for establishing, and rating, the level of Targets such as percentage improvement over Target Emission The code details the need and benefits for sustainable buildings. It details sustainability of buildings by how far they exceed the requirements Rate of 2006 Building Regulations for Carbon emissions and a strategy to improve the sustainability of buildings. The Core Strategy of Building Regulations. levels of water consumption. The CSH also recommends a should be compatible with the Sustainable Construction SPD and should reduction of 50% for surface water run-off for brownfield sites. therefore build upon and compliment the code to encourage the adoption of The Code for Sustainable Homes has been introduced to drive a sustainable construction methods. step-change in sustainable home building practice. It is a standard for key elements of design and construction which affect the sustainability of a new home. It will become the single national standard for sustainable homes, used by home designers and builders as a guide to development, and by home- buyers to assist in their choice of home. The design categories included within the Code are:

energy/CO2; pollution; water ; health and well-being; materials; management; surface water run-off; ecology; waste.

Review of Heritage Protection: The Way Forward (2004)

The objectives of the review were to deliver: There are currently a number of short term packages which have Attention should be paid to the changing of legislation in line with the • a positive approach to managing the historic environment been immediately implemented and a number of longer term Review of Heritage Protection, and should feed back into the Core which would be transparent, inclusive, effective and packages which require legislative support. Strategy. This will need to be covered within the SA Framework. sustainable and central to social, environmental and economic agendas at a local and community as well as national level; and • an historic environment legislative framework that provided for the management and enabling of change rather than its prevention.

B23

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

DCMS (2007) Heritage Protection for the 21st Century - White Paper

The Consultation Paper has three core principles: No formal targets, but a number of measures/recommendations. White Paper’s principles should be taken into account with respect to SA ⇒ Developing a unified approach to the historic environment; Framework. ⇒ Maximising opportunities for inclusion and involvement; and ⇒ Supporting sustainable communities by putting the historic environment at the heart of an effective planning system.

The Planning Act 2008

Introduced a system for nationally significant infrastructure No key targets. The Core Strategy should take into account any relevant National Policy planning, alongside further reforms to the Town and Country Statements. The proposed National Policy Statements relate in particular to Planning system. A major component of this legislation is the energy provision, transport, water supply and waste treatment. There are introduction of an independent Infrastructure Planning Commission SA objectives addressing all of these aspects. (IPC), to take decisions on major infrastructure projects (transport, energy, water and waste). To support decision-making, the IPC will refer to the Government's National Policy Statements (NPSs), which will provide a clear long-term strategic direction for nationally significant infrastructure development.

The Climate Change Act 2008

This Act aims: • Greenhouse gas emission reductions through action in the UK Act sets out a clear precedent for the UK to lead in responding to the • to improve carbon management and help the transition towards and abroad of at least 80% by 2050, and reductions in CO2 threats climate change provides. The Core Strategy must ensure that a low carbon economy in the UK; and emissions of at least 26% by 2020, against a 1990 baseline. greenhouse gases are reduced or minimised and that energy use comes The 2020 target will be reviewed soon after Royal Assent to increasingly from renewable sources. • to demonstrate strong UK leadership internationally, signalling reflect the move to all greenhouse gases and the increase in that the UK is committed to taking its share of responsibility for the 2050 target to 80%. reducing global emissions in the context of developing negotiations on a post-2012 global agreement at Copenhagen • Further the Act provides for a carbon budgeting system which next year. caps emissions over five year periods, with three budgets set at a time, to set out our trajectory to 2050. The first three carbon budgets will run from 2008-12, 2013-17 and 2018-22, and must be set by 1 June 2009.

B24

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

The Historic Environment: A Force for our Future (DCMS, 2001)

The report sets the following objectives: No key targets. Core Strategy policies should ensure the historic environment is utilised as • public interest in the historic environment is matched by firm both a learning resource and an economic asset, whilst ensuring it is leadership, effective partnerships, and the development of a sustained for future generations. sound knowledge base from which to develop policies; • the full potential of the historic environment as a learning resource is realised; • the historic environment is accessible to everybody and is seen as something with which the whole of society can identify and engage; • the historic environment is protected and sustained for the benefit of our own and future generations; and • the historic environment’s importance as an economic asset is skilfully harnessed.

The Groundwater (England and Wales) Regulations 2009 (Defra, October 2009)

The Groundwater Regulations are designed to implement a No explicit targets or indicators. No implications for Core Strategy or SA which operate at a strategic level. daughter directive to the European Water Framework Directive. Developers and operators of individual sites will need to be aware of them and abide by regulations. It is designed to prevent or limit the inputs of polluting substances into groundwater. Substances controlled under these regulations fall into two categories: a) Hazardous substances, defined as those which are toxic, persistent or liable to bioaccumulate must be prevented from entering groundwater. Substances in this list may be disposed of to the ground, under a permit, but must not reach groundwater. They include pesticides, sheep dip, solvents, hydrocarbons, mercury, cadmium and cyanide. b) Non-hazardous pollutants are less dangerous, and can be discharged to groundwater under a permit, but must not cause pollution. Examples include sewage, trade effluent and most wastes. Non-hazardous pollutants include any substance capable of causing pollution and the list is much wider than the previous List 2 substances.

Environmental Permitting Regulations (England and Wales) 2010 (Defra & DECC, March 2010)

B25

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

These Regulations consolidates a range of previous permits No explicit targets or indicators. No implications for Core Strategy or SA which operate at a strategic level. required for processes which might cause pollution. It covers Developers and operators of individual sites will need to be aware of them water discharges, groundwater activities, radioactive substances, and abide by them. waste, mining and installations. It requires operators to obtain permits for some facilities, to register others as exempt and provides for ongoing supervision by regulators. The aim of the Regime is to: • protect the environment so that statutory and Government policy environmental targets and outcomes are achieved; • deliver permitting and compliance with permits and certain environmental targets effectively and efficiently in a way that provides increased clarity and minimises the administrative burden on both the regulator and the operators; • encourage regulators to promote best practice in the operation of facilities; • continue to fully implement European legislation. No implications for Core Strategy or SA which operate at a strategic level. Developers and operators of individual sites will need to be aware of them and abide by them.

Waste Strategy for England (Defra, March 2007)

The Strategy sets out the following aim: to reduce waste by making The Government’s key targets are to: The Core Strategy should seek to manage waste in accordance with the products with fewer natural resources. We must break the link Strategy. The SA Framework should include objectives which seek to • decouple waste growth (in all sectors) from economic between economic growth and waste growth. Most products manage waste in a sustainable manner (i.e. in accordance with the waste growth and put more emphasis on waste prevention and re- hierarchy). should be re-used or their materials recycled. Energy should be use; recovered from other wastes where possible. For a small amount of residual material, landfill will be necessary. • meet and exceed the Landfill Directive diversion targets for biodegradable municipal waste in 2010, 2013 and 2020; The main elements of the Strategy are to: • increase diversion from landfill of non-municipal waste and • incentivise efforts to reduce, re-use, recycle waste and secure better integration of treatment for municipal and non- recover energy from waste; municipal waste; • reform regulation to drive the reduction of waste and diversion • secure the investment in infrastructure needed to divert from landfill while reducing costs to compliant businesses and waste from landfill and for the management of hazardous the regulator; waste; and • target action on materials, products and sectors with the • get the most environmental benefit from that investment, greatest scope for improving environmental and economic through increased recycling of resources and recovery of

B26

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) outcomes; energy from residual waste using a mix of technologies. • stimulate investment in collection, recycling and recovery infrastructure, and markets for recovered materials that will maximise the value of materials and energy recovered; and • improve national, regional and local governance, with a clearer performance and institutional framework to deliver better coordinated action and services on the ground.

Green Infrastructure Guidance – Natural England (2009)

The Green Infrastructure guidance provides an overview of what None identified. The Core Strategy should include policies around GI with a view to the Green Infrastructure is, its policy support and the benefits to be protection and enhancement of existing green corridors, promoting delivered where GI is incorporated in the new development and the recreational routes and areas of open / recreational space within the public realm. GI is able to protect and enhance existing Borough. In addition, such policies could support biodiversity. environmental assets and create new areas. Within rural areas GI The SA Framework should include a specific objective/guide question can be viewed at a larger scale encompassing country parks and relating to Green Infrastructure. river corridors as well as supporting ecological networks.

Lifetime Homes, Lifetime Neighbourhoods – A National Strategy for Housing in an Ageing Society

The overarching strategy is to improve the supply and quality of None identified. The Core Strategy should seek to provide for lifetime housing. In addition it housing that is more responsive to the needs of individuals, should seek to facilitate the aim of ensuring that all new housing is built to communities, and the economy. It seeks planning at all levels – lifetime standards by 2013. local, regional and national – for homes and communities: The SA Framework should include an objective relative to ensuring the • So that people can live out their lives, as long as possible, delivering of housing for all. independently, safely and happily with their families and friends around them. • To ensure that there is the right range of choices of ‘specialist’ housing available for those who need more support. • To ensure that housing is seen as central to health and well-being and that services are planned and integrated to reflect that.

Localism Act 2011

The Act seeks to devolve greater powers to councils and None identified. The Core Strategy will need to take account of the provisions of the neighbourhoods and give local communities more control over Localism Act.

B27

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) housing and planning decisions. The key planning provisions of The SA Framework should include guide questions or objectives on the Act include: community involvement in the plan making process. • Abolition of Regional Strategies • Duty to cooperate • Neighbourhood planning • Community right to build • Requirement to consult communities before submitting certain planning applications • Strengthening enforcement rules • Reforming the Community Infrastructure Levy • Reforms to local plan preparation • Abolition of the Infrastructure Planning Commission

PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (ODPM, 2005)

Sets out the overarching planning policies on the delivery of No targets or indicators. Plan policies should promote sustainable development and encourage sustainable development through the planning system. The key economic development, diverse, secure communities that promote social policy messages are: inclusion, the prudent use of resources and environmental protection. The SA Framework should reflect the objectives set out in PPS1. • The need for planning authorities to take an approach based on integrating the four aims of sustainable development: economic development; social inclusion; environmental protection; and prudent use of resources; • The need for positive planning to achieve sustainable development objectives and proactive management of development, rather than simply regulation and control; • The need for plans to set clear visions for communities and help to integrate the wide range of activities relating to development and regeneration; and • The need for the planning system to be transparent, accessible and accountable, and to actively promote participation and involvement. • Focusing developments that attract a large number of people, especially retail development, in existing centres to promote their vitality and viability, social inclusion and more

B28

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) sustainable patterns of development. • Recognising the need to enhance as well as protect biodiversity, natural habitats, the historic environment and landscape, and townscape centre, and the need to address the causes and impacts of climate change, pollution and waste and resource management impacts. • Promoting the more efficient use of land through higher density, mixed use development and the use of suitable previously developed land and buildings. • Reducing the need to travel and encouraging public transport.

Planning Policy Statement: Planning and Climate Change - Supplement to Planning Policy Statement 1 (DCLG, 2007)

This Supplement sets out to deliver sustainable development and No targets or indicators. Core Strategy policies should ensure they prepare for the impacts of in doing so provide a full and appropriate response on climate climate change. This involves promoting energy efficiency and reducing change. It stipulates that planning authorities should prepare, and emissions, sustainable transport, protecting and enhancing biodiversity in manage the delivery of, spatial strategies that: terms of climate change’s impacts and encouraging businesses to mitigate • make a full contribution to delivering the Government’s and adapt to climate change. Climate Change Programme and energy policies, and in These policy requirements should be reflected in SA Objectives addressing doing so contribute to global sustainability; climate change. • in providing for the homes, jobs, services and infrastructure needed by communities, and in renewing and shaping the places where they live and work, secure the highest viable resource and energy efficiency and reduction in emissions; • deliver patterns of urban growth and sustainable rural developments that help secure the fullest possible use of sustainable transport for moving freight, public transport, cycling and walking; and, which overall, reduce the need to travel, especially by car; • secure new development and shape places that minimise vulnerability, and provide resilience, to climate change; and in ways that are consistent with social cohesion and inclusion; • conserve and enhance biodiversity, recognising that the distribution of habitats and species will be affected by climate change; • reflect the development needs and interests of communities

B29

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) and enable them to contribute effectively to tackling climate change; and • respond to the concerns of business and encourage competitiveness and technological innovation in mitigating and adapting to climate change.

PPG2: Green Belts (DCLG, 1995 - Amended 2005)

PPG2 sets out national planning policy on Green Belt. It states No targets or indicators. The Core Strategy should seek to maintain the Green Belt unless there are that the overarching aim of Green Belt policy is to preserve exceptional circumstances to justify an alteration. openness and identifies the following five purposes for including land within the Green Belt: The SA Framework should include objectives that seek to concentrate development within urban areas. • to check the unrestricted sprawl of large built-up areas; • to prevent neighbouring towns from merging into one another; • to assist in safeguarding the countryside from encroachment; • to preserve the setting and special character of historic towns; and • to assist in urban regeneration, by encouraging the recycling of derelict and other urban land. PPG2 states that Green Belt boundaries should be altered only in exceptional circumstances, after consideration has been given to opportunities for development within the urban areas contained by and beyond the Green Belt.

B30

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

PPS3: Housing (DCLG, 2011)

The PPS is underpinned by a number of housing policy objectives Based upon the findings of the Strategic Housing Market The Core Strategy should seek to deliver a sufficient supply and a mix of which provide the context for planning for housing through Assessment and other local evidence, Local Planning Authorities high quality and affordable housing to meet local needs and in suitable development plans and planning decisions. The specific outcomes should set out in Local Development Documents: locations. This objective should be reflected in the SA Framework. that the planning system should deliver are: • The likely overall proportions of households that require • High quality housing that is well-designed and built to a high market or affordable housing, for example, x% market standard; housing and y% affordable housing; • A mix of housing, both market and affordable, particularly in • The likely profile of household types requiring market terms of tenure and price, to support a wide variety of housing e.g. multi-person, including families and children households in all areas, both urban and rural; (x%), single persons (y%), couples (z%); • A sufficient quantity of housing taking into account need and • The size and type of affordable housing required. demand and seeking to improve choice; In addition, Local Planning Authorities should continue to make • Housing developments in suitable locations, which offer a effective use of land by re-using land that has been previously good range of community facilities and with good access to developed and ensure land is used efficiency by developing jobs, key services and infrastructure; housing density policies. • A flexible, responsive supply of land – managed in a way that makes efficient and effective use of land, including re-use of previously-developed land, where appropriate. Local Planning Authorities should encourage applicants to bring forward sustainable and environmentally friendly new housing developments, including affordable housing developments, and in doing so should reflect the approach set out in PPS on climate change, including on the Code for Sustainable Homes.

PPS4: Planning for Sustainable Economic Growth (DCLG, December 2009)

PPS4 sets out that local planning authorities should plan to No formal targets. The Core Strategy should include policies that support a sustainable encourage economic growth and states that the objectives for economy, sustainable land use/design, sustainable means of transport and planning are to: promote social inclusion. The objectives of this PPS should be reflected within the SA Framework. • build prosperous communities by improving the economic performance of cities, towns, regions, sub-regions and local areas, both urban and rural; • reduce the gap in economic growth rates between regions, promoting regeneration and tackling deprivation; • deliver more sustainable patterns of development, reduce the

B31

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) need to travel, especially by car and respond to climate change; • promote the vitality and viability of town and other centres as important places for communities; and • raise the quality of life and the environment in rural areas by promoting thriving, inclusive and locally distinctive rural communities whilst continuing to protect the open countryside for the benefit of all.

PPS5: Planning for the Historic Environment (DCLG, January 2010)

The Government’s objectives for planning for the historic No formal targets. The Core Strategy and objectives that comprise the SA Framework should environment are: seek to conserve and enhance the historic environment. • to deliver sustainable development by ensuring that policies and decisions concerning the historic environment: - recognise that heritage assets are a non-renewable resource; - take account of the wider social, cultural, economic and environmental benefits of heritage conservation; and - recognise that intelligently managed change may sometimes be necessary if heritage assets are to be maintained for the long term. • to conserve England’s heritage assets in a manner appropriate to their significance by ensuring that: - decisions are based on the nature, extent and level of that significance, investigated to a degree proportionate to the importance of the heritage asset; - wherever possible, heritage assets are put to an appropriate and viable use that is consistent with their conservation; - the positive contribution of such heritage assets to local character and sense of place is recognised and valued; and - consideration of the historic environment is integrated into planning policies, promoting place-shaping. • to contribute to our knowledge and understanding of our past

B32

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) by ensuring that opportunities are taken to capture evidence from the historic environment and to make this publicly available, particularly where a heritage asset is to be lost.

PPS6: Planning for Town Centres (ODPM 2005)

This PPS sets out policy on planning for the future of town centres. Lists a series of key indicators to measure the vitality and viability The Core Strategy should promote mixed-use development through a It states that, in order to deliver vital and viable town centres, and monitor the health of town centres and how this is changing sequential approach to selecting sites. development should be focused in existing centres in order to over time, e.g.: The SA Framework should include objectives relating to the vitality and strengthen and, where appropriate, regenerate them. Local • the amount of retail, leisure and office floorspace in edge-of- viability of town centres. planning authorities should: centre and out-of-centre locations; • actively promote growth and manage change in town centres; • proportion of vacant street level property; and • define a network and a hierarchy of centres each performing • state of the town centre environmental quality. their appropriate role to meet the needs of their catchments; and • adopt a proactive, plan-led approach to planning for town centres, through regional and local planning. Local authorities should use tools such as area action plans, compulsory purchase orders and, where considered appropriate, town centre strategies to address the transport, land assembly, crime prevention, planning and design issues associated with the growth and management of their centres. PPS7: Sustainable development in Rural Areas (ODPM, 2004)

This PPS seeks to improve the quality of life in rural areas through No targets or indicators The Core Strategy should contribute to sustainable development in rural support for sustainable communities, economic growth and areas, including the protection of existing services and facilities and development whilst protecting open countryside. encouragement for new. It promotes sustainable patterns of development focusing on The SA Framework should include objectives relating to rural regeneration. existing towns and villages and to promote sustainable, diverse and adaptable agricultural sectors.

B33

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (ODPM 2006)

PPS9 is underpinned by the following objectives: No targets or indicators The Core Strategy should seek to ensure that biodiversity and geology are conserved and enhanced. Policies should recognise that increased • to promote sustainable development by ensuring that biodiversity can contribute to urban regeneration and an improvement in biological and geological diversity are conserved and quality of life. enhanced as an integral part of social, environmental and economic development, so that policies and decisions about The SA Framework should Include sustainability objectives that aim to the development and use of land integrate biodiversity and conserve and enhance the biodiversity and geology of the area. geological diversity with other considerations. • to conserve, enhance and restore the diversity of England’s wildlife and geology by sustaining, and where possible improving, the quality and extent of natural habitat and ecological and geomorphological sites; the natural physical processes on which they depend; and the populations of naturally occurring species which they support. • to contribute to rural renewal and urban renaissance by: o enhancing biodiversity in green spaces and among developments so that they are used by wildlife and valued by people, recognising that healthy functional ecosystems can contribute to a better quality of life and to people’s sense of well-being; and o ensuring that developments take account of the role and value of biodiversity in supporting economic diversification and contributing to a high quality environment. It sets out the following key principles to ensure that the potential impacts of planning decisions on biodiversity and geological conservation are fully considered by local planning authorities: • Development plan policies and planning decisions should be based upon up-to-date information about the environmental characteristics of their areas. • Plan policies and planning decisions should aim to maintain, and enhance, restore or add to biodiversity and geological conservation interests. In taking decisions, local planning authorities should ensure that appropriate weight is attached to designated sites of international, national and local importance; protected species; and to biodiversity and

B34

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) geological interests within the wider environment. • Plan policies on the form and location of development should take a strategic approach to the conservation, enhancement and restoration of biodiversity and geology, and recognise the contributions that sites, areas and features, both individually and in combination, make to conserving these resources. • Plan policies should promote opportunities for the incorporation of beneficial biodiversity and geological features within the design of development. • Development proposals where the principal objective is to conserve or enhance biodiversity and geological conservation interests should be permitted. • The aim of planning decisions should be to prevent harm to biodiversity and geological conservation interests. In particular, the PPS states that LDFs should: • indicate the location of designated sites of importance for biodiversity and geodiversity, making clear distinctions between the hierarchy of international, national, regional and locally designated sites; and • identify any areas or sites for the restoration or creation of new priority habitats which contribute to regional targets, and support this restoration or creation through appropriate policies.

B35

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

PPS10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (ODPM 2005)

PPS10 states that all planning authorities should: No specific targets or indicators. The Core Strategy should consider opportunities to reduce waste and • help deliver sustainable development through driving waste encourage recycling and composting e.g. integration of recycling and management up the waste hierarchy, addressing waste as a composting facilities into new development and use of recycled materials in resource and looking to disposal as the last option, but one new buildings. which must be adequately catered for; The SA Framework should consider objectives to re-use, recycle, recover • provide a framework in which communities take more and reduce waste. responsibility for their own waste, and enable sufficient and timely provision of waste management facilities to meet the needs of their communities; • help implement the national waste strategy, and supporting targets that are consistent with obligations required under European legislation and support and complement other guidance and legal controls such as those set out in the Waste Management Licensing Regulations 1994; • help secure the recovery or disposal of waste without endangering human health and without harming the environment, and enable waste to be disposed of in one of the nearest appropriate installations; • reflect the concerns and interests of communities, the needs of waste collection authorities, waste disposal authorities and business, and encourage competitiveness; • protect green belts but recognise the particular locational needs of some types of waste management facilities when defining detailed green belt boundaries and, in determining planning applications, that these locational needs, together with the wider environmental and economic benefits of sustainable waste management, are material considerations that should be given significant weight in determining whether proposals should be given planning permission; and • ensure the design and layout of new development supports sustainable waste management.

B36

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

PPS12: Local Development Frameworks (ODPM 2004)

PPS12 sets out the Government policy on the preparation of No targets or indicators. The Core Strategy should fully integrate sustainability through SA and SEA LDFs. It details how the SA should be applied to the LDF in line with the directives. development process. It also highlights the importance of having Ensure compliance with the SEA directive and have due regard for the sustainable development at the core of the local planning. principles contained within PPS1.

PPG13: Transport (ODPM 2011)

• Promote more sustainable transport choices for both people Annex D to the PPG provides maximum parking standards. The Core Strategy should support sustainable transport through reductions and for the moving of freight. in the need to travel by car. • Promote accessibility to jobs, shopping, leisure facilities and The SA Framework should Include sustainability objectives that aim to services by public transport, walking and cycling. promote sustainable transport choices particularly a reduction in the need • Reduce the need to travel, especially by car. to travel, especially by car.

PPG17: Open Space, Sport and Recreation (ODPM 2002)

PPG17 sets out that Open Space, Sport and Recreation underpins Local authorities should set local standards based upon an Consider how the Core Strategy can contribute to the urban renaissance people’s quality of life including: assessment of need and audit of existing facilities. and community wellbeing through the provision and management of open space, sport and recreation facilities. • Supporting urban renaissance; The SA Framework should include sustainability objectives that aim to • Supporting rural renewal; encourage urban renaissance and community wellbeing through the • Promoting social inclusion and community cohesion; provision of open space, sport and recreation facilities. • Health and wellbeing; and • Promoting sustainable development.

Good Practice Guide on Planning for Tourism (CLG 2006)

Sets out how planners should understand the importance of No targets or indicators. The SA should consider objectives regarding economic importance of tourism and take this fully into account when preparing tourism balanced with protection of the environment. development plans and taking planning decisions.

B37

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

PPS22: Renewable Energy (ODPM 2004)

PPS22 provides planning guidelines for renewable energy The Government has a target of 10% of energy supplied from PSS22 encourages the provision of renewable energy sources and developments that are encouraged by the Government’s Energy renewable sources by 2010. Regional targets for renewable provides planning guidance for such developments. The Core Strategy White Paper. energy capacity should be set out in RSS and expressed in should similarly promote renewable energy sources by integrating such megawatts. supplies into the construction and use of buildings. The SA Framework should include objectives/guide questions relating to the promotion of renewable energy.

PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (ODPM 2004)

PPS23 sets out that LDDs should set out the criteria against which No targets or indicators. Policies within the Core Strategy should address pollution control and applications for potentially polluting developments will be remediation. considered. The reduction in pollution should be reflected in the SA Objectives. LDDs should include appropriate policies and proposals for dealing with the potential for contamination and the remediation of land so that it is suitable for the proposed development/use. PPG24: Planning and Noise (ODPM 1994)

PPG24 states that the planning system should guide development Introduces noise exposure categories. The Core Strategy should seek to protect general environmental quality to most appropriate locations, and where practicable ensure that and amenity from noise pollution. noise sensitive development are separated from major sources of SA Objectives should consider the impact of noise. noise.

PPS25: Flood Risk (DCLG, March 2010)

PPS25 aims to ensure that flood risk is taken into account at all None identified. LPAs should consult the Environment Agency and other relevant bodies stages in the planning process to avoid inappropriate development (including adjacent LPAs), when preparing policies in their LDDs on flood in areas at risk of flooding, and to direct development away from risk management and in relation to areas potentially identified as at risk of areas at highest risk. Where new development is, exceptionally, flooding. Their sustainability appraisals, land allocations and development necessary in such areas, policy aims to make it safe without control policies should all be informed by a SFRA carried out in liaison with increasing flood risk elsewhere and where possible, reducing flood the Environment Agency. risk overall. The Core Strategy should seek to reduce the vulnerability of development In identifying land for development local authorities should follow a to flood risk, including a requirement for a sequential approach to site sequential approach to site selection. selection and through promoting developments that incorporate measures to reduce flood risk. This should be reflected within the SA Framework. PPS25 sets out that local planning authorities should prepare and implement planning strategies that help to deliver sustainable

B38

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) development by: Appraising Risk • identifying land at risk and the degree of risk of flooding from river, sea and other sources in their areas; • Strategic Flood Risk Assessments (SFRAs) as appropriate, as freestanding assessments that contribute to the Sustainability Appraisal of their plans. Managing Risk • framing policies for the location of development which avoid flood risk to people and property where possible, and manage any residual risk, taking account of the impacts of climate change; • only permitting development in areas of flood risk when there are no reasonably available sites in areas of lower flood risk and benefits of the development outweigh the risks from flooding. Reducing Risk • safeguarding land from development that is required for current and future flood management e.g. conveyance and storage of flood water, and flood defences; • reducing flood risk to and from new development through location, layout and design, incorporating sustainable drainage systems (SUDS); • using opportunities offered by new development to reduce the causes and impacts of flooding e.g. surface water management plans; making the most of the benefits of green infrastructure for flood storage, conveyance and SUDS; re- creating functional floodplain; and setting back defences.

Regional Plans and Programmes

Future North West: Our Shared Priorities (4NW, August 2010)

Future North West provides a high level statement of strategic The Core Strategy and SA Framework should be broadly in-line within the None identified. priorities and framework for activity over the next 20 years. strategic priorities outlined in Future North West. The vision sets out: The quality of life for the people of the North West will be excellent

B39

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) and the area will become more prosperous, more equitable and low carbon. By 2030 it will be a better place to live, learn, work, visit and invest in, with: • job opportunities for all in a highly productive, well-skilled, internationally competitive, knowledge-based and resource- efficient economy which is adapting to climate change and living within environmental limits; and • high levels of health and social wellbeing, minimal deprivation and child poverty, good housing and excellent physical and digital connectivity; and where: • … those parts of Pennine Lancashire, Blackpool, Barrow and West Cumbria, …, which face substantial social and economic challenges will have been revitalised; and • there will be thriving, economically and socially sustainable towns and communities in both rural and urban areas. The vision is supported by four overarching themes: 1) Capitalise on the opportunities of moving to a low carbon economy and society, and address climate change and resource efficiency; 2) Build on our sources of international competitive advantage and distinctiveness; 3) Release the potential of our people and tackle poverty; and 4) Ensure the right housing and infrastructure for sustainable growth. A series of objectives are identified under each of the four overarching themes, the most relevant of which are: 1b: Ensure the North West understands and adapts to the implications of unavoidable climate change. 1c: Stimulate key sectors, including housing, transport and industry, to develop low carbon, resource-efficient solutions and alternatives. 3a: Increase the potential of the workforce by improving employment opportunities, enterprise and skills. 3c: Revitalise areas with deep-seated economic and social challenges and build strong communities. 3e. Address the implications of demographic change for our workforce and services.

B40

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) 4a. Secure a high-quality housing offer in locations which support sustainable economic growth and communities. 4c. Improve internal connectivity through a sustainable transport infrastructure which better connects opportunity and need. 4e. Safeguard the natural environment and develop green infrastructure. The North West Regional Spatial Strategy (September 2008)

The vision of the RSS is to see a region that has acted to deliver Numerous indicators are reported within the Annual Monitoring Whilst the RSS is to be revoked, the Core Strategy should, where possible sustainable development leading to a higher quality of life for all Report, all or most of which will be relevant to the RSS and SA. address wider regional aims and objectives and take into account the and reduced social, economic and environmental disparities. • Economic output (GVA per head); evidence that supported the preparation of the RSS. Development will be seen in a global context, and the region will • Area (ha) land developed in schemes of 1000 sq.m or more contribute to the reduction of carbon dioxide and other greenhouse on Previously Developed Land by county, district, or unitary gas emissions. planning authority; The RSS provides a framework for the region to 2021. It brings • % of Population claiming unemployment benefit by Local together policies for development with other policies and Authority area; programmes that influence the nature of places and how they function, including those governing health, social issues, the • Total amount and distribution of derelict land; economy, culture, skills and the environment. • Days when air pollution is moderate or higher; • % of river water quality graded to be ‘good’ or ‘fair’ (chemical and biological) under the general quality assessment; • Amount of municipal waste managed (tonnes) by management type (e.g. recycling, landfill etc.) by waste planning authority; • Volume of freight carried by rail; • % of National Cycle Network completed in the region; • The RSS specifies a Borough target of 13,500 dwellings between 2003-2021 (750 pa); at least 80% being constructed on previously developed land.

The North West Regional Spatial Strategy – Partial Review (Submitted Draft – July 2009)

The Partial review seeks to provide a new policy context for the Within Tameside there are 38 current authorised plots for Whilst the RSS is to be revoked, the Core Strategy should, where possible provision of accommodation for gypsies and travellers and showpeople. By 2016 the RSS partial review identifies the need address wider regional aims and objectives and take into account the showpeople. In addition the partial review also addresses for an additional 10 plots. Tameside is required to provide 10 evidence that supported the preparation of the RSS. managing travel demand and parking standards for the region. plots for gypsy and travellers by 2010. The SA will need to consider the needs of gypsy and travellers.

B41

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Regional Spatial Strategy for the East Midlands (2005)

The RSS provides a broad development strategy for the East A range of indicators are included in the RSS e.g.: Whilst the RSS is to be revoked, the Core Strategy will need to determine Midlands up to 2021. common linkages and issues with Borough and High Peak. • percentage of new dwellings completed at less than 30dph; There are five main priorities areas which the strategy aims to The SA should identify potential cross-boundary effects. • affordable housing completions by local authority area; address: • Housing: affordable housing on brownfield land; • percentage of completed non-residential development complying with the car parking standards set out in the RTS; • Economy and Regeneration: policies on employment land and town centres; • amount of completed retail, office and leisure development; • Natural and Cultural Resources: new targets on biodiversity, • capacity of waste management facilities by type. waste reduction and management and flood risk; • Regional Transport Strategy: aims to reduce the need to travel, reduce traffic growth, improve public transport.

Regional Spatial Strategy for the Yorkshire and Humber (2008)

The adopted RSS provides the spatial framework for development The RSS includes a limited number of indicators including: Whilst the RSS is to be revoked, the Core Strategy will need to determine common linkages and issues with Borough and High Peak. in Yorkshire and Humber up to 2026. The vision of the RSS is to • Green Belts – additions and deletions to Green Belts; develop a region which is world class where economic, The SA should identify potential cross-boundary effects. • Patterns of Development - % development allocations environmental and social well being of all our people is advancing more rapidly and more sustainably than our competitors. outside the existing urban area and % of employment allocations on Greenfield land; This vision is underpinned by a number of strategic themes including: • % increase in VAT registrations; • Economic Regeneration and Growth; • number of improvement and town management schemes. • Promoting Social Inclusion; • Urban and Rural Renaissance; • Conserving and Enhancing Natural Resources.

B42

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Northwest Regional Economic Strategy 2006

The vision of the NW RES is to develop a dynamic, sustainable Targets include: The Core Strategy should seek to promote and contribute towards the international economy which competes on the basis of knowledge, • Achieving GVA growth above the England average; delivery of the overarching vision. advanced technology and excellent quality of life for all where: • Create 150,000 net new jobs, 80,000 of which should be in It is important to ensure that policies to promote economic development • production and enterprise levels are high, in a low carbon the knowledge occupations to bring the proportion of people balance regional needs against policy objectives to protect the economy , driven by innovation, leadership excellence and working in these occupations to the England Average; environment. This will need to be considered as part of the SA. high skills; • Raise the firm formation rate to 21,000 per annum; The SA Framework should include objectives relating to economic • Manchester and Liverpool are vibrant European Cities and, development. • Reduce the number of working age people with no with Preston, are key drivers of city-regional growth; qualifications by 80,000 and ensure no district has more • Growth opportunities around Crewe, Chester, Warrington, than 29% with no qualifications; Lancaster and Carlisle are fully developed.]; • Increase the number of people in the workforce with • Key growth assets are fully utilised (priority sectors – the graduate qualifications by 120,000 in order to meet the higher education and science base, ports/airports, strategic England average; regional sites, the natural environment especially the Lake • Increase the number of people in the workforce by 83,000 in District, and rural economy); order to meet the England average employment rate, and • The economies of East Lancashire, Blackpool, Barrow and ensure no district has an employment rate less than 68%; West Cumbria are regenerated; • Reduce the number of areas in the worst 5% deprived • Employment rates are high and concentrations of low nationally; employment are eliminated. • Reduce CO2 emissions per unit (£) of GVA. Rural Renaissance: the Regional Rural Recovery Action Plan 2002

The Plan’s Strategic Objectives are as follows: Under the Strategic Objectives are numerous indicators which Core Strategy policies should seek to promote new business and contribute to NWDA targets under the following categories: diversification of existing businesses in rural areas of an appropriate scale, • Broadening the Economic Base of Rural Areas; considering that high use activities such be in the most accessible Tier 1 (state of the region targets) and Tier 2 (outcome targets) • Renew & Strengthen Sustainable Recreation and Tourism; locations. e.g. New agricultural/tourism/leisure/cultural-creative business • Assisting the Restructuring of Agriculture; starts. The SA Framework should include an objective to support rural • Enhancing the Competitiveness and Capability of Primary Tier 3 (output targets). renaissance. Agriculture; Ha of woodland/forestry through diversification support. • Rural Skills Development; No. of farm operations assisted to develop primary agriculture • Development and Promotion of Countryside Products; business. • Sustaining the Environmental Inheritance; Additional M2 new/renovated office/manufacturing/warehouse • Delivering Social and community Regeneration; workspace available. • Implementation of a set of strategic actions that contribute to No. of primary agriculture ‘new start’ entrants from the North the wider ambitions of the strategy, improving the efficacy of West.

B43

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) proposals and support the recovery programme. M&E No/proportions of VAT registered agricultural/non-agricultural business stock. Diversified income as proportion of total farm household income.

England’s North West Connected: ICT Strategy (2005)

The Strategy has four ‘strategic ambitions’, namely: The strategy has a corresponding set of ’operational aims’ and The Core Strategy should recognise that ICT provision can help ‘indicative actions’. These include: businesses and improve access to services and facilities. • Users - to stimulate and embed a regional culture which embraces and strives for the benefit of ICT at home, work and • Plan in high capacity connectivity in regeneration and The SA Framework should consider increased ICT as a means by which in leisure; development activities; the Borough can become more productive, whilst at the same time reducing the need to travel. Furthermore ICT can improve community • Access - ensure that all individuals, communities and • Establish an ongoing Regional Intelligence Unit research access to facilities and services. businesses have the skills, motivations and infrastructure to programme on ICT supply and demand, and region-wide access digitally delivered services and exploit them to the full; dissemination of key ICT-related information; • Content - To develop the region’s potential for producing • Establish a regional programme of ICT market and relevant, value adding and quality digital content which technology Foresight. addresses the needs and wants of users at home, at work and in leisure. • Regional Integration - to ensure that the potential and benefits of ICT use, and its key role in competitiveness and quality of life, are fully reflected in all regional, sub regional and local strategy, action and.

England’s North West: Science Strategy 2007-2010

This strategy sets out the following vision: “England’s Northwest Key indicators will cover the areas of Science Excellence, The Core Strategy should set a policy context that promotes science and will be renowned as an area of world-class scientific achievement, People, Finance, and Exploitation. Indicators are not yet innovation. published. creating a magnet for talent and science investment, a powerful SA Framework should consider innovation and science base of the region. driver for innovation and enterprise, and an effective force for delivering benefits to health, the environment and society”.

B44

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

North West Regional Housing Strategy 2009

The Vision of the strategy is to “create balanced housing markets No specific targets were stated within the Housing Strategy. The Core Strategy should seek ways in which to achieve the four key across the Northwest that support economic growth, strengthen Indicators identified in the RHS include: priorities identified within the regional housing strategy. economic and social inclusion and ensure that everyone has • Quantity of all housing requirements met; The SA Framework take account of the regional housing vision through its access to appropriate, well-designed high quality, affordable objectives. housing in sustainable, mixed and vibrant communities. • Quality of all affordable housing needs met; Both the LDF and SA Framework should address the issues identified • Quality of all social stock made decent; There are three key objectives identified to achieve this vision, within the RHS Detailed Policy Area – fuel poverty, climate change and low these are: • Standard of private housing stock which exceeds the carbon housing. • Achieving the right quantity of housing – providing housing in national average. both urban and rural areas, appropriate to local markets and • All neighbourhoods sustainable - % of private sector environments and to be sustainable by getting the location, homes empty for more than 6 months. type, design, size and tenure mix right; • All housing support needs met; • Continuing to raise the quality of the existing housing stock – critical to ensure that existing homes are made sustainable • Homelessness - reduced year on year; and play a full role in raising the quality of places as part of • Worklessness in social housing reduced year on year. neighbourhoods where people choose to live, work and invest; • Connecting people to the improved housing offer – ensuring that the benefits of improved quality housing is available to all residents across the region.

Action for Equality: North West Equality and Diversity Strategy 2005

The Strategy comprises the following priorities: The Strategy provides a number of regional Equality Priorities. The Core Strategy should seek to promote equality for all sections of the 1. Promote diversity and ensure respect for human rights. north west community. At a spatial level this can be supported through the provision of accessible services, facilities and economic opportunities, 2. Show leadership on equality and diversity. ensuring that new development supports and where appropriate enhances 3. Build the region's capacity on equality and diversity. existing facilities. 4. Reduce hate crime and violence. The SA Framework should ensure that objectives and guide questions cover issues of equality. 5. Ensure the diverse North West is better represented in public life. 6. Deliver economic participation for all. 7. Promote equality in law. 8. Work towards equal access to services.

B45

Streets for All: North West 2005

This manual offers guidance on the way streets and public open No specific targets or indicators were identified. Both the Core Strategy and SA Framework should take into account social spaces are managed. Its primary aim is to improve the inclusion. appearance of public spaces by showing how practical solutions to common highway problems can be achieved.

Investment for Health: A Plan for the North West of England (2003)

This Plan seeks “to achieve significant reductions in health Proposed priority groups for the Investment for Health Plan are: The Core Strategy should seek to promote opportunities for healthy inequalities between groups and areas in the North West, within a lifestyles through the provision of open spaces, opportunities for walking, Children and young people. Declining in numbers but crucial to cycling. framework of sustainable development which supports economic, the region’s economic and social future, and to breaking the social, and environmental regeneration”. inter-generational cycle of deprivation. The SA Framework should include an objective directly related to health issues. Older people. A major policy challenge to improve their quality of life and contribution to the region’s economic and social life. Black and ethnic minority groups. A rapidly growing population, with relatively poor health, and for some groups a younger population with the potential to support economic and social regeneration. Disabled people. At particular risk of social exclusion, and the numbers claiming Disability Living Allowance projected to increase by 11%. Lists Public Sector Agreements related to health.

B46

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

The Updated Regional Waste Strategy for England’s North West (4NW, February 2010)

The key aim of the Regional Waste Strategy (RWS) has remained Reuse / recycling / composting targets for household waste: The Core Strategy should recognise the requirements to develop a unchanged, i.e. “to contribute to the sustainable development of • 40% by 2010; sustainable waste strategy and consider a policy framework to encourage the Northwest region by promoting and supporting waste • 45% by 2015; reduction, re-use and recycling. management infrastructure, facilities and systems which reduce harm to the environment (including reducing impacts on climate • 55% by 2020. The SA Framework should consider objectives to reduce, recycle and re- change), improve the efficiency of resources, stimulate investment Recycle 55% of all commercial and industrial waste by 2020. use waste. and maximise economic opportunities in line with specific targets”. Recovering value (including recycling, composting and energy The updated RWS maintains, and also builds on, the objectives of recovery) from at least 70% of all commercial and industrial the 2004 RSW to: waste by 2020. • Ensure that waste management infrastructure, facilities and systems are developed in accordance with the principles of sustainable development, the low carbon agenda and integrated waste management at the highest practicable level in the Government’s waste hierarchy, by: − Preventing waste; − Maximising the re-use of materials for the same or different purpose; − Increasing the proportion of recycling and composting of waste; − Provision of treatment capacity for hazardous waste; − Production of refuse derived fuels from waste; − Recovering energy from residual waste and refuse derived fuels; − Maintaining sufficient landfill capacity … • Provide a clear framework for stakeholders to guide future development of waste management in the Northwest and to support local MWMSs and private investment decisions; • Deliver waste planning policy so that it is consistent with, and contributes to, the overall aims of NMW2007, the RSS, and the Sustainable Consumption and Production Action Plan for the Northwest; • Maximise opportunities for businesses arising from sustainable waste management, including the not-for-profit sector; • Ensure the RWS offers a clear, transparent and information approach that is valued by local and regional stakeholders and is supported by local communities;

B47

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) • Ensure there is sufficient flexibility to incorporate changes to targets, legislation and improvements to technologies for handling waste; • Reduce environmental effects of waste management through the implementation of SEA, SA and AA to ensure the protection and conservation of the environment across land, air and water.

B48

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

North West Regional Cultural Strategy (2002)

Key set out in the Strategy objectives are: The Cultural Strategy’s aims and objectives link with the The Core Strategy will provide a policy framework within which the Cultural • Advocacy - making the case for the role of culture and Northwest Development Agency and the North West Regional Strategy can be delivered. Policies should promote the cultural and social creativity within all aspects of regional policy; Assembly. In particular, the England’s North West - a Strategy economy, particularly the role of local culture which is accessible to the • Image - make culture central to the region’s self-image and towards 2020, and the Regional Planning Guidance. wider community. the external marketing of the region as a place to live, learn, There are no quantifiable performance indicators as such, work, visit and do business with; however the strategy states that the “Strategic Opportunities” The SA Framework should recognise the importance of culture and cultural should: heritage. It should also recognise the need to promote local cultural • Cultural Economy - develop a sustainable, innovative cultural distinctiveness and access. and creative economy; • Achieve “medium- to long-term benefit” across the region • Social Economy - develop the role of culture in sustainable, and make a “national and international impact”; healthy communities that work, in education and in • Add value to existing policy priorities, as well as building on employment; current strengths and commitments; • Environment - promote heritage and landscape as central to • Provide demonstrable and tangible long-term cultural the culture of the region, and its role in developing excellent impacts in all of the Strategy’s Aims - economy, society, and design and planning in the public realm. image; • Acknowledge the importance of education and life-long learning and seek to link with relevant initiatives such as Creative Partnerships; • Involve new partnerships and significant support from the public, private and voluntary sectors and have the potential to open up new sources of finance; • Deliver sustainable activities or legacies to the region. Heritage Counts (2008)

Heritage Counts is a means of monitoring the country’s cultural The report identifies a number of key indicators which could be The report identifies a number of key indicators which could be used to heritage assets. The study does not identify any key objectives used to inform the preparation of a monitoring framework. The inform the development of objectives. other than to provide an over of the use of cultural assets, and an indicators are at a regional level providing a comparison with insight into the level of designations and their status. 2002 baseline. The indicators include: • No. of Listed Buildings; • No. Schedule Monuments; • No Registered Parks and Gardens; • Conservation Areas.

B49

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Tourism Strategy for the North West 2003-2010

The vision of the Strategy is: None Identified. Core Strategy policies should seek to promote tourism throughout the Borough, ensuring that the economic benefits are spread and disbenefits • A Responsible Tourism Industry; reduced. • A Competitive Tourism Industry; The SA Framework should include tourism within the broader objectives. • A Customer-focused Tourism Industry; • A Tourism Industry Working in Partnership; • A Dynamic Tourism Industry

North West Sustainable Energy Strategy (2006)

The North West Sustainable Energy Strategy identifies the North None identified. The Core Strategy should seek to promote opportunities for renewable West response to address energy challenges. It also summarises energy, either in the form of stand alone power generation projects or as how the region will monitor progress on energy matters. The part of new built development. Energy Strategy identifies the implications of climate change, the The SA Framework will need to include objectives/guide questions relating need for energy security and behavioural change in the use of to energy efficiency, renewables and fuel poverty. energy, overcoming fuel poverty, improving energy efficiency and identifies different sources of renewable energy.

North West Climate Change Action Plan 2010-2012 (4NW)

The Action Plan identifies the following four key Issues: To ensure the transition to a low carbon economy, the Climate The Core Strategy should seek to promote low carbon / energy efficient • Key that we achieve carbon reduction as quickly as possible, Change Act and its legally binding carbon budgets now commits buildings and renewable energy infrastructure. The Core Strategy should reducing the cumulative effect of carbon in the atmosphere the UK to a 34% emissions reduction by 2020. also include policies based around mitigating and adapting to climate and reducing the severity of climate impacts change. The Plan identifies a number of priorities for action under the • Continued access to secure and affordable energy supplies is following themes: The SA Framework needs to ensure that climate change is addressed both important. Our transition to a low carbon economy, which explicitly and implicitly throughout the SA Objectives. reduces the amount of carbon required for economic • Clean and secure energy activity and diversifies our energy supply, will be a key • Smarter use of carbon factor in reducing these risks. • Opportunities for growth • Past emissions mean that some climate change effects are inevitable and already visible in the Northwest. In the region’s • A well adapting region urban areas, higher temperatures and increased exposure to • Catalysing action flood risk are beginning to have direct consequences for spatial decision making, health, logistics and the management The Plan also includes a range of indicators. of people and property. • Although regional businesses have begun to explore the new

B50

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) opportunities that climate change presents, the impacts to growth of not taking action are significant. The Stern Review identified climate change as the biggest market failure ever known and demonstrated that cost-effective, early action can prevent its worse excesses. The following key objectives are identified to achieve a low carbon and well adapting Northwest by 2020: • Reduce greenhouse gas emissions • Adapt to unavoidable climate change • Capitalise on opportunities for economic growth

B51

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Sub-Regional Strategies

Greater Manchester’s Third Local Transport Plan (2011/12-2015/16)

Greater Manchester’s Third Local Transport Plan (LTP) covers the A range of targets are set out in Chapter 11 of the LTP/ The Core Strategy needs to support the LTP’s objective and the delivery of period 2011/12 to 2015/16. The LTP’s core objectives are as proposals contained therein. follows: An SA objective which addresses the LTP’s key objectives is required. • To ensure that the transport network supports the Greater Manchester economy to improve the life chances of residents and the success of business;To ensure that carbon emissions from transport are reduced in line with UK Government targets in order to minimise the impact of climate change; • To ensure that the transport system facilitates active, healthy lifestyles and a reduction in the number of casualties and that other adverse health impacts are minimised; • To ensure that the design and maintenance of the transport network and provision of services supports sustainable neighbourhoods and public spaces and provides equality of transport opportunities; and • To maximise value for money in the provision and maintenance of transport infrastructure and services. Key proposals for Tameside identified within the LTP include: • Metrolink Extension from Piccadilly to Ashton-under-Lyne • Ashton Northern Bypass Stage 2 • Greater Manchester Retaining Wall Major Maintenance Scheme • Integrated transport strategy for Longdendale

Greater Manchester Air Quality Plan

The aim of the Air Quality Action Plan is to reduce pollutants not Greater Manchester targets build upon those at national level: The Core Strategy should include policies that support the objectives of the only within air quality management areas (AQMAs) but across the Action Plan. • Limit traffic growth on A and B roads to 10% of 1996 levels conurbation as a whole. Its specific objectives are: by 2011; The SA Framework should include SA Objectives that result in improved air • To integrate air quality with other plans and strategies. quality. • Limit traffic growth in Manchester city centre to 5% of 1996 levels by 2011.

B52

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Greater Manchester Biodiversity Action Plans

The Greater Manchester Biodiversity Action Plans were recently The individual action plans contain a number of targets and The Core Strategy should contain policies which are developed to help reviewed and updated with a new format and additional sections objectives. Examples of objectives include: meet and deliver the targets identified within the individual Action Plans. including best practice and SMART targets. Action Plans have • Create a minimum of 50 green roofs/green walls across the The SA Framework needs to include objectives which address the issues been developed covering the following habitats: GM conurbation over the next five years, particularly in areas of species/habitat protection and enhancement. • Farmland where Black Redstarts are known to breed. • Water and Wetlands • Maintain current extent of priority habitat (species rich grassland) • Urban The targets and objectives cover the period to 2015. • Uplands For each habitat, Action Plans have been developed for a range of species which comprise specific objectives. The following Action Plans are currently under review: • Bats • Floating water plantain • Canals • Urban-Managed greenspace

Greater Manchester Employment Land Position Statement (2009)

The Position Statement sets out that Tameside is considered to The main opportunity for high quality office development is likely The SA needs to incorporate the data and office space provisions into the provide ample office space currently including serviced office to comprise Area 3000 on Ashton Moss Strategic Site and the St baseline and SA Objectives. space, but there is believed to be a lack of quality accommodation Petersfield site (approximately 20,000 sq m). The Core Strategy needs to provide the opportunities to facilitate with much of it being old. Ashton Moss provides for B2 and B8. investment within the Borough by making provision for employment land. The employment market is more public sector driven than private. Manufacturing is important to the Borough, and it should seek to retain this different characteristic (e.g. to Manchester).

Pennine Edge Forest – Business Action Plan 2004-2013

The Pennine Edge Forest has been established to assist with the The Pennine Edge Forest has identified a number of targets Core Strategy policies should seek to promote opportunities for new reclamation of derelict sites through the creation of high quality which are to be achieved by 2013, these include woodland creation. • 475 hectares of new woodland planting; The SA Framework should include the protection and planting of woodland

B53

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) landscapes. • 50 hectares of small scale DUN land reclamation; within its objectives/guide questions. • 1,000,000 locally native trees planted; • 400 hectares of under-managed and neglected woodland transformed into community woodland; • 1000 hectares of strategic river valley regenerated; • 2 woodland based Local Nature Reserves; • 25km of new and improved recreational access and green commuting routes; • Every school to have the opportunity to plant trees in their local environment. These targets apply to the Pennine Edge Forest which covers the metropolitan authorities of Oldham, Rochdale, Stockport and Tameside. Tameside Borough Council Documents

Our Life in Tameside 2009 – 2019: Tackling Health Inequalities and Improving Health

This Strategy is underpinned by the following objectives to improve A range of targets have been identified to assess the success in There area number of key synergies between the Strategy and the Core health and address local health inequalities in Tameside: delivering the objectives opposite. Strategy. Policies should be developed around improving access to services and facilities, promoting low carbon development. In addition • Ensure children, young people and their families achieve the best possible health to reach their maximum potential opportunities to enhance opportunities for recreation and walking etc should be promoted. • Reduce income inequalities and poverty The SA Framework needs to fully identify and address issues of health to • Increase the potential for people to access work and ensure that the development of policies fully address this key issue for the community activities Borough. • Empower and support individuals to take action to improve their health and wellbeing • Improve the health of vulnerable people in particular those at risk of or with long term conditions and disabilities • Promote Tameside neighbourhoods and towns as healthy and safe places to live, work and visit

My Tameside: Tameside Sustainable Community Strategy 2009-19

The Sustainable Community Strategy sets out the following Within each of the priorities there are a number of key The Core Strategy should ensure that its policies include support for the overarching vision for Tameside: performance indicators. objectives of the Sustainable Community Strategy where applicable.

B54

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) “Tameside is a great place to live. We will make it even better. It The SA Framework should seek to ensure that the aims of the community will continue to be a borough where the people who live here feel strategy are satisfactorily addressed. at home, are able to get involved in the life of the community, where they can contribute to a prosperous local economy, feel safe and healthy, and take active responsibility for their environment.” The aims and associated priorities identified within the Sustainable Community Strategy are:

Supportive Tameside • Build sustainable neighbourhoods • Help people live independently Prosperous Tameside • Transform the economy and renew our towns • Increase skills and employment Learning Tameside • Create schools fit for the future and raise attainment • Improve the life chances of children and young people and adults Attractive Tameside • Improve the attractiveness of the borough • Promote environmental sustainability Healthy Tameside • To support people to live healthier lives Safe Tameside • Reduce burglary, vehicle crime and robbery and the harm caused by drugs and alcohol • Reduce violent crime • Improve quality of life and residents’ feelings of safety • Reduce reoffending

B55

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Tameside Together 2008-11- Local Area Agreement (Revised March 2010)

The Local area agreement contains the same priorities as the The LAA contains a number of indicators for the monitoring of the The Core Strategy should ensure that its policies include support for the Sustainable Community Strategy. Community Strategy. These include: objectives of the Sustainable Community Strategy where applicable. • Homelessness cases prevented per 1000 population; The SA Framework should seek to ensure that the aims of the Sustainable • Per capita reduction in CO2; Community Strategy are satisfactorily addressed. • Working age population – level 2 qualifications or higher. Tameside Council Corporate Plan 2011-14 (March 2011)

The priorities identified within the Corporate Plan reiterate many of Progress towards achieving the priorities detailed in the Plan is The Core Strategy should ensure that its policies include support for the those contained within the Sustainable Community Strategy. measured by a series of performance indicators which constitute objectives of the Sustainable Community Strategy where applicable. a mix of those targets and indicators contained within the The SA Framework should seek to ensure that the aims of the Sustainable Sustainable Community Strategy and the Local Area Agreement. Community Strategy are satisfactorily addressed.

Tameside Third Sector Coalition: Cross Sector Policy Group Action Plan 2009-10

The Cross Sector Policy Group aims to bring about an effective No targets identified other than actions contained within the Plan. The SA Framework should include objectives that result in people being working relationship between the third sector (voluntary, better able to participate. community and faith groups) and other sectors and partners to the benefit of Tameside communities.

The Group has a developed an action plan, endorsed by Tameside Strategic Partnership, with five high level objectives designed to create ‘an environment for a thriving third sector’. These are as follows: • Engagement with, and Involvement of, the third sector in local partnerships and decision making. • Funding and commissioning. • Supporting volunteering. • Helping to build the capacity of third sector organizations. • Promoting and embedding the Compact.

Tameside Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy 2008-2010

Objectives and priorities are to: There are no specific targets or indicators identified. The Core Strategy should address the spatial issues to deliver the priority

B56

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) • Improve services to children and young people and promote neighbourhoods. youth inclusion in the priority neighbourhoods; The SA Framework should seek to ensure that the requirements of the • To improve access to employment and training opportunities Neighbourhood Renewal Strategy are satisfactorily addressed. for residents living in the priority neighbourhoods; • To improve service delivery in the priority neighbourhoods and develop the capacity to achieve this; • To develop robust methods for collecting and analysing data to support future planning of services in the priority neighbourhoods. The priority neighbourhoods are identified as: • Ashton; • Hattersley; • Denton South; • Smallshaw/Hurst • Newton; • Ridgehill; • Droylsden East. Tameside Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnership Plan 2008-2011

This Plan provides an update to the Tameside CDRP Strategy No targets and indicators identified. The Core Strategy should take account of the need to promote crime (2005-8). It sets out the following priorities: reduction within development. • Acquisitive- Crime The SA Framework should include objectives relating to community safety. • Quality of Life and Confidence • Reduce Re-offending • Violent Crime & Sexual Offences • Drugs & Alcohol

Tameside Alcohol Harm Reduction Strategy 2007-2010

The key priorities within this Strategy are: There are a number of cross cutting themes and indicators which The Core Strategy and SA need to provide consideration to the cross • To reduce alcohol related crime, disorder and anti-social are of direct relevance to both this the LDF and SA and this cutting themes of relevance to the alcohol strategy and the Sustainable behaviour; strategy. Community Strategy. • To reduce the negative impact of alcohol upon the health of individuals and communities; • To reduce the impact alcohol misuse has on families and

B57

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) communities; • To improve the range, accessibility and quality of alcohol treatment services; • To protect people of all ages from alcohol related harm through the education of alcohol sensible drinking and safety messages; • To reduce alcohol related harm upon the economy and workplaces; • To reduce alcohol related traffic collisions and road deaths; • To research the links between alcohol consumption and homelessness. A Trees and Woodlands Strategy for Tameside

The aims of the Trees and Woodlands Strategy are: Contains broad objectives only identifying areas where targets The Core Strategy should include policies that support the objectives of the • To promote importance of trees and woodlands in enhancing may be set. Strategy. the Borough; The SA Framework should support the objectives of the Strategy. • To provide for long-term continuity of trees; • To actively promote the creation of new woods; • To improve opportunities for recreational access and education; • To enhance wildlife value; • To improve landscape amenity especially the urban fringe, and thereby attract investment; • To develop the rural economy; • To sympathetically develop a timber resource.

A Nature Conservation Strategy for Tameside 1996

The Nature Conservation Strategy aims to protect and enhance the Objective to maintain and increase the areas of valuable habitat Policies within the Core Strategy should support the objectives of the Borough’s wildlife resource and its nature features; providing an in the Borough. Other broad objectives only identifying areas Strategy. understanding and enjoyment of these resources, maintaining and where targets may be set. The SA Framework should include objectives relating to the protection and enhancing biodiversity. The strategy incorporates the usual enhancement of the Borough’s biodiversity. hierarchy, viz. SSSIs, SBIs and the provisions of Local Agenda 21. Proposals for the management of wildlife focus upon achieving: • A balance of habitats;

B58

Tameside Economic Masterplan – Reviewed Document July 2009

The vision of the Economic Masterplan is Key indicators contained within the Masterplan include: The SA Objectives need to address the vision and the four key objectives Working age population qualified to be at least Level 4 or of the masterplan. “We want Tameside to be a place where more and better jobs are • higher; The Core Strategy needs to provide the opportunities to facilitate available for everyone, local people are able to access these jobs and where businesses (including new businesses) can flourish)” • Skills gaps in current workforce reported by employers; investment within the Borough.

This four key objectives of the masterplan are: • Overall unemployment rate; • Number of unemployed in Tameside as a proportion of • Increase skills; Greater Manchester unemployment rate; • Increase employment; • New business registrations per 10,000; • Increase enterprise; • Congestion average journey time per mile during the • Attract investment. morning peak; • Previously developed land that has been vacant or derelict for 5 years or more. Community Safety Strategy 2005 – 2008

Priorities identified within the Strategy are as follows: The Strategy lists very specific and quantitative objectives The Core Strategy should contain policies aimed at reducing crime and the • To reduce types of acquisitive crime, including burglary, against each priority. e.g.: fear of crime. vehicle crime and theft; • To reduce residents fear of crime by 5% using the Fear of The SA Framework should include objectives relating to community safety. • To create safer cleaner neighbourhoods, increase public Crime Survey 2004 as the baseline; confidence, improve fire safety, initiate neighbourhood • To reduce anti-social behaviour and violence in the night management and improve road safety; time economy, across the whole of Kent, by 10% against a • To tackle late night disorder, provide effective licensing and rising trend; reduce all violence offences, in particular, violence in a public • To reduce offences of criminal damage by 5% from 2,589 in place; 2003/04 to 2,458 in 2006/07. • To reduce criminal damage and vandalism, and tackle environmental crime and anti-social behaviour; • To provide drugs and alcohol services, disrupt the drugs market, increase awareness of the dangers of drugs and alcohol, and rehabilitate individuals that are affected by substance misuse; • To raise awareness, reporting and improve detection rates for domestic violence, racism, disability crime and homophobia. To reduce the prevalence of these issues in high incidence

B59

The Tameside Housing Strategy 2010-2016 was adopted by the Seeks to provide 180 affordable homes per year (20% of all new The Core Strategy should ensure that there is an adequate supply of Council in January 2010. The Strategy’s main priorities are as housing). housing to meet the needs of all of the Borough’s population. follows: The SA Framework should seek to ensure that the aims of the Strategy are • Achieving the right quantity and quality of new housing; satisfactorily addressed. • Continuing to raise the quality of the existing housing stock, services and neighbourhoods; • Connecting people to the improved housing offer. Tameside Countryside Strategy 2009 - 2019

This Strategy identifies a series of objectives relating to The Strategy includes a number of priorities for action and The Core Strategy should include policies that seek to conserve and Tameside’s countryside under two overarching themes. These are associated indicators including, for example: enhance Tameside’s natural environment. set out below: • Number of people using the countryside The SA Framework should include objectives/guide questions relating to People in the countryside • Percentage of countryside service managed rights of way the protection and enhancement of the Borough’s environmental assets. • Encourage people of all ages, ability and background to enjoy and recreational routes easy to use and experience the countryside • Number of ‘health walks’ promoted • Encourage responsible enjoyment of Tameside’s countryside • Percentage of journeys to main countryside sites using so that its qualities are understood, appreciated and sustainable transport safeguarded, now and for future generations to enjoy • Achievement of Green Flag Awards • Work in partnership with others to provide an integrated • Number of days undertaken by volunteers in Tameside’s approach towards access and recreation which is sustainable countryside and socially inclusive • Percentage of visits to main countryside sites by under • Support and encourage local community involvement in the represented groups planning and management of outdoor access throughout the • Number of wheelchair friendly accessible routes countryside • Area of LNR per thousand population • Protect the fragile areas of Tameside’s countryside from pressures arising from outdoor access and recreation • Percentage of SBIs in positive management • Develop the educational opportunities offered by the • Percentage of Ancient Woodlands covered by TPOs countryside of Tameside • Number of woodlands achieving UKWAS certification • Encourage people of all ages, abilities and communities to get outdoors frequently and experience the physical and mental

wellbeing associated with the countryside • Develop and support opportunities for volunteering in the countryside

B60

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) • Capture knowledge and factual information about Tameside’s countryside in a range of appropriate ways so that it is easily accessible to anyone who wants to use it and can be passed on to future generations • Improve and maintain the quality of experience within Tameside’s countryside for all visitors • Promote awareness of access and recreation opportunities within the countryside and respect for its special qualities. • Ensure a cohesive countryside-wide approach to Ranger Services which meets the needs of visitors, communities and land managers. • Collect, analyse and use the best available information on visitor numbers, distribution, activities and perceptions to inform visitor management. Conserving and enhancing the countryside • Conserve and enhance the condition and diversity of habitats and species present throughout Tameside’s countryside, through a landscape-scale approach to habitat networks • Ensure all designated nature conservation sites are in favourable condition. • Engage the community of Tameside in meeting or exceeding international, national and local biodiversity targets. • Ensure that populations of species given special protection under the Wildlife and Countryside Act are stable or, where appropriate, increasing. • Promote access to appropriate policy and funding mechanisms to support nature conservation. • Identify, prioritise and take action to address non-native • species that pose a threat to the natural heritage and land management of Tameside’s countryside • Promote appropriate reintroduction of species and reinstatement of habitats and identify the likely ecological and management impacts • Identify and carry out a research programme designed to provide the information and monitoring on the habitats, species and ecosystems required to guide future decision-making. • Raise awareness and safeguard the outstanding geological features that contribute to the landscape of Tameside’s

B61

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) countryside. • Maintain and enhance the distinctive landscapes across Tameside. • Understand, increase awareness and conserve the archaeological features, historic landscapes and historic built environment.

Tameside Children’s Trust: Children and Young People’s Plan 2010 – 2013

The Children and Young People’s Plan (CYPP) is the joint strategy The CYPP includes a detailed Delivery Plan and Where appropriate the Core Strategy should seek to deliver the spatial of Tameside Children’s Trust which sets out how partners will work targets/indicators are linked to the LAA. elements of the CYPP. together to improve the well-being of children and young people in The SA Framework should include objectives/guide questions relating to the Borough. health and education. The CYPP sets out that the Trust want children, young people and families to have the following essential experiences in growing up, and living, in Tameside: • To feel loved and cared for • To feel safe and secure in our community • For children and young people to be proud of who they are, and for them to aspire to be leaders themselves • For children and young people to have consistent role models • To broaden children and young people’s horizons and support children to ‘dream big’ • Topromotehighself esteemforall children and young people • To support the Tameside community to live in tolerance, respect and acceptance The CYPP identifies the following priorities: • Promote healthy lifestyles with particular focus on obesity and alcohol • Improve emotional health and well being for all young people and their families • Promote the safety of all children and young people in all settings with a focus on domestic violence

B62

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) • Increase the proportion of young people moving into education, employment, training and promote positive role models • Continue to raise attendance and attainment at all phases of learning with a strategic focus on vulnerable children, looked after children and continue to narrow the gap for the lowest achieving children • Reduce the rates of teenage pregnancy

Tameside Homelessness Strategy 2008-20013

No specific objectives were identified. No specific targets were identified. The document does however The SA Framework should incorporate homelessness. seek to address what are perceived as the six causes of homelessness: • domestic abuse; • families no longer willing to accommodate; • education; • private rented sector; • housing advice; and • tenancy support.

The Tameside Enterprise Strategy

No specific objectives were identified. The strategy identifies a number of key issues which are The SA needs to incorporate appraisal objectives relating to the considered to be of direct relevance to the Plan and SA. diversification of the economy and support for new business. • Addressing the enterprise deficit; • A low proportion of knowledge based industries; • A need to improve recorded survival rates of supported businesses; • Low levels of enterprise skills, experience and training.

B63

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

A Strategy for the Management of Waste in Tameside 2005-2010

The EU Landfill Directive endeavours to raise standards in landfill Targets includes: The Core Strategy should promote opportunities to facilitate and enhance practice and involves two key principles – reducing the amount and recycling facilities. • Secure a recycling rate of 33% by 2010/11 nature of waste going to landfill and tightening the regulation and The SA Framework should include objectives/guide questions relating to management of landfill. • Reduce non-household waste by 50% the sustainable management of waste. • Stop waste growth by 2020.

Tameside Affordable Warmth Strategy 2009-12

The five key aims which underpin the strategy are: Objectives and targets contained within the Strategy include: The Core Strategy should promote the development of fuel efficient, low carbon development. • Ensure Tameside’s affordable warmth strategy is delivered in • Raise the SAP rating of owner occupied, private rented and partnership; social housing to a minimum of 65; The SA Framework should ensure that the key aims of the Strategy are adequately addressed. • Work to make all homes in Tameside affordable warm; • Reduce number of properties with a SAP of 35 and under; • Improve access to energy advice, grants and schemes and raise awareness of benefits of affordable warmth to the public and key workers; • Improve health and well being through affordable warmth; • Improve affordable warmth through income maximisation and money advice.

B64

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Tameside Play Strategy

“Best Play” (2001) set out 7 key objectives for good play provision The role of the strategy is to raise the profile and importance of The Core Strategy and SA should seek to adequately address the seven which are the benchmark for play in Tameside: play within all service provision both within and outside of the key objectives. Council. In addition there is a aim to increase levels of provision • Extend the choice and control that children have over their play; and to improve the quality of existing facilities. No specific targets or indicators were identified. • Recognise the child’s need to test boundaries and respond positively to that need; • Manage the balance between the need to offer risk and the need to keep children safe from harm; • Maximise the range of play opportunities; • Foster independence and healthy self-esteem; • Foster the child’s respect for others and offer opportunities for social interaction; • Foster the child’s well-being, healthy growth and development, knowledge and understanding, creativity and capacity to learn.

Supporting People in Tameside – 5 Year Strategy 2005-2010

The objectives contained within the Strategy include: Targets include: The Core Strategy and SA should seek to adequately address the key objectives contained within the Strategy. • Developing new services to meet identified strategic priorities; • Increasing the availability of services for homeless 16/17 year olds to reduce the use of bed and breakfast facilities; • Reconfiguring existing services to better meet strategic priorities; • Provision of accommodation for teenage parents • Completing the three year service review programme; • Assess the need for wet house provision for people with alcohol needs. • Researching unmet need.

B65

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Low Carbon Tameside: Sustainable Use of Resources Strategy 2010-20

This Strategy is the first Low Carbon Tameside Strategy. The To achieve each of the Low Carbon Tameside Priorities a series The Core Strategy and SA Framework should include policies/objectives launch of this strategy followed the Tameside Strategic of themed action plans have been created, and associated that promote the sustainable use of resources. Partnership’s agreement to sign up to the national 10:10 campaign targets have been agreed. These targets include a 30% to reduce our emissions by 10% during 2010/11. reduction in CO2 emissions by 2011/12. The Strategy identifies the following four priorities together with associated objectives: Reducing our environmental impact • To make more efficient use of energy and natural resources, and tackle fuel poverty • To reduce carbon emissions and develop a strategy for adapting to climate change • To reduce the impact of transport on our highways, reduce reliance on the car and encourage people to make more use of sustainable ways to travel, e.g. cycling and walking • To raise awareness of our impact on the environment amongst local people and businesses, and encourage a more sustainable approach to everyday life • To support Tameside’s businesses, organisations, community groups and residents in the transition to a low carbon economy • To adopt a sustainable approach to procurement and economic growth Making Tameside more attractive • To continue to maintain high quality parks and open spaces, creating public spaces that are valued by local communities, helping people improve their health and quality of life • To keep Tameside’s environment clean, attractive, healthy and safe • To ensure that new buildings in Tameside are attractive and of good quality, and are designed and built to minimise their impact on the environment • To preserve our industrial and cultural heritage and adopt a

B66

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements) sustainable approach to stewardship Protecting our natural world • To minimise pollution and sustain improvements in the quality of our air, water and landscape • To minimise waste production, reduce waste sent to landfill and to increase recycling rates • To conserve nature and provide habitats for a wide range of plant and animal species to flourish Developing Community Champions • To work with local people and businesses to identify and tackle environmental issues that concern them, expanding people’s influence, understanding, skills and abilities, and extending the social and business networks that bind communities in Tameside together • To work with local residents and businesses to create a local force of Green Champions to spread the message of reducing our carbon footprint and conserving our natural world, and provide people with help to achieve it Preparing for Climate Change • To understand the likely impact of climate change on Tameside’s built environment, natural environment and communities and communicate this across the borough • To address the risks of climate change via the Tameside Resilience Forum • To ensure that climate change is considered and addressed within all strategies and business plans across Tameside

B67

Key Objectives Relevant to Plan and SA Key Targets and Indicators Relevant to Plan and SA Commentary (how the Core Strategy and SA Framework should incorporate the documents requirements)

Supplementary Planning Documents and Development Briefs

• Employment Land SPD None identified. The Core Strategy must work in conjunction with these other documents to generate more positive outcomes. • Trees and Landscaping on Development Sites SPD • Developer Contributions SPD • Tameside Sustainable Design and Construction Guide • Brookbottom Mossley Development Brief • Ashton Town Centre SPD • Residential Design SPD • Draft Hyde Town Centre SPD • Hattersley and Mottram SPG • Mossley Mills SPG • ‘Wierside’ Central Stalybridge Development Brief

B68

Appendix C Key Baseline Information

Table C1 Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To improve access to good Percentage of population Current data gap. Ensure at least 30% of all No recent data available on quality, affordable and living in affordable housing. new homes are affordable. proportion of population resource efficient housing. living in affordable housing. (North West Regional Housing Statement).

Household Amenities Census 2001. Tameside 5.8% None identified. None identified. Levels of overcrowding. Hattersley 7.6%

Percentage of homes unfit DCLG Housing Strategy Tameside: 4.76% Provisional target to reduce The 07/08 level is a slight for use. Statistical Index (01/04/08). unfit housing stock to 7.1% reduction versus 2003 (from 4,654 to 4,473). (2004) by 2010, from a baseline of 9.7% in 1998. 2005 - 4.62 (North West Regional 2006 - 4.79 Housing Statement). 2007 - 4.79

Vacant private sector BVPI64 Tameside: 70 % Public Sector Agreement 2004/05 - 36 dwellings returned to seeks to reduce number of 2005/06 - 28 occupation. people living in non-decent private sector housing by 2006/07 - 56 90 by 2007. 2007/08 - 70

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Percentage of dwellings DCLG Housing Strategy Tameside: 2.04% Stockport: 3% Reduce regional vacancy 2004/05 - 4.44% empty. Statistical Index Oldham: 4% levels in existing housing 2005/06 - 4.62% stock to 3% by 2021. Manchester: 6% 2006/07 - 5.14% (North West Regional Housing Statement). 2007/08 - 3.97% 2008/09 – 4.40%

Number of additional Annual Monitoring Report 56 social / affordable Ensure at least 30% of all 2004/05 - 2 2009/10 dwellings completed affordable houses new homes are affordable 2005/06 - 44 completed. (c.f. Action for Sustainability). 2006/07 - 48 (North West Regional 2007/08 – 54 Housing Statement). 2008/09 - 102 2009/10 - 56

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Average electricity Current data gap for the DTI Energy Trends (Dec 2003: Experimental data - consumption per domestic North West and no data at 2004 version), Regional G Britain: 5,088 currently no time consumer (Kwh). a local level. Data for North Energy Consumption comparators, 2003 only. Total Wales: 4,312 West not produced as the Statistics. Link: Data for North West not number of metering points http://www.dti.gov.uk/energ Total Scotland: 5,218 produced due to the did not match sufficiently y/inform/regional_energy/in England number of metering points dex.shtml closely the number of do not match sufficiently households reported to be North East: 4,070 closely the number of living in the area. Y&H: 4,316 households reported to be living in the area. W Midlands: 4,717 East England: 5,068 Gtr London: 4,326 South East: 4,958 South West: 5,049

Numbers of registered and AMR 2009/10 2009/10 – Data not Increase 2004/05 - 1 ‘good’ completed BREEAM available 2005/06 - none (Building Research 2008/09 – 1 rated pass and 2006/07 - 1 very good, 1 Establishment 1 rated very good. 8 Environmental Assessment office rating of excellent dwellings certified for the and 1 office rating of good. Method) achieving Code of Sustainable ‘excellent’ or ‘very good’ Homes. 2007/08 - 4 rated good and status. 1 rated very good

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To enable people to enjoy Standardised mortality ratio Office of National Statistics, Tameside: 120 Salford: 131 Tameside Community A steady decrease in long life, free from disease 2010, males. (ONS) Deaths by local authority of Stockport: 94 Strategy: mortality ratio and limiting illnesses. usual residence, numbers 2009:122 Oldham: 120 Reduce the death rate for and standardised mortality under 75’s in Tameside. 2007:119 ratios (SMRs) by sex, 2010 Manchester: 132 registrations: in ‘Population Trends 120’. (2010)

Standardised mortality ratio As above. Tameside: 116 Salford: 118 Tameside Community A steady decrease in 2010, females. Strategy: mortality ratio Stockport: 96 Oldham: 111 Reduce the death rate for 2009:123 under 75’s in Tameside. 2007:126 Manchester: 121

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Male life Expectancy at Neighbourhood Statistics - Tameside (2007-09) : 75.7 Average UK: 78.3 Tameside Community Tameside life expectancy Birth (years). 2007-09 North West: 76.6 Strategy: has steadily increased but remains lower than the NW Manchester: 74 Reduce the death rate for under 75’s in Tameside. average. Oldham: 75.5 2005/07 = 75.3 Rochdale: 75.8 2004/06 = 74.9 Salford: 74.7 2003/05 = 74.5 Stockport: 78.1 2002/04 = 74.1

Female life Expectancy at As above. Tameside (2007-09): 79.7 Average UK: 82.3 As above. Tameside life expectancy Birth (years). (2007/09 average) North West: 80.8 has increased but remains lower than the NW average Manchester: 79.1 2005/07 = 79.6 Oldham: 79.9 2004/06 = 79.8 Rochdale: 80.3 2003/05 = 79.5 Salford: 79.6 2002/04 = 79.4 Stockport: 82.6

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Teenage conception rate Teenage Pregnancy Tameside MCD: 54.9 (2007 England: 41.7 Tameside Community 2006 - 54.4 under 18, per 1000. Statistics - DCSF figures) North West. 47 Strategy: 2005 - 59.7 (2009) Bolton MCD: 42.7 Reduce the number of 2004 - 53.9 pregnancies to girls under Bury MCD: 44.2 18 years old in Tameside to 2003 - 56.6 Oldham MCD: 46.7 at least the national 2002 - 52.4 average. Rochdale MCD: 48.7 Salford MCD: 62.4 Stockport MCD: 38.8 Trafford MCD: 38.9 Wigan MCD: 53.9

To develop strong and % of people who feel that Corporate Plan 2011-14 58.9% (2010) No comparators identified. 56% (2007) positive relationships their local area is a place between people from where people from different different backgrounds and backgrounds and communities. communities can live together harmoniously.

Numbers of racist incidents ODPM Best Value Tameside 92.56 No specific targets. per 1000 population. Performance Indicators 2003-04

Numbers of racist crimes Data Gap. No specific targets. per 1000 population.

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To regenerate rural areas. Number of new business Data gap. start-ups in rural areas.

No. of farm businesses Data gap. Data gap. None identified. Number of farms assisted assisted through and total amount of diversification support. support has increased since 2001/02.

No of organic farms www.magic.gov.uk January 2008 - 3278 ha of Slowly increasing in North registered. West. agricultural land in NW in conversion with 20,442 ha confirmed as organic. This accounts for 2.6% of total agricultural land. (3.7% England)

To improve access to and Numbers of cultural, Data gap. use of basic goods, sporting and leisure services and amenities. facilities.

% SOAs ranked within the DCLG, Indices of Tameside: 35.5% Bolton - 39.4% Reduce (2007) = 34% IMD in the 20% most Deprivation (2010) - Super Trafford - 10.9% Level in 2004 IMD was deprived. Output Area Data. Stockport - 12.1% 35.5% - not directly comparable. Rochdale - 43.7% Oldham - 40.3% Manchester - 65.3%

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

% of residents defined as Data gap. within a distance of 500 m (15 mins walk) of key local services.

% of households <4 km Data gap. from a post office.

% of households <4 km Data gap. from food shops.

% of households <4 km Data gap. from a GP.

% of households <4 km Data gap. from a primary school.

% of households <4 km Data gap. from a secondary school.

To reduce crime, disorder Offences per 1,000 British Crime Survey in Tameside (2009/10): 89.2 Reduce Tameside (2008/09): 101.4 and the fear of crime population. AMR 2009/10 (2007/08): 61.8

(2006/07): 70.1 (2005/06): 77.5 (2004/05): 75.4 For 2007/8 this is the number of British Comparator crimes per 1,000 residents. The figure for 2006/7 is the rate of comparator crimes in the British Crime Survey and is not comparable to the previous figure. Using the current methodology the figure was 75.4 crimes per 1,000 residents in 2004/5 and 85.4 crimes per 1,000 in 2003/4.

C10

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Recorded crimes per 1,000 HOME OFFICE - Crime in Tameside (2010-11): 8.54 High compared to most of Reduce Tameside 2009/10 = 8.14 population - burglary in a England & Wales. Manchester and to the 2008/09 = 10.86 dwelling. http://rds.homeoffice.gov.uk England and Wales average. /rds/crimeew0910.html Greater Man 7.09 Oldham: 7.56 Stockport 5.82 Rochdale: 9.70 Salford: 6.38 England and Wales: 4.71

Proportion of Adults who 2010 Citizen Panel Survey 97% feel safe in your local Increase feeling of safety Not directly comparable but feel safe in their neighbourhood during the 2010 seems to show a neighbourhood during the day positive trend. day and night 95% of you in your local 2007/08 – Daytime – very town centre during the day. safe – 40%. After Dark very safe – 6% 65% feel safe in local neighbourhood after dark 41% feel safe in local town centre after dark

To enable groups and LPI: % residents who feel 2009 Citizens Panel 79% of panel members No specific targets. Not directly comparable but communities to contribute that the council takes notice agree that District in 2007/08 34% of panel to decision making. of its residents' views. Assemblies are a good idea thought that the council takes notice of residents 62% think they make the views Council more aware of public opinion. In 2005/06 this value was 51%.

C11

LPI: % Percentage of 2010 Citizen Panel 45% of the panel believe No specific targets. None Identified: Community adults surveyed who feel they can influence Involvement in decision they can influence decisions affecting their making is a central part of decisions affecting their local area the Governments local area. sustainable communities agenda and work by agencies in the Borough to deliver this agenda may increase the ability of people to influence decisions.

C12

Table C1 (continued) Social Progress Which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Average time spent in Office of National Statistics. Data gap - data not North: 17 minutes Corporate Plan identifies a Percentage of people voluntary work and UK 2002 Time Use Survey. available at a local level. England: 16 minutes target of 28% of residents volunteering at least once a meetings. (2002). month: 42% of panel have given volunteering at least one a month. 2009 Citizen Panel unpaid help in the last 12 2008/09 27.5% months Corporate Plan 2011-14 2009/10: 23.6^

According to the Corporate Plan, 26.1%volunteered at least once in the previous 12 months

General Election turnout. Electoral Commission Tameside constituencies National Average: 65.4% None Identified Turnout is lower in average 58.3% Tameside than nationally http://www.electoralcommis sion.org.uk (2010) General election has increased on local and Tameside Metropolitan Borough national level compared to 2005 http://www.tameside.gov.uk 2005 Tameside = 53.0% /elections/results/parl10

Local Election turnout. Electoral Commission Tameside wards 58.7% National Average: 62.2% None Identified. Previous local election not http://www.electoralcommis available, but turnout in sion.org.uk (2010) 2010 was lower than the national average.

Tameside Metropolitan Borough http://www.tameside.gov.uk /elections/results/local10

C13

To provide education which % population with no NOMIS - official labour Tameside: 14.7 NW: 12.1 Reduce number with no Percentage with no qualifications. qualification. is accessible to and valued market statistics GB: 11.3 qualifications is steadily by all and produces (www.nomisweb.co.uk) decreasing achievements above the (Jan-Dec 2010) 2009 = 16.8 norm 2008 = 16.7 2007 = 17.9

% people of working age NMIS - official labour Tameside: 17.6 NW: 28.7 Increase number with Has been decreasing since highest qualifications. with: Highest qualification market statistics GB: 31.3 2008, compared to national attained NVQ level 4+ (www.nomisweb.co.uk) and regional percentages which have increased. (Jan-Dec 2010) Tameside 2009 = 18.8 2008 = 20.0 2007 = 19

C14

Table C2 Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

To protect places, Number of listed English Heritage Tameside: 314 North West: 25,485 None. Increase from 312 in 2004 buildings. landscapes and buildings (2011)/Tameside England: 375,273 of historic, cultural and Metropolitan Borough archaeological value. Council

No. of listed buildings at Heritage at Risk Register Six Listed Buildings at England = 1,857. NW = Reduce Remained static since risk. - North West 2011 Risk within Tameside 165 2008

Number of records on the 4 Sites and Monuments Record.

Percentage of records on 0 Reduce Number of records has the Sites and Monuments remained static since Record at risk. 2008.

Number of Scheduled Heritage at Risk Register 0 Reduce Number of records has Ancient Monuments at - North West 2011 remained static since Risk. 2008.

Number of registered There is one Registered Stamford Park, Historic Parks and Historic Park and Garden Stalybridge (Grade II). Gardens. in Tameside.

C15

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Number of conservation Tameside AMR 2009/10 There are nine Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. areas. conservation areas in Tameside.

Buildings of cultural or Recent examples The Council does not hold N/A N/A historic interest restored. identified by the Council this information. include: Ashton Central Library, Thorn House, Harewood Lodge and Portland Basin.

Access restored to Current data gap. The Council does not hold Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. buildings of cultural or this information. historic interest.

Number of visits Corporate Plan 1385 visits to/usages of England average: 1025 Increase Increasing to/usages of museums BVPI 170a, 170b museums per 1,000 visits to/usages of Tameside 2005/2006: per 1,000 population. population. museums per 1,000 1122 visits to/usages of (2007/08) population. Number of those visits in museums per 1,000 person per 1,000 Number of those visits in population. population: 1032 visits. person per 1,000 population: 510 visits.

The number of pupils BVPI 170c 10348 pupils. Unknown Unknown. Increasing visiting museums and (2007/08) galleries in organised school groups.

C16

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

To protect and improve National street litter index: BVPI 199 27.8% English average: 21.7% Unknown. Unknown. local environmental the proportion of relevant (2003/04) quality. land and highways that is assessed as having combined deposits of litter and detritus (e.g., sand, silt and other debris) across four categories of cleanliness.

% unacceptable levels of Corporate Plan 2011-14 2009/10: 5% (litter), 9% Unknown. Reduce to 5.5% (litter) Reduced level from litter and detritus. (detritus) and 7.0% (detritus) by 2006/07 of 1% (litter). 2014/15. (Best Value Performance Indicators BV199 (2003/04). The percentage of land in the local authority area that falls below an unacceptable level.

C17

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Percentage residents 2005-07 Citizens Panel. 2007/08 Unknown. 04/05 = 67% satisfied with local parks Tameside: 74% 05/06 = 67% and open spaces. 06/07 = 82% Note – Data not directly compatible

To protect and enhance Number of SSSIs. Natural England 3 SSSIs were identified - Unknown. Unknown. biodiversity. (2010) The Dark Peak and Huddersfield Narrow Canal and Hollinswood Branch Canal.

Percentage of SSSIs in Natural England 2009/10 = 7.45% of SSSIs Unknown. 95% of all SSSIs within an 2007 = 50% favourable or recovering (2010) in Tameside are area to be in a favourable 2007/8 figure not directly condition. condition. considered to be in a comparable to 2009/10 (AMR) favourable condition. (as 2009/10 figure refers (Refers to SSSI units only to SSSI units only within within Tameside rather Tameside rather than the than the whole SSSI) whole SSSI)

Percentage of land Tameside AMR 2009/10 1.54% Unknown. N/A Remain the same over at covered by statutory least the last 6 years nature conservation designations.

Percentage of land area www.magic.gov.uk 6% of land in Tameside is Aim to increase the level covered by woodland. covered by scrub and of cover but there are no woodland. specific targets.

C18

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Area under agreement www.magic.gov.uk Area of High Peak Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. under the Environmentally (2005) identified as being under Sensitive Area and an Environmentally Countryside stewardship Sensitive Area (approx agri-environment 1400 ha). schemes.

Population of wild birds. Current data gap. N/A N/A In the North West between 1994 and 2002, the North West population indices for all native bird species and for woodland birds showed an increase, while the index for farmland birds showed little change. In all cases, the indices were above the national trend, especially for woodland birds. (Defra 2004). Wild bird indicators for four UK Countries and for the English Regions 1994-2002. At a Borough level the number of wild birds have declined noticeably e.g. on upland meadows populations of lapwing have diminished.

C19

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Progress to BAP targets. Current data gap. N/A N/A N/A

To protect and improve Percentage of river Defra e-digest statistics. Biological water quality Improve Since 2005 there has the quality of inland stretches of good or fair Inland water quality. 2006 (2006): 72.6% Fair and been a decline in the waters. water quality. 14.9% poor and 12.6% biological quality of bad watercourses. Chemical water quality (2006): 60.1% good, 28.1% fair and 11.7% poor.

To protect and improve air Compliance with Current data gap. Unknown. Unknown. Detailed objectives are set Air quality in the UK is quality. regulated pollutants. for seven pollutants expected to continue to regulated by the Air improve, due to influences Quality Regulations 2000 such as cleaner and the Air Quality technologies and vehicles. (England) Amendment Regulations 2002.

C20

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Number of Air Quality Air Quality Management 1 AQMA in Tameside Unknown. Detailed objectives for Air quality in the UK is Management Areas Plan. around the M60 Ashton, seven pollutants are expected to continue to declared. A57/M67, A635, A57 regulated by the Air improve, due to influences Mottram and B6169 at Quality Regulations 2000 such as cleaner Audenshaw. and the Air Quality technologies and vehicles. (England) Amendment Regulations 2002. Where an area within the authority is identified as being at risk of exceeding an air quality objective, the local authority must declare an air quality management area.

To protect and improve Density of new dwellings. Unknown. Unknown. It should be noted that Density of new dwellings land quality. national housing density has recently shown overall targets have been increase in the UK. This scrapped. trend is predicted to continue as planning authorities come under increased pressure to support higher density development.

C21

Table C2 (continued) Effective Protection of the Environment

Objective Indicator Baseline data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

% of new homes built on AMR 2009/10 2009/10 = 73%. England average (2010): It should also be 08/09 = 77.3% 76% previously developed Land Use Statistics noted that the 07/08 = 75.3% land. NW (2010): 84% previous national (England) 06/07 = 80.9% http://www.communities.g target of 80% of ov.uk dwellings built on 05/06 = 84.9% previously developed land has 04/05 = 79.2% been scrapped.

Number of potentially Current data gap. N/A None. Tameside have a programme of contaminated land sites review to identify contaminated and number remediated. land. Level of contamination in Borough is unknown.

To protect and improve Number of Sustainable Current data gap. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Nationally, the number of SuDs water resources. Urban Drainage Systems schemes is predicted to increase (SUDS) included in new as developers come under development schemes. increasing pressure to make water efficiency savings in new development.

Water abstraction. Data on water abstraction Groundwater abstraction - Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. is held by the The Environment Agency Environment Agency but have reported some 45 not readily available. licensed groundwater There may be a charge. abstractions in Tameside Information on of which two thirds are for groundwater abstraction industrial, commercial and in Tameside Metropolitan public services usage, the Borough Contaminated remaining third being for Land Strategy agriculture http://www.tameside.gov.u There are no designated k/contaminatedland/strate source protection zones in gy/part5 the Borough

C22

Average household water United Utilities Company estimate of Unknown Reduce Tameside consumption. Tameside AMR (2009/10) average household water 2008/09: 135 l/head/day consumption for the United Utilities water 2007/08: 137l/head/day company supply area 2006/07: 140 l/head/day (which includes Greater Manchester): 2005/06: 150 l/head/day 150 l/head/day. Average household water consumption has decreased within Tameside and across the United Utilities Region.

C23

Table C3 Prudent Use of Natural Resources

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

To address the need to Number of planning Environment Agency – 12 Risk of flooding in the UK limit and adapt to climate applications objected to by High Level Target 12: is increasing. It is likely change. the Environment Agency Development and Flood that both the number of on flood risk grounds. Risk. people in danger from (2009/10) flooding and the costs of damage from floods will rise significantly. Overall in the UK, the proportion of applications considered by the Agency for flood risk to which it objects on flood risk grounds has remained fairly constant in the past few years. In Tameside in 2008 there were 16 objections compared to 12.

Percentage of properties Data Gap. Unknown. Jan 2008. NW 212,500 No comparator. No trend data. at risk of flooding. properties within FZ 2 of

which 140,000 are within FZ3

C24

CO2 emissions per capita. DECC Local and regional 2009 = 5.3 t CO2 UK = 7.4 t CO2 Reduce Tameside is decreasing CO2 emissions estimates NW = 7.5 t CO2 Target 2010/11: 5.2 tCO2 CO2 emissions per capita for 2005-2009 each year, low emissions http://www.decc.gov.uk Rochdale = 6.3 t CO2 per capita compared to Salford = 6.9 t CO2 other boroughs. Stockport = 5.6 t CO2 2008 = 6 t CO2 Manchester = 6 t CO2 2007 = 6.2 t CO2 2006 = 6.4 t CO2 2005 = 6.5 t CO2

C25

Table C3 (continued) Prudent Use of Natural Resources

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

To minimise the Energy efficiency - Audit Commission. Not available for In the UK there has been Tameside. requirement for energy average SAP rating for Best Value Performance a downward trend in both use, promote efficient local authority owned Indicators 2003-2004. primary and final energy energy use and increase buildings. intensity over the whole the use of energy from Indicator BV 63. period 1970-2000. This is renewable resources. partly due to energy efficiency savings. This trend is likely to continue due to factors such as improved building energy efficiency. (DTI (2000). Energy Efficiency in the UK 1990- 2000).

Electricity consumption. BERR 0.6 thousand tonnes of oil Manchester – 1.0 3% of energy Overall in the UK, the equivalent Estimates of non-gas, Oldham – 0.5 consumption in proportion of energy non-electricity and non Manchester is from consumed from renewable road transport fuels at a Rochdale – 0.5 renewable sources. sources is predicted to regional and local Stockport – 0.6 increase. authority level (2005) Trafford – 0.1

Energy generation from DECC - Regional Unknown. NW – 1,918.9 GWh 10% of electricity supplied Overall in the UK, the renewable sources. Renewable Statistics in the UK to come from proportion of energy renewable sources by generated from renewable 2010. (National Target). sources is predicted to increase.

C26

Table C3 (continued) Prudent Use of Natural Resources

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Energy consumption. DECC - Sub-national 2008 = 4,365 GWh Total in NW = 187651 2007: 4602 GWh energy consumption GWh statistics 2006: 4702 GWh Oldham = 4106 GWh 2005: 4888 GWh Manchester = 10351 GWh

Rochdale = 4854 GWh

To reduce the need to Length of new Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. travel. footpath/cycleway created.

Percentage of people Census (KS15). 15% England and Wales Tameside Community In the UK overall, it is average: 14.5% travelling to work by public (2001) Strategy: ‘Increase bus unlikely that the majority transport. use within Tameside’. of car commuting trips will transfer to the public transport system. (Commission for Integrated Transport (2003). Research Report: 10 Year Transport Plan, Second Assessment Report).

Percentage of public Census (KS17) 2001: England and Wales None. The long term trend in the averages: transport users owning a (2001) Tameside: 67% UK is one of increasing car or van. 69% car ownership. It is predicted that traffic will continue to increase.

C27

Table C3 (continued) Prudent Use of Natural Resources

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Distance travelled to work. Census (UV35) % of people travelling less England and Wales None. The long term trend in the (2001) than 10 km to work: average: 58% UK is one of increasing Tameside: 76% commuting distances.

Volume of freight (by Department for Transport. Data Gap. North West: 17,654 None identified. Decreased from 2008 = origin of goods) carried by Regional Transport million tonne Km. 21,403 road. Statistics (2008).

To ensure the sustainable Household waste Defra – Local Authority 343 kg Manchester = 410kg Reduce waste Decrease on 2008/09 = collected per capita. 367 kg management of waste, collected waste for Rochdale = 334 kg minimise its production, England The amount of waste and increase re-use, Stockport = 379 kg http://www.defra.gov.uk/st collected per household recycling and recovery atistics/environment/waste Oldham = 350 kg has fallen in recent years rates. /wrfg23-wrmsannual/ (e.g. due to bulky items no longer being collected free of charge), although the long term trend in the UK is increased production of overall volumes of waste.

Household waste Tameside AMR (2009/10) 33.71% England 39.7% Levels of recycling recycling and composting identified as increasing rate. 2008/09 = 28.8 2007/08 = 27.1 2006/07 = 24.3 2005/06 = 20.8 .

C28

Table C3 (continued) Prudent Use of Natural Resources

Objective Indicator Baseline Data Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend Sources

Household waste See above composting rate.

% of residents served a by BVPI 91 98% English average: 86% kerbside collection or (2007/08) within 1 km of a recycling centre.

Construction, demolition Unknown. Unknown. NW = 11,280,000 tonnes Reduce (WRAP) Nationally the volume of and excavation waste. generated by construction waste produced has and demolition increased with increasing economic prosperity. Current downturn may result in a reduction in waste arisings.

C29

Table C4 Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To establish a prosperous Business count Nomis Business 2009/10: 6,165 Manchester = 15,715 Unknown 2004.05: 5,860 borough that offers Demography: Enterprise Rochdale = 6,185 2005/06: 5,915 attractive opportunities to Births & Deaths 2006/07: 6,075 individuals, businesses and Stockport = 11,755 2007/08: 6,280 communities. Oldham = 6,485 North West = 236,095 England = 2,040,150

C30

Table C4 (continued) Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

Numbers of economic ONS Statistics: Business: Tameside: North West: Unknown Unknown sectors represented in the Local Units by Broad Agriculture, Forestry & Agriculture, Forestry & area (by enterprises). Industry Group Fishing – 50 (1%) Fishing – 10870 (4%) Production – 695 (11%) Production – 17075 (7%) Construction – 770 (12%) Construction -26970 (11%) Motor Trades -250 (4%) Motor Trades – 8380 (3%) Wholesale -385 (6%) Wholesale – 13305 (5%) Retail -860 (14%) Retail – 32030 (13%) Transport & Storage Transport & Storage (Including Postal) – 245 (Including Postal) – 8770 (4%) (3%) Accommodation & Food Accommodation & Food Services – 420 (7%) Services – 17515 (7%) Information & Information & Communication – 235 (4%) Communication – 11770 (5%) Finance & Insurance – 140 (2%) Finance & Insurance – 6975 (3%) Property – 180 (3%) Property – 9500 (4%) Professional, Scientific & Technical - 620 (10%) Professional, Scientific & Technical - 32010 (13%) Business Administration & Support Services – 370 Business Administration & (6%) Support Services – 17675 (7%) Public Administration & Defence – 55 (0.8%) Public Administration & Defence – 2335 (1%) Education - 150 (2%) Health – 330 (5%) Education - 6890 (3%) Health – 15600 (6%) Arts, Entertainment, Recreation and Other Arts, Entertainment,

C31

Services – 485 (8%) Recreation and Other Services – 18035 (7%)

C32

Table C4 (continued) Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

New employment sites AMR 2009/10. 2009/10 total gross Unknown. Unknown. 2004/05: 35,560m2 created, by size and employment floorspace 2005/06: 12,398m2 location. completed = Nil 2006/07: 23,668m2 2007/08: 22,663m2 2008/09: 28,739m2

1 To develop and exploit the Percentage of occupations ONS 2001 Figures - Tameside - 2001: Unknown. Unknown. borough’s knowledge base. 2.24% within ‘science and Oldham: 2% technology professional ‘ category. Stockport: 4%

New firms established in Data Gap. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. R&D sectors.

To exploit the growth Business count Nomis Business 2009/10: 6,165 Manchester = 15,715 Unknown 2004.05: 5,860 potential of business Demography: Enterprise Rochdale = 6,185 2005/06: 5,915 sectors. Births & Deaths 2006/07: 6,075 Stockport = 11,755 2007/08: 6,280 Oldham = 6,485 North West = 236,095 England = 2,040,150

1 Statistics by subject, ‘Occupation Groups (UV30)’.

C33

Table C4 (continued) Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To improve the Gross value added per Not available at a local Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Greater Manchester GVA competitiveness and head. level. per capita has grown in line productivity of businesses. 2009: with the UK trend.

Gtr Man: £47,722

Employment Land AMR 2009/10 2009/10 – 70.41 Unknown. Sufficient level to be 04/’05 = 92.32ha Available maintained 05/06 = 82.88ha 06/07 = 75.54ha 07/08 = 74.19ha 08/09 = 71.22ha

Gross weekly pay. Nomis 2010 North West: £467.0 Unknown. Unknown. Tameside £412.5 gross GB: £500.4 weekly pay.

C34

Table C4 (continued) Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To secure economic Percentage unemployment. Nomis. Tameside September 2011 NW: 4.4% Unknown. Follows national trends but inclusion. (JSA Claimants) = 4.9% GB: 3.9% has been consistently higher than both national and regional averages

Location of areas to high Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. value employment.

To develop and maintain a Percentages of jobs by Nomis Average 2010/11: North West (GB) Unknown. Tameside has historically healthy labour market. category2 . Soc 2000 major group 1-3: Group 1-3: 40.9% (44.8%) had a lower proportion of 33.7% group 1-3 occupations. Group 4-5: 21.4% (20.9%) Decline from 2007. Soc 2000 major group 4-5: Group 6-7: 17.8% (16.3%) 25.8% Group 8-9: 19.9 % (17.9%) Soc 2000 major group 6-7: 17.9% Soc 2000 major group 8-9: 22.5%

2 Soc 2000 major group 1-3: 1 Managers and senior officials, 2 Professional occupations, 3 Associate professional & technical. Soc 2000 major group 4-5: 4 Administrative & secretarial, 5 Skilled trades occupations. Soc 2000 major group 6-7: 6 Personal service occupations, 7 Sales and customer service occs. Soc 2000 major group 8-9: 8 Process plant & machine operatives, 9 Elementary occupations.

C35

Table C4 (continued) Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

Objective Indicators Baseline Data Sources Quantified Data Comparators Targets Trend

To develop strategic Road accidents per ‘000 APHO + DoH – 2009 2005-07 English Av = 54.3 Unknown. population. transport, communication Road injuries death – Manchester = 54.8 and economic infrastructure 33.5/10000 pop 2 4. Stockport: = 28.3

Numbers of roads suffering Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. Unknown. congestion.

C36

Appendix D Detailed Assessment Matrices

Scoring Key

Alignment Description Symbol

Major Positive Impact The option contributes significantly to the achievement of the objective. ++

Minor Positive Impact The option contributes to the achievement of the objective but not significantly. +

Neutral The option does not have any effect on the achievement of the objective. 0

Minor The option detracts from the achievement of the objective but not significantly. - Negative Impact Major The option detracts significantly from the achievement of the objective. -- Negative Impact No Relationship There is no clear relationship between the option and the achievement of the objective or the relationship is negligible. ~ The option has an uncertain relationship to the objective or the relationship is dependant on the way in which the aspect is managed. In addition, Uncertain ? insufficient information may be available to enable an assessment to be made.

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

1. To improve access a) Will it provide additional House prices in Tameside are relatively affordable (compared to Trafford, Manchester and Stockport) although the to good quality, affordable housing? Tameside Strategic Housing Market Assessment (SHMA) identifies a gross annual shortfall of 745 affordable affordable and b) Will it provide an appropriate dwellings, a large proportion of which is concentrated in Ashton (217 affordable dwellings per annum). Under this resource efficient mix of housing to meet option, residential development (and, therefore, affordable housing provision) would be prioritised in Ashton-under housing. residents’ needs? Lyne, thereby helping to address the significant affordable housing deficit in this area, as well as Hattersely, which as c) Will it reduce the number of part of the wider Longendale township has a gross demand for 42 affordable dwellings per annum. unfit and empty homes? However, it is not clear if development in these more urban areas would be on sites of a scale capable (due to issues surrounding viability) of delivering a significant proportion of affordable dwellings (it is noted that the SHMA recommends an affordable housing site threshold of 15 dwellings). There may also be increased competition for land in urban areas which could impact on viability of affordable housing provision (as land prices may be greater). Whilst it is expected that this option would provide an appropriate mix of housing to help meet needs within Ashton under-Lyne and Hattersely, it may result in a lack of new housing to meet demand (for both market and affordable housing) in other areas. In this context, the SHMA does identify an affordable housing shortfall across the Borough + + + with significant requirements in Hyde (177 affordable dwellings per annum) and Stalybridge (85). That being said, it is expected that some residential development would also be delivered in these areas under this option. In focusing residential development in strategic regeneration areas and on brownfield sites it is envisaged that this option will not bring forward a sufficient number/range of sites to meet the Borough’s projected 15 year housing supply. Further, the option may also limit the potential to deliver a suitable mix of housing to meet needs (as there is unlikely to be a sufficient range of sites brought forward for development). Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on improving access to good quality, affordable and resource efficient housing in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation: • Subject to viability considerations, consider adopting varying site size thresholds for affordable housing across the regeneration areas to meet local needs.

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Include policies within the Core Strategy which proactively encourage the development of affordable housing to meet local needs outside strategic regeneration areas. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek, where possible, to reduce the number of unfit and empty homes.

2. To enable people to a) Will it improve the health of There is potential for the construction of new development to have a short to medium term negative effect on the enjoy a long life, people living in the Borough? health and wellbeing of residents in close proximity to sites and along transport routes. Effects may include, for free from disease b) Will it promote healthy example, respiratory problems associated with construction traffic and dust and may be more pertinent in sensitive and limiting lifestyles? areas such as Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs) and those locations with pre-existing health issues. However, illnesses. c) Will it improve access to health these effects would only be temporary (i.e. for the duration of construction) and are not expected to be significant. facilities? Development within the identified strategic regeneration areas and particularly Ashton-under-Lyne is likely to reduce d) Will it reduce death rates and the need to travel by car and encourage walking/cycling as services and employment opportunities would be more negative health impacts in key physically accessible. This is expected to generate a positive effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. vulnerable groups? New residential development elsewhere in the Borough and in particular within Stalybridge may also increase the accessibility of prospective residents to the Pennine Fringe thereby encouraging recreational activities in the countryside. -/+ -/+ + Concentrating new residential development within the strategic regeneration areas and enabling the growth of core urban areas more generally will help ensure that prospective residents have easy access to health care facilities (by virtue of the close proximity of new development to these facilities or the benefit of good public transport connections). As part of wider regeneration initiatives, in the medium to long term this option may also maximise the potential for increased investment in existing and new facilities, particularly in Ashton-under-Lyne which is amongst, and is in close proximity to, the most health deprived areas nationally. However, there is a risk that increased demand from new residents may undermine the quality of existing facilities within these already health deprived areas. In addition, areas which are also health deprived but not explicitly prioritised for development (e.g. Stalybridge) may suffer from a lack of investment due to relatively lower levels of growth. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective although there may be some minor and localised negative effects associated with construction activities in the short to medium term.

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis health care provision, in liaison with local health care providers and by mapping provision against proposed development sites. • Subject to viability considerations, maximise contributions from new development towards health care and open space provision. This may be particularly important in ensuring that new development in regenerations areas where health care facilities are not easily accessible is adequately served. • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development.

3. To develop strong a) Will it improve people’s The Joint Strategic Health Needs Assessment (2009) highlights that BME communities mainly live in Ashton-under and positive perception of their local area Lyne and Hyde. By focusing new development in Ashton-under-Lyne, this option has the potential to promote relationships being a place where people community cohesion. This could be achieved by the development of a mix of housing types to meet specific local between people from different ethnic needs and through the provision of new facilities in locations that can be accessed by all members of the community. from different backgrounds get on well Enhancement of strategic regeneration areas more generally as well as other urban areas will also improve the overall backgrounds and together? quality of the local area which is expected to help create a sense of belonging, civic pride and wellbeing for all communities. members of the community. b) Will it create a sense of belonging and wellbeing for all + + + It should be noted that engagement on all options/policies that comprise the Core Strategy and subsequent members of the community? development proposals will be undertaken in accordance with the Council’s Statement of Community Involvement (SCI). Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • None identified.

4. To deliver urban a) Will it improve economic, By focusing new development in Ashton-under-Lyne (including the remaining Unitary Development Plan Development renaissance. social and environmental Opportunity Areas) and Hattersley and delivering growth within core urban areas more generally, this option will conditions in the most increase the provision of housing, jobs and new facilities in, or in close proximity to, some of the most deprived areas deprived areas? ++ ++ ++ of the Borough. This has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term. Notwithstanding this, those deprived areas both within and outside the core urban area not identified b) Will it improve the quality of as being strategic regeneration locations (e.g. Stalybridge) may suffer from some investment being drawn towards the built environment through

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term high standards of sustainable Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersely. design and construction of There is potential for new development to enhance the quality of the built environment and improve townscapes new and existing buildings? (subject to more detailed policies on design contained within the Core Strategy). This option is also expected to c) Will it improve townscapes and encourage the redevelopment of brownfield sites including vacant and derelict land by concentrating development urban centres? within core urban areas and adopting a town centre first approach to new retail and office uses. This is likely to significantly improve built form and the overall quality of the Borough’s main centres, particularly Ashton-under-Lyne. However, there is a danger that concentrating new development within core urban areas may lead to town cramming and a loss of urban green space. There is also the potential that this option could deliver development that adversely affects the character of the Borough’s older urban centres should new development be unsympathetically designed. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on urban renaissance.

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to protect urban green space and avoid town cramming. • Ensure that the Core Strategy sets out a strategic framework to preserve and enhance historic areas and promote high standards of new development.

5. To regenerate rural a) Will it support rural There is a risk that in concentrating growth in strategic regeneration areas and other core urban areas, opportunities areas. diversification? for addressing the needs of settlements located in the rural/urban fringe and other smaller scale settlements will be missed. This option has therefore been assessed as having a negative effect on this objective. b) Will it address rural needs?

c) Will it support sustainable food - - - and farming? Mitigation: • Consider how Core Strategy policies can promote rural regeneration. Options may include a specific rural areas policy which makes provision for affordable and market rural housing and employment.

6. To improve access a) Will it improve the provision of This option has the potential to improve the viability of existing shops, services and facilities particularly in Ashton to and use of basic shops or services within the under-Lyne and Hattersley in the medium to long term, commensurate with an increased local population that will be goods, services and main centres? + ++ ++ able to easily access the Borough’s main centres (thereby increasing potential spend and reducing loss of expenditure amenities. to competing centres). b) Will it improve access for

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term those with disabilities? It is anticipated that this option will encourage new retail provision within the Borough’s main centres and it is noted that a town centres first approach would be adopted to guide the location of new retail uses. This will be of particular c) Will it ensure the protection, benefit to Ashton-under-Lyne which is identified within the Tameside Retail Study (2010) as requiring additional creation and access to green comparison goods floorpsace in order for it to maintain its role and function as a sub-regional centre. As part of a spaces including access and holistic approach to regeneration, this option could also help improve the overall image of Ashton-under-Lyne and recreation in the Countryside Hattersley in the medium to long term which may attract shoppers and retailers, helping to revert an increasing in and around towns in the Borough? number of empty and older shops. Under this option there is also potential to fully realise the existing DOAs in Ashton town centre which could further enhance its image. In this respect, redevelopment of Cavendish Street/Old d) Will it improve access to skills Street/Henry Square presents an opportunity to realise the Council’s aspirations to revitalise the Ashton town centre and training for improving by providing high quality mixed used development. employment potential? This option seeks to avoid development within the countryside and prioritises the use of brownfield land, serving to e) Will it improve access to prevent the loss of greenfield sites and open spaces although a more concentrated pattern of development may result cultural facilities? in increased pressure on urban green space for development. There is potential to increase the provision of open spaces within the Borough’s main centres as part of new developments although this is subject to detailed policies on open space provision contained within the Core Strategy. Focussing any new cultural facilities in the core urban areas should also ensure that they are located in the most accessible locations. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the medium to long term with a positive effect likely to be felt in the short term.

7. To reduce crime, a) Will it reduce crime levels and The revitalisation of regeneration areas and, indirectly, improved job provision may discourage crime although this is disorder and the individuals’ fear of crime? currently uncertain. fear of crime. ? ? ? b) Will it promote design that discourages crime?

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term c) Will it help to reduce levels of Mitigation: anti-social behaviour? • Ensure that design policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to design out crime.

8. To enable groups a) Will it enable the community It is unclear how this option will enable groups and communities to contribute to decision-making. However, it should and communities to sector to contribute to and be noted that engagement on all options/policies that comprise the Core Strategy and subsequent development contribute to have influence in decision- proposals will be undertaken in accordance with the Council’s Statement of Community Involvement (SCI) and a decision-making. making? ? ? ? consultation plan which will seek to engage all community sectors including hard to reach groups. b) Will it identify and engage with hard to reach stakeholders? Mitigation: • None identified.

9. To provide a) Will it increase community Concentrating new residential development in strategic regeneration areas as well as other core urban areas is education which is access to, and involvement expected to increase the accessibility of prospective residents to schools and colleges by virtue of the proximity of accessible to all and with, schools and colleges? these areas to existing educational establishments and their good transport links. This option also has the potential to valued by all and increase the viability of existing educational facilities and services and to stimulate increased investment in new b) Will it increase the levels of produces facilities by generating demand (through the influx of new residents) and through developer contributions. participation and attainment in achievements above education? Any increased investment in educational facilities and services in Ashton-under-Lyne (which is amongst, and is in the norm. close proximity to, some of the most deprived areas nationally in terms of education) and other core urban areas suffering from high levels of education deprivation (e.g. Mossley) may help close the gap in educational attainment between deprived areas and the Tameside average. However, if not properly planned, there is a risk that + + + concentrating growth within this area could place pressure on existing educational services and facilities. This option is also unlikely to maintain or enhance of education provision in other areas of Tameside some of which may require investment and prioritising growth in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersely may draw investment from other core urban areas. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation:

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis educational need, in liaison with providers. • Maximise contributions from new development towards educational facilities.

10. To protect places a) Will it protect and/or enhance Ashton-under-Lyne and other areas that comprise the urban core contain a number of cultural heritage assets and enhance, site, features and areas of stemming in part from their role as important, historic mill towns. Concentrating development in these areas therefore landscapes and historical, archaeological and has the potential to adversely affect these assets both in the short term during associated construction activities (e.g. buildings of historic, cultural value / potential? as a result of vibration and emissions) and in the longer term once development is complete (e.g. due to the impact of cultural and new development on their setting). Development may also have a direct impact on cultural heritage features where it b) Will it help to conserve historic archaeological involves the loss of, or alteration to, assets. However, locating new development in close proximity to these assets will buildings through sensitive value. adaptation and re-use? increase the accessibility of prospective residents to them, generating a positive effect on this objective and, moreover, under this option there may be opportunities for heritage-led development which could serve to protect and c) Will it use architectural and enhance areas or buildings of historical, archaeological and cultural value. A good example of this would be the urban design to enhance the regeneration of the Portland Basin. local character and “sense of place” of development? This option is expected to encourage the redevelopment of brownfield sites (such as the existing DOAs in Ashton town centre) including vacant and derelict land which has the potential to significantly improve built form (subject to the d) Will it improve access to and specific requirements of detailed design policies contained within the Core Strategy). understanding of buildings and -/+ -/+ -/+ landscapes of historic/cultural Focusing new development within the Borough’s urban core is expected to help avoid significant adverse effects on value? landscape quality, particularly in the more rural parts of the Borough to the east. However, the option does include broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure e) Will it conserve and enhance some of which are located within the Green Belt. The development of these sites could adversely affect landscape the character and quality of the quality although until both the scale and type of development to be accommodated has been determined, this effect is landscapes in the Borough? uncertain. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed negative and positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to conserve and, where possible, enhance cultural heritage assets including by promoting heritage-led development.

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should promote high standards of architectural and urban design.

11. To protect and a) Will it protect and/or improve In the short to medium term, development in the strategic regeneration areas and other core urban areas may have an improve local the environment of town adverse effect on environmental quality as a result of the localised effects (e.g. emissions of noise and dust from plant environmental centres and other urban and traffic) associated with construction activities. However, any effects are likely to be temporary and are therefore quality. areas? unlikely to be significant although it is recognised that in sensitive areas effects may be more pronounced (e.g. Tameside’s AQMA). In the longer term, it is considered that this option has the potential to enhance environmental b) Will more trees and woodland be planted? quality principally through a reduction in car use and associated reductions in emissions to air and noise. By encouraging the reuse of brownfield sites, this option is also expected to help preserve existing open spaces, c) Will it reduce light and noise maintaining the environmental quality of regeneration and other core urban areas. In addition, there may be potential pollution? for new development to enhance the quality of the built environment by incorporating high quality landscaping and d) Will it comply with air quality open space (although this is subject to the specific requirements of detailed policies contained within the Core process and regulation? Strategy). However, there is a danger that concentrating new development within strategic regeneration areas may lead to town cramming and a loss of urban green space. e) Will it reduce emissions of greenhouse gases? The volume of greenhouse gas emissions associated with this option is in part dependent on the detailed Core -/+ -/+ + Strategy policies covering sustainable design as well as the scale of developments brought forward and competing priorities for developer contributions (vis-à-vis the viability of incorporating sustainable design techniques). However, it is expected that concentrating new residential development and some employment uses within strategic regeneration areas and the urban core will reduce the need to travel by car by ensuring good accessibility to public transport, employment opportunities and services and facilities which would have a positive effect in respect to this aspect of the objective. Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along the Metrolink extension may also serve to reduce emissions although it is noted that accessible locations may be taken to include Motorway corridors which, if not adequately served by public transport, could result in an increased reliance on the car. This option includes broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy infrastructure, the provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this objective in terms of greenhouse gas reduction. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective although in the short/medium term it is recognised that there may be potential for negative effects associated with construction activities.

D10

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of energy efficient design including, where appropriate, renewable energy provision. • Maximise contributions from new development towards open space provision. • Ensure that new economic development is located in close proximity to public transport. • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to protect urban green space and avoid town cramming.

12. To protect and a) Will it conserve and enhance Concentrating new development within strategic regeneration areas and the urban core will help encourage enhance habitats and species and development of brownfield land ahead of greenfield sites. Although it is recognised that in some cases brownfield land biodiversity. provide for the long-term can have significant biodiversity value, it is considered that, on balance, development of brownfield sites within urban management of natural areas will help minimise the risk of both direct (e.g. the loss of habitat) and indirect (e.g. noise and emissions) impacts habitats and wildlife? on habitats and species. However, this option does allow for some economic development in other accessible locations, which may be outside the Borough’s main centres, and includes broad locations with the potential for b) Will it improve the quality and development of decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure. There is a risk therefore that this extent of designated and non- designated sites? approach may encourage some development on greenfield sites (although it is not always implicit that greenfield sites will have a higher biodiversity value than brownfield) which could have a negative effect in relation to this objective c) Will it provide areas of green (e.g. due to the direct loss of habitat or adverse impacts such as noise and emissions associated with the construction infrastructure? + -/+ -/+ and occupation of new development). d) Will it provide opportunities to Subject to the findings of the HRA, locating development within strategic regeneration areas and the urban core is enhance the environment and expected to avoid any direct impact on the Peak District Moors Special Protection Area (SPA) and the South Pennine create new conservation Special Area of Conservation (SAC). However, development within some urban areas (e.g. Stalybridge) would be assets (or restore existing within relative close proximity to the SPA/SAC as well as several UK BAP Priority Habitats which could increase wildlife habitats)? recreational pressures on these assets in the medium to longer term. There may also be effects on the Borough’s e) Will it bring nature closer to SSSIs most notably the Huddersfield Narrow Canal and Hollinwood Branch Canal and some of the Borough’s Local people, especially in the most Nature Reserves although this is largely dependent on the exact location of new development. urbanised areas? There may be opportunities as part of new development schemes to enhance existing, or incorporate new, green infrastructure which could potentially have a significant positive effect on this objective by improving the quality and extent of habitat and increasing accessibility of both existing and prospective residents to such assets. However, this

D11

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term is dependent on the detailed policies contained within the Core Strategy and the competing priorities for developer contributions. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective however, in the medium to long term there is potential for negative effects on the Borough’s biodiversity assets primarily due to recreational pressures arising from new development.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should seek to avoid negative effects on Tameside’s biodiversity assets and identify opportunities for enhancing their quality where appropriate. • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets, closely linked with existing and new development. • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land for employment related uses.

13. To protect and a) Will it improve the quality of It is anticipated that this option will not have a negative effect on water quality. This conclusion is however dependent improve the quality waterbodies? on the specifics of site location and eventual use and it is expected that project specific mitigation would be of controlled waters. implemented for each development which would nullify any adverse effects. b) Will it support sustainable urban drainage? New development will increase water resource use both in the short term during construction and in the longer term c) Will it reduce water once development is complete. However, until the volume of new development has been determined the impact on consumption? water resource availability is uncertain. ? ? ? Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of water efficiency. • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy require, where appropriate, new development to incorporate measures to maintain/improve water quality. Such measures may include, for example, sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS).

D12

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

14. To protect and a) Will it help to promote the wise Focusing new residential development within the strategic regeneration areas and the urban core is expected to help improve landscape use of land by minimising avoid significant adverse effects on landscape quality, particularly in the more rural areas of the Borough to the east. character and development on Greenfield However, the option does include broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy and flood quality. sites? risk management infrastructure some of which are located within the Green Belt. The development of these sites b) Will it help to reduce the could adversely affect landscape quality although until both the scale and type of development to be accommodated has been determined, this effect is uncertain. amount of degraded and underused land? This option will encourage the use of brownfield land thereby minimising development on greenfield sites. It is envisaged that this option would not result in the release of any Green Belt land for new development with the c) Will it reduce land contamination? exception of land for flood risk management and decentralised energy infrastructure as well as sites currently identified as Major Developed Sites in the Green Belt in the adopted UDP (Policy OL3). Concentrating new d) Will it promote the use of development on brownfield land will help reduce the volume of degraded and underused land within the Borough previously developed land? ++ ++ ++ whilst bringing forward brownfield sites may also require remediation works thereby reducing land contamination (although this could increase costs associated with development and therefore the viability of sites). This option does allow for some economic development in other accessible locations which may be outside the Borough’s main centres. There is a risk therefore that this approach may encourage employment related development on greenfield sites which could have a negative effect in relation to this objective although the scale of greenfield development is unlikely to be significant. Overall, this option is expected to have a significant positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land.

15. To ensure the a) Will it raise awareness of It is unclear how this option will raise awareness of resource depletion or promote the use of recycled and secondary prudent use of resource depletion? materials. However, by encouraging development on brownfield land it is expected that this option will help to natural resources promote the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure which is likely to have a positive effect in relation to and the sustainable b) Will it promote the use of sustainable resource use. recycled and secondary + + + management of Mitigation: existing resources. materials? c) Will it promote the re-use of • Core Strategy policies relating to sustainable design should encourage the use of recycled and secondary existing buildings and long life materials in new development.

D13

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term in new buildings?

16. To address the need a) Will it protect Tameside from The Tameside Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA) (2011) highlights that the risk of fluvial flooding in the to limit and adapt to climate change impacts? Borough is generally low although under this option some new residential and employment development may be climate change. located on land close to the River Tame, some of which is designated as Flood Zone 3. There is also a wide b) Will it minimise the risk of distribution of areas at risk of surface water flooding including Droylsden, Ashton-under-Lyne, Denton, Hyde and flooding from rivers and Audenshaw. The loss of any greenfield land particularly in these areas could lead to an increased risk of flooding (as watercourses to people and property? a result of an increase in impermeable surfaces) although it is expected that any such risks will be minimised as this option seeks to encourage the reuse of brownfield sites. Moreover, it can be reasonably assumed that new c) Will the proposal increase development proposals which may result in an increase in flood risk will be accompanied by a Flood Risk Assessment green infrastructure across the (FRA) and incorporate suitable flood alleviation measures thereby minimising the risk of flooding further. This option Borough? also includes broad locations with the potential for development of flood risk management infrastructure. This is likely d) Will it increase the proportion to help minimise the risk of flooding from new development and protect Tameside from climate change impacts of energy both purchased and although until specific details are made available as to the type of measures to be implemented, effects on this aspect generated from renewable and of the objective remain uncertain. sustainable sources? + + + There may be opportunities as part of new development proposals to enhance existing, or incorporate new, green e) Will it maximise the production infrastructure which could potentially have a positive effect on this objective by providing space for flood waters to flow and/or use of renewable through and additional areas for future flood storage. However, this is dependent on policies contained within the energy? Core Strategy, the competing priorities for developer contributions and details of site specific proposals. f) Will it increase energy This option does include broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy infrastructure, the efficiency? provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this aspect of the objective. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Taking into account the extent of existing flood risk in the Borough, the expectation that this option will generally avoid development of greenfield sites (and an assumption that proposals will be accompanied by a FRA/incorporate suitable mitigation measures) together with the potential for provision of flood risk management and decentralised energy infrastructure, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

D14

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets to provide opportunities for flood storage. • Core Strategy policies should seek to promote as close to greenfield runoff rates as possible on brownfield development. • The Council should explore the potential for community renewable energy schemes and include a presumption in favour of renewable energy development.

17. To reduce the need a) Will it encourage a modal shift Concentrating new residential development and retail/office uses in strategic regeneration areas and the urban core is to travel. to more sustainable forms of expected to reduce the need to travel by car as development is likely to be in close proximity to services and facilities travel? and/or well connected to the public transport network. Development within these areas may also help to maintain existing, and (potentially) stimulate investment in, public transport provision. In the longer term, and as part of the b) Will it reduce traffic volumes and congestion? wider revitalisation of the Borough’s centres (which this option seeks to achieve), there may be a reduction in out- commuting to access employment and services (including retail) which could have a more significant positive effect on c) Will it improve accessibility to this objective. work by public transport, walking and cycling? Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along Metrolink extensions will reduce car use by encouraging employees to use public transport although it is noted that accessible locations may be taken to d) Will it reduce road traffic include motorway corridors which, if not adequately served by public transport, could result in an increased reliance on accidents? + + ++ the car. There is a risk that an approach which seeks to concentrate development may result in increased congestion both in the short term during construction and in the longer term once premises are occupied with negative effects potentially including driver delay and an increase in road traffic accidents. Overall, this option is expected to help encourage a modal shift to more sustainable forms of transport and reduce the need to travel. It has therefore been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should positively promote walking and cycling as part of new developments. • Ensure that sites identified for employment use within motorway corridors are accessible by transport modes

D15

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term other than private car.

18. To ensure the a) Will it help minimise the New development will increase the volume of waste arising from new sites both in the short term during construction sustainable production of waste? and in the longer term once dwellings/premises are occupied although the magnitude of any effect on this aspect of management of the objective is dependent on the scale of development to be accommodated and the volume of waste b) Will it improve domestic waste reused/recycled. waste, minimise its recycling? production, and It is not clear how the option will actively improve domestic waste recycling or reduce the amount of residual waste to c) Will it reduce the amount of increase re-use, landfill/arisings from construction and demolition. recycling and residual waste to landfill? Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain effect on this objective. recovery rates. d) Will it reduce waste arising ? ? ? from construction and demolition? Mitigation: • The provision of recycling facilities within new developments should be a component of Core Strategy design and/or waste management policies. • The reuse of construction and demotion wastes on site should be promoted.

19. To establish a a) Will it help to deliver a zero By focusing new residential development within strategic regeneration areas and the urban core, this option has the prosperous Borough carbon economy? potential to help improve the vitality and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres in the medium to long term. that offers attractive This reflects the assumption that prospective residents will be able to easily access the centres’ shops and services b) Will it enhance and develop opportunities to thereby increasing spend and reducing loss of expenditure to competing centres. It is also anticipated that this option the economic potential of town individuals, will encourage new retail and office provision within town centres and, as part of a holistic approach to regeneration, centres? businesses and may also improve the overall image of the Borough’s main centres attracting shoppers and retailers and helping to communities. c) Will it provide, or contribute to, + + + revert an increasing number of empty and older shops. the availability of a balanced This option will help to ensure that housing and new facilities are located in the most deprived areas, particularly portfolio of employment sites? Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersley. This has been assessed as having a positive effect on this aspect of the objective d) Will it help to diversify the in that increasing population densities should support existing local businesses. Notwithstanding this, those deprived economy? areas both within and outside the core urban area not identified as being strategic regeneration locations (e.g. e) Will it prevent the loss of local Stalybridge) may suffer from some investment being drawn towards Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersely.

D16

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term businesses? Focusing economic development in accessible locations is expected to help reduce levels of deprivation as jobs created will be accessible to the most deprived communities. That being said, the extent to which job creation is f) Will it help to reduce levels of deprivation? locally significant will depend on the type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) and the recruitment policies of prospective employers. There is also a risk that focusing development in accessible locations (such as g) Will it support the development along the Metrolink extension) may not benefit other centres or areas. of green industries? This option does not specify the volume or type of employment land to be provided over the plan period which is likely h) Will it encourage investment in to be covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. Consequently, the effect of Research and Development this option on employment land supply, economic diversification, support to green industries and investment in and in emerging technologies? research and development is to some extent uncertain. However, whilst the option is likely to result in the provision of i) Will it increase the economic new sites for employment related development, there is a risk that in not providing a sufficient supply of housing land benefit (e.g. heritage led to meet the Borough’s projected 15 year supply there may be increased pressure on existing employment sites from regeneration, tourism, residential development. Further, in focusing new economic development towards existing transport corridors and on environmental economy, brownfield sites this option may limit economic growth by not providing a suitable range of employment sites. cultural economy) derived from Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective. the historic environment?

Mitigation: • None identified.

21. To secure economic a) Will it meet the employment This option is expected to deliver employment related development within, or well accessible to, those areas which are inclusion. needs of local people? most deprived and where unemployment rates are high. This has been assessed as having a potentially significant + + + positive effect on this objective although the magnitude of this effect is to some extent dependent on the type of jobs b) Will it reduce unemployment levels? created (in the context of the local labour market) as well as the recruitment policies of prospective employers. There is also a risk that focusing economic development in locations such as those along the Metrolink extension or at

D17

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term c) Will it improve the physical motorway corridors may not benefit those communities not in close proximity to these transport nodes and that those accessibility of jobs through deprived areas both within and outside the core urban area not identified as being strategic regeneration locations the location of sites and (e.g. Stalybridge) may suffer from some investment being drawn towards Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersely. transport links close to areas As set out under the assessment of this option against SA Objective 19, whilst the option is likely to result in the of high unemployment? provision of new sites for employment related development (and therefore increase local employment opportunities), d) Will it promote heritage-led there is a risk that in not providing a sufficient supply of housing to meet the Borough’s projected 15 year supply there regeneration? may be increased pressure on existing employment sites from residential development which could result in the loss of employment land. Further, in focusing new economic development towards existing transport corridors and on brownfield sites this option may limit economic growth (and therefore the potential extent of employment opportunities generated) by not providing a suitable range of employment sites. The identified regeneration areas and other core urban areas contain a number of cultural heritage assets. Concentrating development in these areas therefore has the potential to capitalise on this strong heritage to drive regeneration. However, the extent to which this is realised will be dependent on the provisions contained within the more detailed economic based Core Strategy policies and site specific proposals. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should actively seek to protect, where appropriate, existing employment sites.

22. To develop and a) Will it provide better paid and Option 1 is expected to deliver employment related development within, or well accessible to, those areas which are maintain a healthy higher quality jobs? most deprived and where unemployment rates are high. This has been assessed as having a positive effect on this labour market. objective although the magnitude of this effect is to some extent dependent on the type of jobs created (in the context b) Will it increase employment of the local labour market) as well as the recruitment policies of prospective employers. Notwithstanding this, those opportunities within or deprived areas both within and outside the core urban area not identified as being strategic regeneration locations accessible to the most (e.g. Stalybridge) may suffer from some investment being drawn towards Ashton-under-Lyne and Hattersely. deprived areas? + + + c) Will it help to diversify the This option does not specify the volume or type of employment land to be provided over the plan period which is likely economy of the Borough? to be covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. Consequently, the effect of this option on the provision of high quality jobs and economic diversification is to some extent uncertain. That being said, there is a risk that in not providing a sufficient supply of housing land to meet the Borough’s projected 15 year supply there may be increased pressure on existing employment sites from residential development which could result

D18

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term in the loss of employment land (and jobs). Further, in focusing new economic development towards existing transport corridors and on brownfield sites this option may limit economic growth/diversification (and therefore the potential extent of employment opportunities generated) by not providing a suitable range of employment sites. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should seek to protect key employment sites from redevelopment by non-employment uses.

23. To develop strategic a) Will it reduce traffic congestion Concentrating new residential development in Tameside’s strategic regeneration areas and economic development in transport, and improve safety for road accessible locations is expected to help reduce the need to travel by car which in-turn will reduce traffic congestion communication and users? and improve road safety. In the longer term, and as part of the wider revitalisation of the Borough’s centres (which this economic b) Will it increase the level of option seeks to achieve), there may be a reduction in out-commuting to access employment and services (including infrastructure. investment in and use of rail retail) which could have a more significant positive effect on this objective. However, there is potential that a policy of and water freight transport? concentration (as opposed to dispersal) may result in localised congestion both in the short term during construction and in the longer term once dwellings and premises are occupied with negative effects including driver delay and road c) Will it improve transport links, traffic accidents although overall, there is expected to be a net benefit in relation to this aspect of the objective. ICT, homeworking, and green travel plans? Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along the Metrolink extension and rail network nodes is expected to increase demand for these public transport services. In-turn, this may help to maintain existing, + + + and (potentially) stimulate investment in new, services. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Consider the potential of water freight transport in identifying locations for new development. • Encourage the preparation of green travel plans as part of new development proposals. • Consider how policies contained within the Core Strategy can encourage home working (e.g. through the provision of high speed broadband).

D19

Strategic Spatial Option 1: Concentrate growth in the core urban areas, specifically in regeneration areas, with employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

D20

D21

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

1. To improve access a) Will it provide additional The Tameside SHMA (2008) identifies that across the Borough, demand for all types of housing (with the exception of to good quality, affordable housing? terraced houses) exceeds supply (particularly for detached houses, bungalows and flats/apartments and properties affordable and b) Will it provide an appropriate with one and four or more bedrooms). Under this option, residential development would be dispersed within the wider resource efficient mix of housing to meet urban area, helping to meet Borough-wide housing needs, including for affordable housing. housing. residents’ needs? In comparison to Spatial Option 1, there is less certainty that the delivery of affordable housing will be achieved in the c) Will it reduce the number of areas identified as having most need (as this option does not specifically target growth in regeneration areas and the unfit and empty homes? urban core). However, the option does still aim to locate residential development within urban areas (where there are areas of high deprivation) and a more dispersed approach may enable housing delivery on larger sites and in more viable locations (due to reduced land prices), serving to increase the viability of affordable housing delivery. Under this option there is also potential to fully realise the existing Unitary Development Plan (UDP) Development Opportunity Areas (DOAs) which could deliver a significant proportion of new residential development in those areas where demand for affordable housing is greatest (namely, Ashton, Hyde and Stalybridge). This may also provide + + + opportunities to replace/refurbish existing unfit and empty homes. Overall, this option provides more scope for delivery of affordable housing and a broader mix of market housing in a wider range of locations across the Borough (relative to Spatial Option 1) and this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective. However, delivery should be balanced against housing need and in this respect this option is not expected to provide sufficient housing to meet the projected housing needs of the Borough over the plan period.

Mitigation: • The delivery of affordable housing should be in areas identified as having most need (sites on the periphery of urban and rural areas are unlikely to have as significant a demand for affordable housing as urban centres). • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek, where possible, to reduce the number of unfit and empty homes.

2. To enable people to a) Will it improve the health of As identified under Spatial Option 1, there is potential for the construction of new development to have a short to enjoy a long life, people living in the Borough? medium term negative effect on the health and wellbeing of residents in close proximity to sites and along transport free from disease b) Will it promote healthy -/+ -/+ + routes. However, dispersing new residential development across the wider urban area may serve to keep levels of and limiting lifestyles? disturbance below thresholds were they could have a significant adverse effect on human health. illnesses. c) Will it improve access to health Dispersing residential development across the wider urban area is expected to help ensure that prospective residents

D22

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term facilities? have easy access to health care facilities although there is potential that for some sites, particularly towards the urban d) Will it reduce death rates and fringe, health care facilities will be relatively inaccessible. The potential for this option to bring forward and fully realise negative health impacts in key the DOAs is also expected to encourage mixed-use development within or in close proximity to the Borough’s main vulnerable groups? centres including Ashton, Droylsden, Mossley,Stalybridge and Hyde, further reducing the need to travel by car. This is expected to generate a positive effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. As with Spatial Options 1 and 3, new development may support increased investment in existing and new facilities and in dispersing residential development there may be scope for Borough-wide investment albeit at a reduced scale to Spatial Option 3. Relative to Spatial Option 1, dispersing residential development may reduce pressure on existing health facilities and services although there is a risk that new investment could be drawn away from the Borough’s most deprived wards thereby maintaining or increasing existing levels of health deprivation. This option seeks to focus new employment provision in accessible locations such as town centres, motorways and key transport corridors. This will reduce the need to travel by car and may encourage walking/cycling as services and employment opportunities would be more physically accessible. This is expected to generate a positive effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. However, locating new development in suburban areas may lead to greater distances of commuting to local services and facilities and more dependency on car travel (as opposed to walking/cycling). This option may result in the loss of protected green space/open space within settlements for residential and employment development which may reduce accessibility to recreational opportunities and generate an adverse effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. Further, there is also a risk that in bringing forward some DOAs this option will result in the loss of open space and indoor sports facilities (for example, Market Street/Sedgley Buildings/Fairfield Locks DOA includes public open space and a swimming pool). However, the scale of greenfield development is expected to be very limited and lower than that envisaged under Spatial Option 3. There is also potential for new residential development to support and incorporate the provision of new facilities whilst more dispersed growth toward the urban fringe may increase accessibility to the countryside for prospective residents. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective although there may be some minor negative effects associated with construction activities in the short to medium term.

Mitigation: • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis health care provision, in liaison with local health care providers and by mapping provision against proposed development sites.

D23

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development. • Ensure that any loss of open space/recreational facilities is mitigated through replacement provision/opportunities are sought to enhance provision subject to viability considerations.

3. To develop strong a) Will it improve people’s The Joint Strategic Health Needs Assessment (2009) highlights that BME communities mainly live in Ashton-under and positive perception of their local area Lyne and Hyde. relationships being a place where people Spatial Option 2 encourages a more dispersed approach to development which potentially does not specifically focus between people from different ethnic development within areas of greatest diversity. This move away from a more concentrated approach to development from different backgrounds get on well (which is promoted under Spatial Option 1) provides less certainty as to whether community cohesion can be more backgrounds and together? readily achieved. communities. ? ? ? b) Will it create a sense of Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain outcome on this objective. belonging and wellbeing for all members of the community? Mitigation: • None identified.

4. To deliver urban a) Will it improve economic, social Under this option growth would not be concentrated in the urban core and, therefore, the extent to which development renaissance. and environmental conditions in would improve socio-economic and environmental conditions in the Borough’s most deprived areas may be reduced the most deprived areas? relative to Spatial Option 1. That being said, this option would provide new employment opportunities in accessible locations within the town centres (including the most deprived areas) and in close proximity to key transport networks b) Will it improve the quality of the which may have a positive effect on this objective. built environment through high standards of sustainable design There is potential for new employment related development and any residential development within the urban centres and construction of new and + + + (including the DOAs) to enhance the quality of the built environment and improve townscapes (subject to more existing buildings? detailed policies on design contained within the Core Strategy). However, there is also the potential that this option c) Will it improve townscapes and could deliver development that adversely affects the character of the Borough’s older urban centres should new urban centres? development in these areas be unsympathetically designed Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on urban renaissance.

D24

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • None identified.

5. To regenerate rural a) Will it support rural This option does not contain any specific proposals for rural areas however, by promoting a more dispersed pattern of areas. diversification? development including towards the urban fringe, this option may help address the needs of settlements located in the more rural areas of the Borough although any effect is unlikely to be significant. b) Will it address rural needs? Overall, this option has been assessed as having a neutral effect on this objective. c) Will it support sustainable food and farming? 0 0 0 Mitigation: • Consider how Core Strategy policies can promote rural regeneration. Options may include a specific rural areas policy which makes provision for affordable and market rural housing and employment.

6. To improve access a) Will it improve the provision of Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 3, this option has the potential to improve the viability of existing shops, services and to and use of basic shops or services within the facilities in the medium to long term, commensurate with an increased local population that will be able to easily goods, services and main centres? access the Borough’s main centres (thereby increasing potential spend and reducing loss of expenditure to competing amenities. centres). The option also seeks to encourage more employment opportunities within accessible locations such as b) Will it improve access for those with disabilities? town centres which may encourage new retail provision and it is noted that a town centres first approach would be adopted to guide the location of new retail and office uses. Under this option there is also potential to fully realise the c) Will it ensure the protection, existing DOAs. This could significantly improve retail offer as well as the overall quality of the Borough’s town centres creation and access to green in the medium to long term which may attract shoppers and retailers, helping to revert an increasing number of empty spaces including access and + -/+ -/+ and older shops. For example, redevelopment of Cavendish Street/Old Street/Henry Square presents an opportunity recreation in the Countryside in to realise the Council’s aspirations to revitalise the Ashton town centre by providing high quality mixed used and around towns in the development. Borough? Option 2 recognises that greenfield sites will need to be considered to achieve the Borough’s housing and d) Will it improve access to skills employment requirements over the plan period and although there will be no strategic release of greenfield land under and training for improving this option, there may be pressure to release some open space/ greenfield sites which could have a negative effect on employment potential? this aspect of the objective in the medium to long term. That being said, there is also potential to increase the e) Will it improve access to provision of open spaces within the Borough’s main centres as part of new developments although this is subject to cultural facilities? detailed policies on open space provision contained within the Core Strategy.

D25

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Overall, the performance of the option against this objective is mixed. It can be assumed that access to services and amenities will improve over the plan period, however it needs to be recognised that pressure will be felt on greenfield sites and open space within urban areas in the medium to long term to deliver residential and employment development.

Mitigation: • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development. • Consider how policies within the Core Strategy can improve access for those with disabilities. • Ensure that any loss of green space is mitigated through replacement provision/opportunities are sought to enhance provision subject to viability considerations. Consider introducing the concept of green infrastructure.

7. To reduce crime, a) Will it reduce crime levels and New employment related development and the revitalisation of the Borough’s urban centres may discourage crime disorder and the individuals’ fear of crime? although this is currently uncertain. fear of crime. b) Will it promote design that Mitigation: discourages crime? ? ? ? • Ensure that design policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to design out crime. c) Will it help to reduce levels of anti-social behaviour?

8. To enable groups a) Will it enable the community It is unclear how this option will enable groups and communities to contribute to decision-making. However, it should and communities to sector to contribute to and have be noted that engagement on all options/policies that comprise the Core Strategy and subsequent development contribute to influence in decision-making? proposals will be undertaken in accordance with the Council’s SCI and a consultation plan which will seek to engage decision-making. all community sectors including hard to reach groups. b) Will it identify and engage with ? ? ? hard to reach stakeholders? Mitigation: • None identified.

D26

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

9. To provide a) Will it increase community Dispersing residential development across the Borough’s wider urban areas but focussed on accessible locations is education which is access to, and involvement expected to help ensure that prospective residents are able to easily access schools and colleges. However, there is accessible to all and with, schools and colleges? potential that development, particularly towards the urban fringe, could suffer from a lack of accessibility to higher order educational facilities. valued by all and b) Will it increase the levels of produces participation and attainment in This option may help to avoid placing increased pressure on existing educational facilities in those locations where achievements above education? facilities are nearing capacity by distributing residential development (and therefore demand for facilities) across the the norm. Borough. Further, new development also has the potential to increase the viability of existing educational facilities and services and to stimulate increased investment in new facilities by generating demand (through the influx of new residents) and through developer contributions. However, distributing development across the Borough’s urban area + + + may undermine benefits associated with economies of scale and could draw investment away from Tameside’s most deprived areas thereby maintaining or increasing existing levels of education deprivation. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation: • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis educational need, in liaison with providers. • Maximise contributions from new development towards educational facilities.

10. To protect places a) Will it protect and/or enhance Compared to Spatial Option 1, this option is likely to create less pressure on those cultural heritage assets which exist and enhance, site, features and areas of within the Borough’s centres by dispersing growth across the wider urban area. However, the option does potentially landscapes and historical, archaeological and encourage future development towards the Pennine Fringe, an area which is recognised of being of historic buildings of historic, cultural value / potential? conservation importance within the Borough. There is potential for increasing accessibility to the historic environment cultural and b) Will it help to conserve historic and opportunities may be generated for heritage-led redevelopment which could serve to protect and enhance areas archaeological buildings through sensitive -/+ -/+ -/+ or buildings of historical, archaeological and cultural value. However, it is assumed that a more dispersed approach to value. adaptation and re-use? development will limit these opportunities. Development in the Borough’s main urban centres is expected to significantly improve built form. The DOAs in c) Will it use architectural and particular are characterised as suffering from a combination of one or more of the following: underused/run down urban design to enhance the premises; derelict/vacant land or buildings; unwelcoming public spaces; poor access. As such, this option presents an local character and “sense of place” of development? opportunity to revitalise parts of the Borough main centres through comprehensive redevelopment schemes. However, there is a risk that in dispersing new development more widely across the Borough, these opportunities may

D27

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term d) Will it improve access to and not be fully realised. understanding of buildings and Like Spatial Options 1 and 3, the option does include broad locations with the potential for development of landscapes of historic/cultural decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure some of which are located within the Green Belt. The value? development of these sites could adversely affect landscape quality although until both the scale and type of e) Will it conserve and enhance development to be accommodated has been determined, this effect is uncertain. Furthermore, the long-term the character and quality of the environmental benefits resulting from the decarbonisation of energy supplies will be positive. landscapes in the Borough? Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed negative and positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to conserve and, where possible, enhance cultural heritage assets including by promoting heritage-led development; • Ensure areas of historic and cultural heritage importance within Pennine Fringe are protected. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should promote high standards of architectural and urban design. • Ensure that new employment related development is prioritised within the Borough’s main urban centres ahead of the release of greenfield sites.

11. To protect and a) Will it protect and/or improve In the short to medium term, a dispersed approach to residential development (although not as potentially improve local the environment of town concentrated or significant as Spatial Option 1), may have an adverse effect on environmental quality as a result of environmental centres and other urban areas? construction activities although this temporary effect is likely to be common to all options. quality. b) Will more trees and woodland Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 3, in the longer term it is considered that this option has the potential to enhance be planted? environmental quality principally through a reduction in car use and associated reductions in emissions to air and noise by ensuring new economic development is located on key transport corridors and town centres. In addition, c) Will it reduce light and noise -/+ -/+ + pollution? there may be potential for new development to enhance the quality of the built environment by incorporating high quality landscaping and open space (although this is subject to the specific requirements of detailed policies contained d) Will it comply with air quality within the Core Strategy). However, there is potential for this option to result in the loss of greenfield sites and open process and regulation? space as a result of development pressure for housing and employment land over the plan period. In this context, it is e) Will it reduce emissions of noted that Grounds of the former Longlands DOA includes an area of extensive woodland covered by a Tree Preservation Order which could be adversely affected by new development should proposals not seek to protect this

D28

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term greenhouse gases? asset. Concentrating growth in urban areas and new employment development in accessible locations may reduce the need to travel by car (and associated emissions to air and noise) although a more dispersed pattern of development relative to Spatial Option 1, whilst reducing congestion within the main centres, may result in increased car use which could partially offset positive effects on this objective. Like Spatial Options 1 and 3, this option includes broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised energy infrastructure, the provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this objective in terms of greenhouse gas reduction. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective although in the short/medium term it is recognised that there may be potential for negative effects associated with construction activities.

Mitigation: • Existing environmental assets should be protected from future development. Greenfield sites should only be considered where no suitable brownfield sites are available. • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of energy efficient design including, where appropriate, renewable energy provision. • Maximise contributions from new development towards open space provision.

12. To protect and a) Will it conserve and enhance Like Spatial Options 1 and 3, this option is expected to encourage development of brownfield land which will help to enhance habitats and species and minimise adverse effects on biodiversity. Further, although there may be a loss of some greenfield sites, this is biodiversity. provide for the long-term expected to be limited and, therefore, effects on biodiversity assets minimal (although this is dependent on the exact management of natural habitats sites taken forward for development). and wildlife? -/+ -/+ -/+ Subject to the findings of the HRA, locating development within the Borough’s urban areas is expected to avoid any b) Will it improve the quality and direct impact on the Peak District Moors SPA and the South Pennine SAC. However, development within or in close extent of designated and non- proximity to urban areas towards the east of the Borough and within the urban fringe may increase recreational designated sites? pressures on the SPA/SAC as well as several UK BAP Priority Habitats in the medium to long term. In this context, a number of the DOAs which, under this option, would be brought forward either include or are in close proximity to the c) Will it provide areas of green Ashton Canal ,which is designated as a SSSI and contains a European protected species (floating water plantain), or

D29

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term infrastructure? the Huddersfield Narrow Canal, which is also designated as a SSSI. d) Will it provide opportunities to There may be opportunities as part of new development schemes to enhance existing, or incorporate new, green enhance the environment and infrastructure which could potentially have a positive effect on this objective by improving the quality and extent of create new conservation assets habitat and increasing accessibility of both existing and prospective residents to such assets. However, this is (or restore existing wildlife dependent on the detailed policies contained within the Core Strategy and the competing priorities for developer habitats)? contributions. e) Will it bring nature closer to Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive/negative effect on this objective. people, especially in the most urbanised areas? Mitigation: • Any proposed development within the Pennine Fringe would need to be managed sensitively and located in areas which have a minimal impact on local sites of biodiversity/nature conservation importance. • Core Strategy policies should seek to avoid negative effects on Tameside’s biodiversity assets and identify opportunities for enhancing their quality where appropriate. • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets, closely linked with existing and new development. • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land for residential and employment related uses.

13. To protect and a) Will it improve the quality of It is anticipated that this option will not have a negative effect on water quality. This will be dependent on the specifics improve the quality waterbodies? of site location and eventual use and it is expected that project specific mitigation would be implemented for each of controlled waters. development which would nullify any adverse effects. b) Will it support sustainable urban drainage? New development will increase water resource use both in the short term during construction and in the longer term once development is complete. However, until the volume of new development has been determined the impact on c) Will it reduce water ? ? ? water resource availability is uncertain. consumption? Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain effect on this objective.

Mitigation:

D30

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of water efficiency. • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy require, where appropriate, new development to incorporate measures to maintain/improve water quality. Such measures may include, for example, sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS).

14. To protect and a) Will it help to promote the wise This option is expected to encourage the redevelopment of previously developed, brownfield land within the urban improve landscape use of land by minimising area serving to help protect landscape character and quality and reduce the amount of degraded and underused land. character and development on Greenfield Bringing forward brownfield sites for development may also require remediation works thereby reducing land quality. sites? contamination (although this could increase costs associated with development and therefore the viability of sites). b) Will it help to reduce the Whilst there may be a need to release some greenfield sites under this option, it is expected that the area of land amount of degraded and made available for development would be limited, particularly when compared to Spatial Option 3, and any impacts on underused land? landscape quality minimal. That being said, landscape impacts associated with development towards the urban fringe may be more significant and, like Spatial Options 1 and 3, the option does include broad locations with the potential for c) Will it reduce land development of decentralised energy and flood risk management infrastructure some of which are located within the contamination? Green Belt. The development of these sites could adversely affect landscape quality although until both the scale and d) Will it promote the use of + + + type of development to be accommodated has been determined, this effect is uncertain. previously developed land? On balance, and taking into account the fact that the majority of new development would be within the urban area and on brownfield land, this option is expected to have a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Existing open space should be protected through this option. • Areas of landscape quality within the Pennine Fringe should be protected from development. • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land.

15. To ensure the a) Will it raise awareness of It is unclear how this option will raise directly awareness of resource depletion or promote the use of recycled and prudent use of resource depletion? secondary materials. However, it is expected that the option will encourage development on brownfield land, helping natural resources b) Will it promote the use of + + + to promote the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure, and will result in only a limited release of and the sustainable recycled and secondary greenfield land which is likely to have a positive effect in relation to sustainable resource use albeit the magnitude of management of materials? this effect is likely to be less than that identified under Spatial Option 1. existing resources.

D31

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term c) Will it promote the re-use of existing buildings and long life Mitigation: in new buildings? • Core Strategy policies relating to sustainable design should encourage the use of recycled and secondary materials in new development. • There should be consideration within this option to prioritise new development on deliverable brownfield sites.

16. To address the need a) Will it protect Tameside from Under this option some new residential and employment development may again be located on land close to the River to limit and adapt to climate change impacts? Tame, some of which is designated as Flood Zone 3 and, further, there is recognition that greenfield land will be climate change. considered for development which could have some negative impacts in relation to flood risk within the Borough b) Will it minimise the risk of (particularly with those areas identified within the SFRA). However, it can be reasonably assumed that new flooding from rivers and development proposals which may result in an increase in flood risk will be accompanied by a FRA and incorporate watercourses to people and property? suitable flood alleviation measures thereby minimising the risk of flooding further. Further, like Spatial Options 1 and 3, this option includes broad locations with the potential for development of flood risk management infrastructure. This c) Will the proposal increase is likely to help minimise the risk of flooding from new development and protect Tameside from climate change green infrastructure across the impacts although until specific details are made available as to the type of measures to be implemented, effects on Borough? this aspect of the objective remain uncertain. d) Will it increase the proportion of Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 3, there may be opportunities as part of new development proposals to enhance energy both purchased and existing, or incorporate new, green infrastructure which could potentially have a positive effect on this objective by generated from renewable and 0 0 0 providing space for flood waters to flow through and additional areas for future flood storage. However, this is sustainable sources? dependent on policies contained within the Core Strategy, the competing priorities for developer contributions and e) Will it maximise the production details of site specific proposals. and/or use of renewable Like Spatial Options 1 and 3, this option does include broad locations with the potential for development of energy? decentralised energy infrastructure, the provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this aspect of the f) Will it increase energy objective. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of efficiency? infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Taking into account the extent of existing flood risk in the Borough, the expectation that only a relatively limited amount of greenfield land will be brought forward for development and an assumption that proposals will be accompanied by a FRA/incorporate suitable mitigation measures, this option has been assessed as having a neutral effect on this objective.

D32

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets to provide opportunities for flood storage. • Core Strategy policies should seek to avoid development on greenfield sites (particularly within those settlements referenced within the SFRA). • The Council should explore the potential for community renewable energy schemes and include a presumption in favour of renewable energy development. • Core Strategy policies should seek to promote as close to greenfield runoff rates as possible.

17. To reduce the need a) Will it encourage a modal shift Focusing growth across the Borough’s urban areas and new employment development in accessible locations is likely to travel. to more sustainable forms of to reduce the need to travel by car as new development is likely to be in close proximity to services and facilities travel? and/or well connected to the public transport network. The more dispersed approach to development under this option b) Will it reduce traffic volumes may also help reduce congestion relative to Spatial Option 1 (which comprises a more concentrated approach to and congestion? development) although this may result in increased car use in some areas which could partially offset positive effects on this objective. c) Will it improve accessibility to On balance, this option is expected to help encourage a modal shift to more sustainable forms of transport and reduce work by public transport, the need to travel. It has therefore been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective. walking and cycling? + + + d) Will it reduce road traffic accidents? Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should positively promote walking and cycling as part of new developments. • Ensure that any new development proposed within the urban fringe is accessible by public transport/ contributions should be sought from developers to ensure a provision is made. • Ensure that sites identified for employment use within motorway corridors are accessible by transport modes other than private car.

D33

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term production, and recycling? reused/recycled. increase re-use, c) Will it reduce the amount of It is not clear how the option will actively improve domestic waste recycling or reduce the amount of residual waste to recycling and residual waste to landfill? landfill/arisings from construction and demolition. recovery rates. d) Will it reduce waste arising from Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain effect on this objective. construction and demolition?

Mitigation: • The provision of recycling facilities within new developments should be a component of Core Strategy design and/or waste management policies. • The reuse of construction and demotion wastes on site should be promoted.

19. To establish a a) Will it help to deliver a zero By focusing new residential development within urban areas, this option has the potential to help improve the vitality prosperous Borough carbon economy? and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres in the medium to long term. This reflects the assumption that that offers attractive prospective residents will be able to easily access the centres’ shops and services thereby increasing spend and opportunities to b) Will it enhance and develop the reducing loss of expenditure to competing centres although in dispersing residential development more broadly across individuals, economic potential of town the Borough, the magnitude of this effect may be reduced relative to Spatial Option 1. businesses and centres? This option does not specifically seek to concentrate new development within Tameside’s most deprived areas communities. c) Will it provide, or contribute to, however, it does seek to focus new economic development and some residential development within urban centres the availability of a balanced and locations accessible by deprived communities including the DOAs which is expected to have a positive effect on portfolio of employment sites? this aspect of the objective. That being said, the extent to which job creation is locally significant will depend on the d) Will it help to diversify the + + + type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) and the recruitment policies of prospective employers. economy? This option does not specify the volume or type of employment land to be provided over the plan period which is likely e) Will it prevent the loss of local to be covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. Consequently, the effect of businesses? this option on employment land supply, economic diversification, support to green industries and investment in research and development is, to some extent, uncertain. That being said, by enabling the release of greenfield sites f) Will it help to reduce levels of for development this option may enable a greater range of employment sites to come forward relative to Spatial Option deprivation? 1. However, it is not expected that the volume of greenfield land released for development under this option would be g) Will it support the development significant and, therefore, any effects on this aspect of the objective are unlikely to be significant. of green industries? Opportunities to enhance the economic benefit from the historic environment do exist, as the Borough’s historic areas h) Will it encourage investment in are often found within existing settlement centres.

D34

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Research and Development Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective. and in emerging technologies?

i) Will it increase the economic Mitigation: benefit (e.g. heritage led regeneration, tourism, • None identified. environmental economy, cultural economy) derived from the historic environment?

21. To secure economic a) Will it meet the employment This option is expected to deliver employment related development within, or accessible to, those areas which are inclusion. needs of local people? most deprived and where unemployment rates are high (although development is less targeted towards these areas b) Will it reduce unemployment compared to Spatial Option 1). This has been assessed as having a potentially positive effect on this objective levels? although the magnitude of this effect is to some extent dependent on the type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) as well as the recruitment policies of prospective employers. There is also a risk that focusing c) Will it improve the physical economic development in locations such as those along the key transport corridors may not benefit those communities accessibility of jobs through the not in close proximity to these transport nodes. location of sites and transport + + + The Borough’s urban areas contain a number of cultural heritage assets. Development within these areas therefore links close to areas of high unemployment? has the potential to capitalise on this strong heritage to drive regeneration. However, the extent to which this is realised will be dependent on the provisions contained within the more detailed economic based Core Strategy d) Will it promote heritage-led policies and site specific proposals. regeneration? Overall, this option has been assessed as having positive effect on this objective.

D35

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • None identified.

22. To develop and a) Will it provide better paid and As set out under the assessment of this option against SA Objective 21, Option 2 is expected to deliver employment maintain a healthy higher quality jobs? related development within, or well accessible to, those areas which are most deprived and where unemployment labour market. rates are high (although less specific attention is given to these areas relative to Spatial Option 1). This has been b) Will it increase employment assessed as having a potentially significant positive effect on this objective although the magnitude of this effect is to opportunities within or some extent dependent on the type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) as well as the accessible to the most deprived recruitment policies of prospective employers. areas? This option does not specify the volume or type of employment land to be provided which is likely to be covered by c) Will it help to diversify the + + + economy of the Borough? more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. Consequently, the effect of this option on the provision of high quality jobs and economic diversification is unknown. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • None identified.

23. To develop strategic a) Will it reduce traffic congestion Concentrating new residential development within urban areas and economic development in accessible locations is transport, and improve safety for road expected to help reduce the need to travel by car which in-turn will reduce traffic congestion and improve road safety. communication and users? A more dispersed approach to development within the urban area may also help reduce congestion relative to Spatial economic b) Will it increase the level of Option 1 (which comprises a more concentrated approach to development). However, positive effects on this infrastructure. investment in and use of rail objective may also be partially offset by a more dispersed approach to development that could encourage car use, and water freight transport? + + + particularly if sites in the urban fringe/suburban areas are not well served by public transport. Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along the Metrolink extension and rail network c) Will it improve transport links, nodes is expected to increase demand for these public transport services. In-turn, this may help to maintain existing, ICT, homeworking, and green and (potentially) stimulate investment in new, services. travel plans? Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

D36

Strategic Spatial Option 2: Concentrate growth in the wider urban area with dispersed residential development and employment focused on accessible locations

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Mitigation: • Ensure any proposed development located in the urban fringe is still accessible by public transport. • Consider the potential of water freight transport in identifying locations for new development. • Encourage the preparation of green travel plans as part of new development proposals. • Consider how policies contained within the Core Strategy can encourage home working (e.g. through the provision of high speed broadband).

D37

D38

Strategic Spatial Option 3: Growth in the wider urban area, with dispersed residential development and the majority of employment focused in accessible locations, with targeted expansion at broad strategic locations to facilitate sustainable economic growth.

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

1. To improve access a) Will it provide additional The Tameside SHMA (2008) identifies that across the Borough demand for all types of housing (with the exception of to good quality, affordable housing? terraced houses) exceeds supply (particularly for detached houses, bungalow and flats/apartments and properties with affordable and b) Will it provide an appropriate one and four or more bedrooms). Under this option, residential development would be dispersed within the wider resource efficient mix of housing to meet urban area, helping to meet Borough-wide housing needs, including for affordable housing. This option is also housing. residents’ needs? expected to provide greater scope (relative to Spatial Options 1 and 2) to deliver a wider mix of housing (in terms of c) Will it reduce the number of both type, tenure and size) by bringing forward a greater range of sites. Allied to this, the option will allow for the small unfit and empty homes? scale release of greenfield (including Green Belt) sites, helping to ensure that there is a sufficient range of sites to meet the Borough’s projected housing need. Under this option there is also potential to fully realise the existing Unitary Development Plan (UDP) Development Opportunity Areas (DOAs) which could deliver a significant proportion of new residential development in those areas + ++ ++ where demand for affordable housing is greatest (namely, Ashton, Hyde and Stalybridge). This may also provide opportunities to replace/refurbish existing unfit and empty homes. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant medium to long term positive effect on improving access to good quality, affordable and resource efficient housing.

Mitigation: • Subject to viability considerations, consider adopting varying site size thresholds for affordable housing across the Borough areas to meet local needs. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek, where possible, to reduce the number of unfit and empty homes.

2. To enable people to a) Will it improve the health of As identified under Spatial Options 1 and 2, there is potential for the construction of new development to have a short enjoy a long life, people living in the Borough? to medium term negative effect on the health and wellbeing of residents in close proximity to sites and along transport free from disease b) Will it promote healthy routes. However, dispersing new residential development across the wider urban area may serve to keep levels of and limiting lifestyles? -/+ -/+ -/+ disturbance below thresholds were they could have a significant adverse effect on human health. illnesses. c) Will it improve access to health Dispersing residential development across the Borough’s urban areas may result in development in locations which facilities? are not necessarily accessible although with regard to employment development it may encourage walking/cycling as d) Will it reduce death rates and services and employment opportunities are required to be accessible. The potential for this option to bring forward

D39

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term negative health impacts in key and fully realise the DOAs is also expected to encourage mixed-use development within or in close proximity to the vulnerable groups? Borough’s main centres including Ashton, Droylsden, Mossley,Stalybridge and Hyde, further reducing the need to travel by car. This is expected to generate a positive effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. However, this option will generate a more dispersed pattern of development relative to Spatial Option 1 and the release of greenfield sites/sites within the Green Belt outside existing settlement boundaries (if not adequately served by public transport) may result in increased car use. Dispersing residential development across the wider urban area could help ensure that prospective residents have easy access to health care facilities although there is potential that for some sites, particularly towards/beyond the urban/rural fringe, health care facilities will be relatively inaccessible. It is therefore important that a more dispersed approach to residential development retains a commitment to accessibility. As with Spatial Options 1 and 2, new development may support increased investment in existing and new facilities and in dispersing residential development, and in brining forward strategic locations, there may be scope for Borough-wide investment. Relative to Option 1, dispersing residential development may reduce pressure on existing health facilities and services although there is a risk that new investment could be drawn away from the Borough’s most deprived wards thereby maintaining or increasing existing levels of health deprivation. This option will result in the loss of protected green space/open space to accommodate the Borough’s housing requirement and deliver high quality employment development which may reduce accessibility to recreational opportunities and generate an adverse effect in relation to the promotion of healthy lifestyles. Further, there is also a risk that in bringing forward some DOAs this option will result in the loss of open space and indoor sports facilities (for example, Market Street/Sedgley Buildings/Fairfield Locks DOA includes public open space and a swimming pool). Should adequate provision not be made for replacement facilities, this could have a negative effect on this objective. However, there is potential for new residential development to support and incorporate the provision of new facilities whilst more dispersed growth toward the urban/rural fringe may increase accessibility to the countryside for prospective residents relative to Spatial Option 1. Further, development of a number of DOAs may present opportunities to enhance accessibility to, and the use of, canals and the River Tame which may encourage their use for recreational purposes. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive and negative effect on this objective.

Mitigation:

D40

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis health care provision, in liaison with local health care providers and by mapping provision against proposed development sites. • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development. • Ensure that any loss of open space/recreational facilities is mitigated through replacement provision/opportunities are sought to enhance provision subject to viability considerations.

3. To develop strong a) Will it improve people’s As set out under the assessment of Spatial Option 1, the Joint Strategic Health Needs Assessment (2009) highlights and positive perception of their local area that BME communities mainly live in Ashton-under-Lyne and Hyde. By focusing new development in these areas, and relationships being a place where people particularly Ashton town centre, this option has the potential to promote community cohesion. This could be achieved between people from different ethnic by the development of a mix of housing types to meet specific local needs and through the provision of new facilities in from different backgrounds get on well locations that can be accessed by all members of the community. backgrounds and together? This option will promote the refurbishment/redevelopment of sites that are presently vacant/derelict/underused communities. b) Will it create a sense of including those within the DOAs. This provides an opportunity to improve the overall quality of the urban environment belonging and wellbeing for all + + + and to create a stronger identity for these areas which is expected to help create a sense of belonging, civic pride and members of the community? wellbeing for all members of the community. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • None identified.

4. To deliver urban a) Will it improve economic, This option does not concentrate new development within Tameside’s most deprived areas however, it does seek to renaissance. social and environmental focus new economic development and some residential development within urban centres and in particular Ashton conditions in the most town centre which includes, and is in close proximity to, areas suffering from high levels of deprivation. This is likely to deprived areas? + + + increase the provision of housing and accessibility to jobs and new facilities in these areas. However, it should be b) Will it improve the quality of noted that there is potential for some new development to be drawn away from these urban centres and towards areas at the urban fringe which could undermine positive effects on this objective. the built environment through high standards of sustainable As with Spatial Options 1 and 2, there is potential for new development to enhance the quality of the built environment design and construction of and to improve townscapes (subject to more detailed policies on design contained within the Core Strategy). However,

D41

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term new and existing buildings? there is also the potential that this option could deliver development that adversely affects the character of the Borough’s older urban centres should new development in these areas be unsympathetically designed. By supporting c) Will it improve townscapes and urban centres? the realisation of the DOAs, this option has the potential to generate a significant positive effect in relation to this aspect of this objective by revitalising these parts of the Borough’s main centres. This reflects the fact that the majority of the DOAs are characterised as suffering from a combination of one or more of the following: underused/run down premises; derelict/vacant land or buildings; unwelcoming public spaces; poor access. On balance, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on urban renaissance.

Mitigation: • None identified.

5. To regenerate rural a) Will it support rural This option does not contain any specific proposals for rural areas however, by promoting a more dispersed pattern of areas. diversification? development and releasing strategic greenfield (including Green Belt) sites this option may help address the needs of b) Will it address rural needs? settlements located in the rural/urban fringe. There is a danger that in releasing greenfield sites and Green Belt land, this option may result in the loss of c) Will it support sustainable food and farming? agricultural land which would have a negative effect on this aspect of this objective. In this context, part of the Godley Hill/The Thorns/Hare Hill/Mottram Road DOA is known to be in agricultural use. -/+ -/+ -/+ Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive and negative effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Consider how Core Strategy policies can promote rural regeneration. Options may include a specific rural areas policy which makes provision for affordable and market rural housing and employment. • The loss of the best and most versatile agricultural land should be avoided. 6. To improve access a) Will it improve the provision of -/ -/ Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 2, this option has the potential to improve the viability of existing shops, services and to and use of basic shops or services within the + facilities in the medium to long term, commensurate with an increased local population that will be able to easily goods, services and main centres? ++ ++ access the Borough’s main centres (thereby increasing potential spend and reducing loss of expenditure to competing

D42

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term amenities. b) Will it improve access for centres). This option also places particular emphasis on enhancing the economic prosperity of Ashton town centre those with disabilities? which is identified within the Tameside Retail Study (2010) as requiring additional comparison goods floorpsace in order for it to maintain its role and function as a sub-regional centre. c) Will it ensure the protection, creation and access to green Under this option there is also potential to fully realise the existing DOAs. This could significantly improve retail offer spaces including access and as well as the overall quality of the Borough’s town centres in the medium to long term which may attract shoppers recreation in the Countryside and retailers, helping to revert an increasing number of empty and older shops. For example, redevelopment of in and around towns in the Cavendish Street/Old Street/Henry Square presents an opportunity to realise the Council’s aspirations to revitalise the Borough? Ashton town centre by providing high quality mixed used development. d) Will it improve access to skills Whilst this option is expected to encourage the use of brownfield land by focusing new development in urban areas, and training for improving some greenfield land/protected green spaces would be released to accommodate new residential and employment employment potential? related development. However, negative effects in relation to this aspect of the objective may be partially offset by a reduction in development pressure on urban green spaces afforded by a more dispersed approach to growth and the e) Will it improve access to cultural facilities? release of greenfield (including, potentially, Green Belt) sites whilst development in the urban fringe may increase accessibility to the countryside for prospective residents. There is also potential to increase the provision of open spaces within the Borough’s main centres as part of new developments although this is subject to detailed policies on open space provision contained within the Core Strategy. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the medium to long term with a positive effect likely to be felt in the short term. However, in view of the potential loss of greenfield land/green spaces, the option has also been assessed as having a negative effect on this objective in the medium to long term.

Mitigation: • Maximise contributions from new developments towards open space provision. • Consider if/how accessibility to the countryside can be promoted as part of new development. • Consider how policies within the Core Strategy can improve access for those with disabilities. • Ensure that any loss of green space is mitigated through replacement provision/opportunities are sought to enhance provision subject to viability considerations.

D43

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

7. To reduce crime, a) Will it reduce crime levels and New employment related development and the revitalisation of the Borough’s urban centres may discourage crime disorder and the individuals’ fear of crime? although this is currently uncertain. fear of crime. b) Will it promote design that discourages crime? ? ? ? Mitigation: c) Will it help to reduce levels of • Ensure that design policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to design out crime. anti-social behaviour?

8. To enable groups a) Will it enable the community It is unclear how this option will enable groups and communities to contribute to decision-making. However, it should and communities to sector to contribute to and be noted that engagement on all options/policies that comprise the Core Strategy and subsequent development contribute to have influence in decision- proposals will be undertaken in accordance with the Council’s SCI and a consultation plan which will seek to engage decision-making. making? ? ? ? all community sectors including hard to reach groups. b) Will it identify and engage with hard to reach stakeholders? Mitigation: • None identified.

9. To provide a) Will it increase community Dispersing residential development across the Borough’s urban areas could help ensure that prospective residents education which is access to, and involvement are able to easily access schools and colleges. However, there is potential that development, particularly towards the accessible to all and with, schools and colleges? urban fringe and on more remote greenfield/Green Belt sites could suffer from a lack of accessibility to educational valued by all and facilities. Depending upon the size of allocations, opportunities to deliver new educational facilities to serve new b) Will it increase the levels of produces development should be considered. If allocations are of an insufficient size to support new facilities, then the participation and attainment in allocations should be placed within walking distance of existing primary schools. achievements above education? the norm. + + + Similar to Spatial Option 2, this option may help to avoid placing increased pressure on existing educational facilities in those locations where facilities are nearing capacity by distributing residential development (and therefore demand for facilities) across the Borough. Further, new development also has the potential to increase the viability of existing educational facilities and services and to stimulate increased investment in new facilities by generating demand (through the influx of new residents) and through developer contributions. However, distributing development across the Borough’s urban area may undermine benefits associated with economies of scale and could draw investment away from Tameside’s most deprived areas thereby maintaining or increasing existing levels of education deprivation.

D44

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective in the short, medium and long term.

Mitigation: • Consider carefully the location of new development vis-à-vis educational need, in liaison with providers. • Ensure new development is accessible to educational facilities by walking, cycling and public transport. • Maximise contributions from new development towards educational facilities.

10. To protect places a) Will it protect and/or enhance Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 2, in focusing new development in the Borough’s urban centres this option may have and enhance, site, features and areas of a negative effect on the historic environment particularly in the short term during associated construction activities landscapes and historical, archaeological and although there is potential for development pressure on these assets to be reduced through the dispersal of growth. buildings of historic, cultural value / potential? Like Spatial Options 1 and 2, there is potential for increasing accessibility to the historic environment and opportunities cultural and b) Will it help to conserve historic may be generated for heritage-led redevelopment which could serve to protect and enhance areas or buildings of archaeological buildings through sensitive historical, archaeological and cultural value. value. adaptation and re-use? Development in the Borough’s main urban centres is expected to significantly improve built form. The DOAs in c) Will it use architectural and particular are characterised as suffering from a combination of one or more of the following: underused/run down urban design to enhance the premises; derelict/vacant land or buildings; unwelcoming public spaces; poor access. As such, this option presents an local character and “sense of opportunity to revitalise parts of the Borough main centres through comprehensive redevelopment schemes. place” of development? -/+ -/+ -/+ However, there is a risk that in dispersing new development more widely across the Borough, these opportunities may not be fully realised. d) Will it improve access to and understanding of buildings and Like Spatial Options 1 and 2, under this option it is envisaged that the majority of new development will be within the landscapes of historic/cultural urban area, avoiding significant adverse effects on landscape quality, particularly in the more rural parts of the value? Borough to the east. That being said, development of greenfield sites, protected green space and undeveloped Green Belt could have negative effect on this aspect of the objective. e) Will it conserve and enhance the character and quality of the Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive and negative effect on this objective. landscapes in the Borough?

Mitigation:

D45

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to conserve and, where possible, enhance cultural heritage assets including by promoting heritage-led development. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should promote high standards of architectural and urban design. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek to conserve and enhance the character and quality of the Borough’s landscapes. • Ensure that new employment related development is prioritised within the Borough’s main urban centres ahead of the release of greenfield sites.

11. To protect and a) Will it protect and/or improve Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 2, development in Tameside’s urban areas may have a short to medium term adverse improve local the environment of town effect on environmental quality due to construction activities although dispersing new residential development across environmental centres and other urban the urban area may serve to keep levels of disturbance below thresholds were they could have a significant adverse quality. areas? effect on the environment of town centres and other urban areas. b) Will more trees and woodland In the longer term, it is considered that this option has the potential to enhance environmental quality through a be planted? reduction in car use (and associated reductions in emissions to air and noise) and by the redevelopment of town c) Will it reduce light and noise centre sites including DOAs. However, as this option allows for the loss of protected green space/open space, there is pollution? a risk new development could adversely affect the environment of town centres and other urban areas although the dispersal of new development and release of strategic greenfield sites may reduce pressure on urban green space. d) Will it comply with air quality process and regulation? Development of greenfield sites, protected green space and undeveloped Green Belt may result in the loss of trees -/+ -/+ -/+ and woodland, generating a negative effect in relation to this aspect of the objective. In this context, it is noted that e) Will it reduce emissions of Grounds of the former Longlands DOA includes an area of extensive woodland covered by a Tree Preservation Order greenhouse gases? which could be adversely affected by new development should proposals not seek to protect this asset. As with Spatial Options 1 and 2, the volume of greenhouse gas emissions associated with this option is in part dependent on the detailed Core Strategy policies covering sustainable design as well as the scale of developments brought forward and competing priorities for developer contributions (vis-à-vis the viability of incorporating sustainable design techniques). Concentrating growth in urban areas and new employment development in accessible locations may reduce the need to travel by car (and associated emissions to air and noise) although a more dispersed pattern of development relative to Spatial Option 1 and the release of greenfield sites (if not adequately served by public transport) may result in increased car use which could have a negative effect on this objective. Like Spatial Options 1 and 2, this option includes broad locations with the potential for development of decentralised

D46

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term energy infrastructure, the provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this objective in terms of greenhouse gas reduction. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a mixed positive and negative effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy incorporate high standards of energy efficient design including, where appropriate, renewable energy provision. • Ensure that new economic development is located in close proximity to public transport. • Ensure that policies contained within the Core Strategy seek to protect urban green space and maximise open space provision.

12. To protect and a) Will it conserve and enhance This option is expected to encourage development of brownfield land which will help to minimise adverse effects on enhance habitats and species and biodiversity. Nonetheless, under this option there will be a release of some greenfield sites and, potentially, biodiversity. provide for the long-term development beyond settlement boundaries within the Green Belt which could have both a direct (e.g. loss of habitat) management of natural and indirect (e.g. noise and emissions) impact on habitats and species. habitats and wildlife? Subject to the findings of the HRA, locating development within the Borough’s urban areas is expected to avoid any b) Will it improve the quality and direct impact on the Peak District Moors SPA and the South Pennine SAC. However, development within or in close extent of designated and non- proximity to urban areas towards the east of the Borough may increase recreational pressures on the SPA/SAC as designated sites? well as several UK BAP Priority Habitats in the medium to longer term. Again this conclusion is subject to the findings - - - of the HRA. c) Will it provide areas of green infrastructure? Like Spatial Options 1 and 2, development under this option may affect the Borough’s SSSIs and Local Nature Reserves. In this context, a number of the DOAs which, under this option, would be brought forward either include or d) Will it provide opportunities to are in close proximity to the Ashton Canal ,which is designated as a SSSI and contains a European protected species enhance the environment and (floating water plantain), or the Huddersfield Narrow Canal, which is also designated as a SSSI. create new conservation assets (or restore existing There may be opportunities as part of new development schemes to enhance existing, or incorporate new, green wildlife habitats)? infrastructure which could potentially have a significant positive effect on this objective by improving the quality and extent of habitat and increasing accessibility of both existing and prospective residents to such assets. However, this

D47

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term e) Will it bring nature closer to is dependent on the detailed policies contained within the Core Strategy and the competing priorities for developer people, especially in the most contributions. urbanised areas? Overall, this option has been assessed as having a negative effect on this objective. Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should seek to avoid negative effects on Tameside’s biodiversity assets and identify opportunities for enhancing their quality where appropriate. • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets, closely linked with existing and new development. • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land.

13. To protect and a) Will it improve the quality of It is anticipated that this option will not have a negative effect on water quality. This will be however dependent on the improve the quality waterbodies? specifics of site location and eventual use and it is expected that project specific mitigation would be implemented for of controlled waters. each development which would nullify any adverse effects. b) Will it support sustainable urban drainage? New development will increase water resource use both in the short term during construction and in the longer term once development is complete. However, until the volume of new development has been determined the impact on c) Will it reduce water water resource availability is uncertain. consumption? ? ? ? Overall, this option has been assessed as having an uncertain effect on this objective.

14. To protect and a) Will it help to promote the wise This option is expected to help encourage the redevelopment of previously developed, brownfield land within the improve landscape use of land by minimising -/+ -/+ -/+ urban area serving to help protect landscape character and quality and reduce the amount of degraded and character and development on Greenfield underused land. Bringing forward brownfield sites for development may also require remediation works thereby

D48

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term quality. sites? reducing land contamination (although this could increase costs associated with development and therefore the viability of sites). b) Will it help to reduce the amount of degraded and Under this option there would be the release of some protected green space/greenfield sites (including, potentially, in underused land? the Green Belt) for housing, high quality employment-related development and to deliver flood risk management and c) Will it reduce land decentralised energy infrastructure. This would have a negative effect on this objective due to the loss of greenfield contamination? land and the potential for adverse effects on landscape quality, particularly in the urban fringe and beyond existing settlement boundaries. d) Will it promote the use of On balance, this option is expected to have a mixed positive and negative effect on this objective. previously developed land?

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should prioritise development of brownfield land for residential and employment related uses. • Policies contained within the Core Strategy should seek to conserve and enhance the character and quality of the Borough’s landscapes.

15. To ensure the a) Will it raise awareness of It is unclear how this option will raise awareness of resource depletion or promote the use of recycled and secondary prudent use of resource depletion? materials. However, it is expected that the option will encourage development on brownfield land helping to promote natural resources the reuse of buildings and other supporting infrastructure. That being said, this option will also result in the release of b) Will it promote the use of and the sustainable greenfield sites which may include Green Belt land. On balance, therefore, this option has been assessed as having a recycled and secondary mixed positive and negative effect on this objective. management of materials? existing resources.

c) Will it promote the re-use of -/+ -/+ -/+ existing buildings and long life Mitigation: in new buildings? • Core Strategy policies relating to sustainable design should encourage the use of recycled and secondary materials in new development. • There should be consideration within this option to prioritise new development on deliverable brownfield sites.

D49

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

16. To address the need a) Will it protect Tameside from Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 2, under this option some new residential and employment development may be to limit and adapt to climate change impacts? located on land close to the River Tame, some of which is designated as Flood Zone 3. Whilst this option is expected climate change. b) Will it minimise the risk of to concentrate the majority of new development within urban areas and on brownfield sites, there would be a release flooding from rivers and of some protected green spaces/greenfield land (including Green Belt) for new residential and, potentially, economic watercourses to people and development. This could serve to increase run off rates and flood risk although until the extent of greenfield land property? released and site locations have been determined this is currently uncertain. Further, it can be reasonably assumed that new development proposals which may result in an increase in flood risk will be accompanied by a FRA and c) Will the proposal increase incorporate suitable flood alleviation measures thereby minimising the risk of flooding further. This option also green infrastructure across the includes broad locations with the potential for development of flood risk management infrastructure. This is likely to Borough? help minimise the risk of flooding from new development and protect Tameside from climate change impacts although d) Will it increase the proportion until specific details are made available as to the type of measures to be implemented, effects on this aspect of the of energy both purchased and objective remain uncertain. generated from renewable and Similar to Spatial Options 1 and 2, there may be opportunities as part of new development proposals to enhance sustainable sources? existing, or incorporate new, green infrastructure which could potentially have a positive effect on this objective by e) Will it maximise the production 0 0 0 providing space for flood waters to flow through and additional areas for future flood storage. However, this is and/or use of renewable dependent on policies contained within the Core Strategy, the competing priorities for developer contributions and energy? details of site specific proposals. f) Will it increase energy Like Spatial Options 1 and 2, this option does include broad locations with the potential for development of efficiency? decentralised energy infrastructure, the provision of which could have a significant positive effect on this aspect of the objective. However, until further detail is made available (in terms of the scale of development and type of infrastructure to be provided) the magnitude of this effect remains uncertain. Taking into account the extent of existing flood risk in the Borough and the assumption that proposals will be accompanied by a FRA/incorporate suitable mitigation measures, this option has been assessed as having a neutral effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Core Strategy policies should plan for a network of green infrastructure assets to provide opportunities for flood storage.

D50

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • Core Strategy policies should seek to promote as close to greenfield runoff rates as possible. • The Council should explore the potential for community renewable energy schemes and include a presumption in favour of renewable energy development.. • Careful consideration should be given to the location of greenfield sites brought forward for development vis-à-vis the potential impact on surface water run-off rates.

17. To reduce the need a) Will it encourage a modal shift Focusing growth across the Borough’s urban areas and new employment development in accessible locations is likely to travel. to more sustainable forms of to reduce the need to travel by car as new development is likely to be in close proximity to services and facilities travel? and/or well connected to the public transport network. The more dispersed approach to development under this option may also help reduce congestion relative to Spatial Option 1 (which comprises a more concentrated approach to b) Will it reduce traffic volumes and congestion? development) although this, together with the release of greenfield sites and development beyond existing settlement boundaries (if not adequately served by public transport), may result in increased car use which could partially offset c) Will it improve accessibility to positive effects on this objective. work by public transport, walking and cycling? Development within the urban area may also help to maintain existing, and (potentially) stimulate investment in, public transport provision. In the longer term, and as part of the wider revitalisation of the Borough’s centres (which this d) Will it reduce road traffic option seeks to achieve), there may be a reduction in out-commuting to access employment and services (including accidents? retail) which could have a more significant positive effect on this objective. + + + Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along Metrolink extensions will reduce car use by encouraging employees to use public transport although it is noted that accessible locations may be taken to include motorway corridors which, if not adequately served by public transport, could result in an increased reliance on the car. On balance, this option is expected to help encourage a modal shift to more sustainable forms of transport and reduce the need to travel. It has therefore been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

D51

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term other than private car. • Ensure that any new development proposed within the urban fringe and beyond settlement boundaries is still accessible by public transport/ contributions should be sought from developers to ensure a provision is made. • Ensure that sites identified for employment use within motorway corridors are accessible by transport modes other than private car.

19. To establish a a) Will it help to deliver a zero Similar to Spatial Option 2, by focusing new residential development within urban areas, this option has the potential prosperous Borough carbon economy? to help improve the vitality and economic potential of the Borough’s main centres in the medium to long term. This that offers attractive reflects the assumption that prospective residents will be able to easily access the centres’ shops and services b) Will it enhance and develop opportunities to thereby increasing spend and reducing loss of expenditure to competing centres although in dispersing residential the economic potential of town individuals, development more broadly across the Borough, the magnitude of this effect may be reduced. centres? + ++ ++ businesses and This option places particular emphasis on enhancing the economic prosperity of Ashton town centre, which is communities. c) Will it provide, or contribute to, identified within the Tameside Retail Study (2010) as requiring additional comparison goods floorpsace in order for it the availability of a balanced to maintain its role and function as a sub-regional centre, and may bring forward a number of DOAs in other centres. portfolio of employment sites? This could significantly improve retail offer as well as the overall quality of the Borough’s town centres in the medium

D52

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term d) Will it help to diversify the to long term which may attract shoppers and retailers, helping to revert an increasing number of empty and older economy? shops. e) Will it prevent the loss of local This option is expected to maximise the provision of high quality employment land within the Borough both through the businesses? redevelopment of brownfield sites and release of strategic greenfield/Green Belt land. Whilst this may have some f) Will it help to reduce levels of short term negative effects (due to the potential requirement to relocate existing businesses), over the medium to long deprivation? term it is expected to have a significant positive effect on this aspect of the objective. Notwithstanding this, the option does not specify the volume or type of employment land to be provided over the plan period which is likely to be g) Will it support the development covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. Consequently, the effect of this of green industries? option on employment land supply, economic diversification, support to green industries and investment in research h) Will it encourage investment in and development is, to some extent, uncertain. Research and Development This option does not specifically seek to concentrate new development within Tameside’s most deprived areas (as and in emerging technologies? under Spatial Option 1) however, it does seek to focus new economic development and some residential development i) Will it increase the economic within urban centres and in particular Ashton town centre which includes, and is in close proximity to, areas suffering benefit (e.g. heritage led from high levels of deprivation. This is likely to increase the provision of housing and accessibility to jobs and new regeneration, tourism, facilities in these areas, helping to reduce levels of deprivation. That being said, the extent to which job creation is environmental economy, locally significant will depend on the type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) and the recruitment cultural economy) derived from policies of prospective employers. There is also potential for some new employment related development to be drawn the historic environment? away from these urban centres and towards areas at the urban fringe including greenfield sites which could undermine positive effects on this aspect of the objective. Development within urban areas (many of which comprise historic assets such as Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings) may provide opportunities to capitalise on the Borough’s historic environment by incorporating these elements into the design of new developments. In this respect, a greater focus placed on the redevelopment of Ashton town centre including may help to maximise the opportunity for heritage-led development. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the medium to long term with a positive effect likely to be felt in the short term.

Mitigation: • Support the relocation of existing businesses by identifying alternative sites.

D53

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term

20. To exploit the a) Will it increase the number of This option does not specify the type of employment land to be provided which is likely to be covered by more detailed growth potential of growth businesses? employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. However, in maximising the availability of employment land business sectors. b) Will it support Developing within the Borough there is considered to be greater potential (relative to Spatial Options 1 and 2) for sites to be Sectors identified in the RES delivered to support growth businesses and developing sectors. Consequently, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective. and other sub-regional/local + + + strategies? Mitigation: • None identified.

21. To secure economic a) Will it meet the employment This option does not specifically seek to concentrate new development within Tameside’s most deprived areas (as inclusion. needs of local people? under Spatial Option 1) however, it does seek to focus new economic development within or well accessible to urban b) Will it reduce unemployment centres and in particular Ashton town centre which includes, and is in close proximity to, areas suffering from high levels? levels of deprivation and where unemployment rates are high. Further, the option maximises the supply of new employment land (through the release of greenfield and, potentially, Green belt land) in order to enhance the c) Will it improve the physical Borough’s economic profile. This is expected to have a significant positive effect on reducing unemployment levels. accessibility of jobs through However, the magnitude of this effect is to some extent dependent on the type of jobs created (in the context of the the location of sites and local labour market) as well as the recruitment policies of prospective employers and there is also a risk that focusing transport links close to areas economic development in locations such as those along the Metrolink extension or at motorway corridors may not of high unemployment? + ++ ++ benefit those communities not in close proximity to these transport nodes. d) Will it promote heritage-led The Borough’s urban areas contain a number of cultural heritage assets. Development within these areas therefore regeneration? has the potential to capitalise on this strong heritage to drive regeneration. However, the extent to which this is realised will be dependent on the provisions contained within the more detailed economic based Core Strategy policies and site specific proposals. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the medium to long term with positive effects likely to be felt in the short term.

Mitigation:

D54

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term • None identified.

22. To develop and a) Will it provide better paid and As set out under the assessment of this option against SA Objective 21, Spatial Option 3 is expected to help deliver maintain a healthy higher quality jobs? employment related development within, or well accessible to, those areas which are most deprived and where labour market. b) Will it increase employment unemployment rates are high. This has been assessed as having a potentially significant positive effect on this opportunities within or objective although the magnitude of this effect is to some extent dependent on the type of jobs created (in the context of the local labour market) as well as the recruitment policies of prospective employers. accessible to the most deprived areas? This option does not specify the type of employment land to be provided which is likely to be covered by more detailed employment policies contained within the Core Strategy. However, in maximising the availability of employment land c) Will it help to diversify the economy of the Borough? + ++ ++ within the Borough there is considered to be greater potential (relative to Spatial Options 1 and 2) that sites will be delivered to support economic diversification and provide better paid and higher quality jobs. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a significant positive effect on this objective in the medium to long term with positive effects likely to be felt in the short term.

Mitigation: • None identified.

23. To develop strategic a) Will it reduce traffic congestion Concentrating new residential development within urban areas and economic development in accessible locations is transport, and improve safety for road expected to help reduce the need to travel by car which in-turn will reduce traffic congestion and improve road safety. communication and users? A more dispersed approach to development within the urban area may also help reduce congestion relative to Spatial economic Option 1 (which comprises a more concentrated approach to development). In the longer term, and as part of the b) Will it increase the level of infrastructure. wider revitalisation of the Borough’s centres (which this option seeks to achieve), there may be a reduction in out- investment in and use of rail + + + and water freight transport? commuting to access employment and services (including retail) which could have a more significant positive effect on this objective. However, positive effects on this objective may also be partially offset by a more dispersed approach to c) Will it improve transport links, development that may encourage car use, particularly if sites in the urban fringe are not well served by public ICT, homeworking, and green transport. travel plans? Locating new economic development in accessible locations such as along the Metrolink extension and rail network

D55

Timescale

SA Objectives Detailed Criteria/ Guidance Commentary / Explanation term Medium Long term Short term nodes is expected to increase demand for these public transport services. In-turn, this may help to maintain existing, and (potentially) stimulate investment in new, services. Overall, this option has been assessed as having a positive effect on this objective.

Mitigation: • Ensure any proposed development located in the urban fringe is still accessible by public transport. • Consider the potential of water freight transport in identifying locations for new development. • Encourage the preparation of green travel plans as part of new development proposals. • Consider how policies contained within the Core Strategy can encourage home working (e.g. through the provision of high speed broadband).

D56

Appendix E Possible Indicators and their Sources

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

A: Social Progress which Recognises the Needs of Everyone

1. To improve access to good Increase in Affordable Housing Annual Monitoring Report quality, affordable and resource efficient housing Housing Quality – Building for Life Annual Monitoring Report • Will it provide additional Assessment affordable housing? Number of BREEAM Buildings Annual Monitoring Report • Will it provide an appropriate mix of housing to meet % of Empty Dwellings Department of Communities and Local Government residents’ needs? Housing Strategy Statistical Index • Will it reduce the number of Percentage of homes unfit for use. unfit and empty homes? Energy Efficiency SAP rating for social housing

Net Additional Pitches – Gypsy and Travellers Annual Monitoring Report

2. To enable people to enjoy long Life Expectancy at Birth Neighbourhood Statistics life, free from disease and limiting illnesses. • Will it improve the health % of Population living in SOAs ranked by IMD Department of Communities and Local Government – of people living in the most deprived due to health factors Indices of Multiple Deprivation. Borough? • Will it promote healthy lifestyles? • Will it improve access to health facilities? • Will it reduce death rates and negative health impacts in key vulnerable groups?

3. To develop strong and % of Residents who think their local area is a Residents Opinion Survey/Annual Monitoring Report positive relationships between place where people from different people from different backgrounds get on well together. backgrounds and communities. • Will it improve people’s perception of their local area being a place where % of residents satisfied with their area as a people from different place to live. ethnic backgrounds get on well together? • Will it create a sense of belonging and wellbeing for all members of the community?

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

4. To deliver urban renaissance Population Levels Neighbourhood Statistics • Will it improve economic, social and environmental conditions in the most deprived areas? % of Population living in SOAs ranked by IMD Department of Communities and Local Government – • Will it improve the quality in the 33% most deprived due to all factors. Indices of Multiple Deprivation of the built environment through high standards of sustainable design and construction of new and Satisfaction with the Borough as a place to Residents Opinion Survey. existing buildings? live. • Will it improve townscapes and urban centres? Proportion of land that has significant or heavy Corporate Plan Monitoring/Annual Monitoring Report deposits of litter and/or detritus

5. To regenerate rural areas. The number of rural buildings brought back Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council into business use. • Will it support rural diversification? • Will it address rural needs?

6. To improve access to and use Distance travelled to work – resident Census of basic goods, services and population amenities. • Will it improve the provision of shops or services within the main centres? • Will it improve access for % of Population living in SOAs ranked by IMD Department of Communities and Local Government – those with disabilities? in the 33% most deprived due to access IMD • Will it ensure the protection, creation and access to green spaces including access and recreation in the Countryside in and around towns in the Borough? • Will it improve access to skills and training for improving employment potential? • Will it improve access to cultural facilities?

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

7. To reduce crime, disorder and % change in recorded levels of crime for the British Crime Survey Annual Report the fear of crime. seven key offences identified in the British • Will it reduce crime levels Crime Survey and individuals fear of Recorded Crime per 1000 population Annual Monitoring Report crime? • Will it promote design that discourages crime? Proportion of Adults who feel safe in their Citizens Panel • Will it help to reduce neighbourhood during the day and night levels of anti-social behaviour?

8. To enable groups and Percentage of residents who think that the Citizens Panel. communities to contribute to council listens to residents views. decision-making. • Will it enable the community sector to contribute to and have influence in decision- making? • Will it identify and engage with hard to reach stakeholders?

9. To provide education which is % of pupils obtaining 5 or more GCSE’s at Neighbourhood Statistics accessible to all and valued by grades A*-C all and produces achievements above the norm. Qualifications of working age population Annual Population Survey/Neighbourhood Statistics • Will it increase community access to, and involvement with, schools and colleges? Number of Tameside residents entering higher Annual Monitoring Report • Will it increase the levels education of participation and attainment in education? School Leavers in education, employment or Connexions training

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

B: Effective Protection of the Environment

10. To protect places and Number of Listed Buildings and number of Heritage Counts enhance, landscapes and listed buildings at risk. buildings of historic, cultural and archaeological value. • Will it protect and/or enhance site, features Number of Scheduled Ancient Monuments, and areas of historical, individual records on the Sites and archaeological and Monuments Register and Registered Historic cultural value/potential? Parks and Gardens • Will it help to conserve historic buildings through sensitive adaptation and re-use? Significant archaeological sites recorded and Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council lost due to development. • Will it use architectural and urban design to enhance the local character and “sense of place” of development? • Will it improve access to % of land area covered by Conservation Areas Annual Monitoring Report and understanding of buildings and landscapes of historic/cultural value? Number (and %) of conservation areas with Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council • To conserve and published management proposals. enhance the character and quality of the landscapes in the Number of visits to/usage of museums per Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council Borough 1000 population.

11. To protect and improve local % of residents satisfied with the cleanliness of Sustainable Community Strategy/Corporate Plan environmental quality the area. • Will it protect and/or improve the environment of town centres and other urban areas? • Will more trees and woodland be planted? • Will it reduce light and noise pollution? • Will it comply with air quality processes and regulation? • Will it reduce emissions of greenhouse gases?

12. To protect and enhance Change in Areas of Biodiversity Importance Annual Monitoring Report biodiversity. (Sites of International, National, Regional, • Will it conserve and Sub-Regional or Local Significance). enhance habitats and species and provide for the long-term management of natural

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

habitats and wildlife? Percentage of SSSI in favourable condition Natural England • Will it improve the quality and extent of designated and non-designated sites? • Will it provide areas of green infrastructure? • Will it provide opportunities to enhance Number of planning applications which Council may wish to collect data. the environment and incorporate features of biodiversity gain. create new conservation assets (or restore existing wildlife habitats)? • Will it bring nature closer to people, especially in the most urbanised areas?

13. To protect and improve the Number of developments with Sustainable Council may wish to collect data. quality of controlled waters. Urban Drainage System • Will it improve the quality of waterbodies? • Will it support sustainable urban drainage? • Will it reduce water consumption

14. To protect and improve land % of Employment Development on Previously Annual Monitoring Report quality. Developed Land. • Will it help to promote the wise use of land by minimising development on Greenfield sites? % of Housing Development on Previously Annual Monitoring Report • Will it help to reduce the Developed Land amount of degraded and underused land? • Will it reduce land contamination? • Will it promote the use of Extent of Brownfield and potentially Tameside Metropolitan Borough Council previously developed contaminated land within the Borough. land?

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

C: Prudent Use of Natural Resources

15. To ensure the prudent use of Estimated water consumption (average United Utilities Plc/OFWAT natural resources and the household consumption (;/head/d)). sustainable management of existing resources. • Will it raise awareness of resource depletion? • Will it promote the use of recycled and secondary materials? • Will it promote the re-use of existing buildings and long life in new buildings?

16. To address the need to limit Number of planning applications granted Annual Monitoring Report and adapt to climate change contrary to the advice of the Environment • Will it protect Tameside Agency on either flood defence grounds or from climate change water quality. impacts? • Will it minimise the risk of flooding from rivers and watercourses to people and property? • Will the proposal increase green infrastructure across the Renewable Energy Capacity Installed by Type Annual Monitoring Report Borough? • Will it increase the proportion of energy both purchased and generated from renewable and sustainable sources? • Will it maximise the production and/or use of renewable energy? • Will it increase energy efficiency?

17. To reduce the need to travel Amount of new residential development within Annual Monitoring Report • Will it encourage a modal 30 minutes public transport time to GP’s, shift to more sustainable Hospital, Primary School, Secondary School, forms of travel? Area of Employment and Major Retail Centre. • Will it reduce traffic volumes and congestion? • Will it improve accessibility to work by public transport, walking and cycling? • Will it reduce road traffic accidents?

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

18. To ensure the sustainable Amount of municipal waste arising and Annual Monitoring Report management of waste, minimise managed by management type (recycled, its production, and increase re- composted, incinerated, landfill). use, recycling and recovery rates. • Will it help minimise the production of waste? • Will it improve domestic waste recycling? • Will it reduce the amount Proportion of household waste which is: Annual Monitoring Report of residual waste to landfill? • Recycled • Will it reduce waste • Composted arising from construction and demolition?

D: Maintenance of High and Stable Levels of Economic Growth and Employment

19. To establish a prosperous Average weekly income for residents within Annual Business Inquiry Borough that offers attractive the Borough. opportunities to individuals, businesses and communities • Will it help to deliver a zero carbon economy? • Will it enhance and develop the economic potential of town centres? • Will it provide, or contribute to, the availability of a balanced portfolio of employment sites? • Will it help to diversify the economy? • Will it prevent the loss of local businesses? • Will it help to reduce levels of deprivation? • Will it support the development of green industries? • Will it encourage investment in Research and Development and in emerging technologies?

20. To exploit the growth Increase / Loss of VAT Registered Businesses Annual Monitoring Report potential of business sectors. per annum • Will it increase the number of growth businesses? • Will it support Developing Sectors identified in the RES and other sub- regional/local strategies?

SA Objective and Key Possible Indicators Source Questions

21. To secure economic Economic Activity Rates as a percentage of Neighbourhood Statistics inclusion. working age population • Will it meet the employment needs of local people? • Will it reduce unemployment levels? • Will it improve the physical accessibility of jobs through the location of sites and transport links close to areas of high unemployment?

22. To develop and maintain a % of occupations by different category. Neighbourhood Statistics healthy labour market. • Will it provide better paid and higher quality jobs? • Will it increase employment opportunities within the most deprived areas? • Will it help to diversify the economy of the Borough?

23. To develop strategic Travel to work by different modes (e.g. bus, Office for National Statistics transport, communication and train, car) economic infrastructure. Distance to work or sporting facilities and Audit Commission • Will it reduce traffic methods of travel used. congestion and improve safety for road users? Car ownership - % of households owning one Office for National Statistics • Will it increase the level or more car/van. of investment in and use of rail and water freight transport? • Will it improve transport links, ICT, homeworking, and green travel plans?